Commit bf531a3a730e2da8ea3d1a83ad0c13fd1aa3118c
0 parents
Added IEEE template
Showing
7 changed files
with
9588 additions
and
0 deletions
IEEEtran.cls
0 → 100644
| 1 | +++ a/IEEEtran.cls | |
| 1 | +%% | |
| 2 | +%% IEEEtran.cls 2015/08/26 version V1.8b | |
| 3 | +%% | |
| 4 | +%% This is the IEEEtran LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of | |
| 5 | +%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and | |
| 6 | +%% conferences. | |
| 7 | +%% | |
| 8 | +%% Support sites: | |
| 9 | +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ | |
| 10 | +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran | |
| 11 | +%% and | |
| 12 | +%% http://www.ieee.org/ | |
| 13 | +%% | |
| 14 | +%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes | |
| 15 | +%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version. | |
| 16 | +%% | |
| 17 | +%% | |
| 18 | +%% Contributors: | |
| 19 | +%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993), | |
| 20 | +%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996), | |
| 21 | +%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2014) | |
| 22 | +%% | |
| 23 | +%% | |
| 24 | +%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, | |
| 25 | +%% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter, | |
| 26 | +%% Juergen von Hagen | |
| 27 | +%% and | |
| 28 | +%% Copyright (c) 2001-2015 by Michael Shell | |
| 29 | +%% | |
| 30 | +%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.8b): Michael Shell | |
| 31 | +%% See: | |
| 32 | +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ | |
| 33 | +%% for current contact information. | |
| 34 | +%% | |
| 35 | +%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau | |
| 36 | +%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command | |
| 37 | +%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. | |
| 38 | +%% | |
| 39 | +%%************************************************************************* | |
| 40 | +%% Legal Notice: | |
| 41 | +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or | |
| 42 | +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or | |
| 43 | +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! | |
| 44 | +%% User assumes all risk. | |
| 45 | +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for | |
| 46 | +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, | |
| 47 | +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse | |
| 48 | +%% of any information contained here. | |
| 49 | +%% | |
| 50 | +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not | |
| 51 | +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. | |
| 52 | +%% | |
| 53 | +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) | |
| 54 | +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, | |
| 55 | +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included | |
| 56 | +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released | |
| 57 | +%% 2003/12/01 or later. | |
| 58 | +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. | |
| 59 | +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** | |
| 60 | +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** | |
| 61 | +%% | |
| 62 | +%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, | |
| 63 | +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, | |
| 64 | +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex | |
| 65 | +%% | |
| 66 | +%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an | |
| 67 | +%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will | |
| 68 | +%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA. | |
| 69 | +%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version | |
| 70 | +%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls". | |
| 71 | +%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user, | |
| 72 | +%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the | |
| 73 | +%% correct version information. | |
| 74 | +%% The changes should also be documented via source comments. | |
| 75 | +%%************************************************************************* | |
| 76 | +%% | |
| 77 | +% | |
| 78 | +% Available class options | |
| 79 | +% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} | |
| 80 | +% | |
| 81 | +% *** choose only one from each category *** | |
| 82 | +% | |
| 83 | +% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt | |
| 84 | +% Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt. | |
| 85 | +% | |
| 86 | +% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca | |
| 87 | +% determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers, | |
| 88 | +% correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user | |
| 89 | +% should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like | |
| 90 | +% journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for | |
| 91 | +% anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is | |
| 92 | +% repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review | |
| 93 | +% papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will | |
| 94 | +% automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the | |
| 95 | +% cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are | |
| 96 | +% not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like | |
| 97 | +% peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted | |
| 98 | +% as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact | |
| 99 | +% information can be easily seen on the cover page. | |
| 100 | +% The default is journal. | |
| 101 | +% | |
| 102 | +% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final | |
| 103 | +% determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for | |
| 104 | +% handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version. | |
| 105 | +% draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX | |
| 106 | +% packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows | |
| 107 | +% for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like | |
| 108 | +% draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot | |
| 109 | +% of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably | |
| 110 | +% also want to select onecolumn. | |
| 111 | +% The default is final. | |
| 112 | +% | |
| 113 | +% letterpaper, a4paper, cspaper | |
| 114 | +% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in, 210mm X 297mm or 7.875in X 10.75in. | |
| 115 | +% Changing the paper size in the standard journal and conference modes | |
| 116 | +% will not alter the typesetting of the document - only the margins will | |
| 117 | +% be affected. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will | |
| 118 | +% have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer | |
| 119 | +% bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top | |
| 120 | +% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. | |
| 121 | +% For the compsoc conference and draft modes, it is the margins that will | |
| 122 | +% remain constant, and thus the text area size will vary, with changes in | |
| 123 | +% the paper size. | |
| 124 | +% The cspaper option is the special ``trim'' paper size (7.875in x 10.75in) | |
| 125 | +% used in the actual publication of Computer Society journals. Under | |
| 126 | +% compsoc journal mode, this option does not alter the typesetting of the | |
| 127 | +% document. Authors should invoke the cspaper option only if requested to | |
| 128 | +% do so by the editors of the specific journal they are submitting to. | |
| 129 | +% For final submission to the IEEE, authors should generally use US letter | |
| 130 | +% (8.5 X 11in) paper unless otherwise instructed. Note that authors should | |
| 131 | +% ensure that all post-processing (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper | |
| 132 | +% specificiation as the .tex document. Problems here are by far the number | |
| 133 | +% one reason for incorrect margins. IEEEtran will automatically set the | |
| 134 | +% default paper size under pdflatex (without requiring any change to | |
| 135 | +% pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more important to dvips users. Fix | |
| 136 | +% config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for dvips, or use the | |
| 137 | +% dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. For the cspaper option, | |
| 138 | +% the corresponding dvips paper name is "ieeecs". | |
| 139 | +% See the testflow documentation | |
| 140 | +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow | |
| 141 | +% for more details on dvips paper size configuration. | |
| 142 | +% The default is letterpaper. | |
| 143 | +% | |
| 144 | +% oneside, twoside | |
| 145 | +% determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex) | |
| 146 | +% printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of | |
| 147 | +% the pages. | |
| 148 | +% The default is oneside. | |
| 149 | +% | |
| 150 | +% onecolumn, twocolumn | |
| 151 | +% determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One | |
| 152 | +% column mode is usually used only with draft papers. | |
| 153 | +% The default is twocolumn. | |
| 154 | +% | |
| 155 | +% comsoc, compsoc, transmag | |
| 156 | +% Use the format of the IEEE Communications Society, IEEE Computer Society | |
| 157 | +% or IEEE Transactions on Magnetics, respectively. | |
| 158 | +% | |
| 159 | +% romanappendices | |
| 160 | +% Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls | |
| 161 | +% now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what | |
| 162 | +% v1.6b and earlier did. | |
| 163 | +% | |
| 164 | +% captionsoff | |
| 165 | +% disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals | |
| 166 | +% request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages | |
| 167 | +% of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat | |
| 168 | +% package can be used with this class option to achieve this format. | |
| 169 | +% | |
| 170 | +% nofonttune | |
| 171 | +% turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those | |
| 172 | +% not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned" | |
| 173 | +% their fonts. | |
| 174 | +% The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters. | |
| 175 | +% | |
| 176 | +% | |
| 177 | +%---------- | |
| 178 | +% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted): | |
| 179 | +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch | |
| 180 | +% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin | |
| 181 | +% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin | |
| 182 | +% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin | |
| 183 | +% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin | |
| 184 | +% | |
| 185 | +% Available CLASSINFOs provided: | |
| 186 | +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional) | |
| 187 | +% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro) | |
| 188 | +% \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro) | |
| 189 | +% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length) | |
| 190 | +% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length) | |
| 191 | +% | |
| 192 | +% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided: | |
| 193 | +% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted, | |
| 194 | +% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff | |
| 195 | +% point size options provided as a single macro: | |
| 196 | +% \CLASSOPTIONpt | |
| 197 | +% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's | |
| 198 | +% normalsize point size. | |
| 199 | +% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview | |
| 200 | +% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls | |
| 201 | + | |
| 202 | + | |
| 203 | + | |
| 204 | + | |
| 205 | + | |
| 206 | +\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2015/08/26 V1.8b by Michael Shell] | |
| 207 | +\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.} | |
| 208 | +\typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/} | |
| 209 | +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} | |
| 210 | + | |
| 211 | +% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3 | |
| 212 | +% These values serve as a way a .tex file can | |
| 213 | +% determine if the new features are provided. | |
| 214 | +% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from | |
| 215 | +% these values. i.e., V1.4 | |
| 216 | +% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that- | |
| 217 | +% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here) | |
| 218 | +\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1} | |
| 219 | +\def\IEEEtransversionminor{8} | |
| 220 | + | |
| 221 | + | |
| 222 | +% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting | |
| 223 | +\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} | |
| 224 | + | |
| 225 | + | |
| 226 | +% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls | |
| 227 | +\newif\if@restonecol | |
| 228 | +\newif\if@titlepage | |
| 229 | + | |
| 230 | + | |
| 231 | +% class option conditionals | |
| 232 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse | |
| 233 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue | |
| 234 | + | |
| 235 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue | |
| 236 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse | |
| 237 | + | |
| 238 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue | |
| 239 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse | |
| 240 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse | |
| 241 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse | |
| 242 | + | |
| 243 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse | |
| 244 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse | |
| 245 | + | |
| 246 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue | |
| 247 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse | |
| 248 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse | |
| 249 | + | |
| 250 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse | |
| 251 | + | |
| 252 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse | |
| 253 | + | |
| 254 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc \CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse | |
| 255 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse | |
| 256 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag \CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse | |
| 257 | + | |
| 258 | +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse | |
| 259 | + | |
| 260 | + | |
| 261 | +% class info conditionals | |
| 262 | + | |
| 263 | +% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output | |
| 264 | +\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse | |
| 265 | + | |
| 266 | + | |
| 267 | +% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper | |
| 268 | +\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse | |
| 269 | +% V1.6b internal flag to show if using cspaper | |
| 270 | +\newif\if@IEEEusingcspaper \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse | |
| 271 | + | |
| 272 | + | |
| 273 | +% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers | |
| 274 | +% dimen | |
| 275 | +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 276 | +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB | |
| 277 | +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 278 | +% count | |
| 279 | +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA | |
| 280 | +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB | |
| 281 | +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountC | |
| 282 | +% token list | |
| 283 | +\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA | |
| 284 | + | |
| 285 | +% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs) | |
| 286 | +% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some | |
| 287 | +% external packages | |
| 288 | +\def\@ptsize{0} | |
| 289 | +% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt | |
| 290 | +\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}} | |
| 291 | +\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}} | |
| 292 | +\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}} | |
| 293 | +\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}} | |
| 294 | + | |
| 295 | + | |
| 296 | + | |
| 297 | +\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% | |
| 298 | + \setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% | |
| 299 | + \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse | |
| 300 | + \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse | |
| 301 | + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}% | |
| 302 | + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}% | |
| 303 | + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}} | |
| 304 | + | |
| 305 | + | |
| 306 | +\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% | |
| 307 | + \setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% | |
| 308 | + \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue | |
| 309 | + \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse | |
| 310 | + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}% | |
| 311 | + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}% | |
| 312 | + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}} | |
| 313 | + | |
| 314 | +% special paper option for compsoc journals | |
| 315 | +\DeclareOption{cspaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{7.875in}% | |
| 316 | + \setlength{\paperheight}{10.75in}% | |
| 317 | + \@IEEEusingcspapertrue | |
| 318 | + \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse | |
| 319 | + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{ieeecs}% | |
| 320 | + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{7.875in}% | |
| 321 | + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{10.75in}} | |
| 322 | + | |
| 323 | +\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse | |
| 324 | + \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse} | |
| 325 | +\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue | |
| 326 | + \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse} | |
| 327 | + | |
| 328 | +\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse} | |
| 329 | +\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse} | |
| 330 | + | |
| 331 | +% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages | |
| 332 | +% will go into draft mode. | |
| 333 | +\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue | |
| 334 | + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} | |
| 335 | +% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages | |
| 336 | +% used by the document. | |
| 337 | +\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue | |
| 338 | + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} | |
| 339 | +% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer. | |
| 340 | +\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue | |
| 341 | + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} | |
| 342 | +\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse | |
| 343 | + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} | |
| 344 | + | |
| 345 | +\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse | |
| 346 | + \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} | |
| 347 | + | |
| 348 | +\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse | |
| 349 | + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} | |
| 350 | + | |
| 351 | +\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse | |
| 352 | + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue} | |
| 353 | + | |
| 354 | +\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse | |
| 355 | + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} | |
| 356 | + | |
| 357 | +\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue | |
| 358 | + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} | |
| 359 | + | |
| 360 | +\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue} | |
| 361 | + | |
| 362 | +\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue} | |
| 363 | + | |
| 364 | +\DeclareOption{comsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcomsoctrue\CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse} | |
| 365 | + | |
| 366 | +\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue\CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse} | |
| 367 | + | |
| 368 | +\DeclareOption{transmag}{\CLASSOPTIONtransmagtrue\CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse} | |
| 369 | + | |
| 370 | +\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue} | |
| 371 | + | |
| 372 | + | |
| 373 | +% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal | |
| 374 | +\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal} | |
| 375 | +% overrride these defaults per user requests | |
| 376 | +\ProcessOptions | |
| 377 | + | |
| 378 | + | |
| 379 | + | |
| 380 | +%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- | |
| 381 | + | |
| 382 | +% Sets the category codes for punctuation to their normal values. | |
| 383 | +% For local use with argument scanning. | |
| 384 | +\def\IEEEnormalcatcodespunct{\catcode`\!=12 \catcode`\,=12 \catcode`\:=12 | |
| 385 | +\catcode`\;=12 \catcode`\`=12 \catcode`\'=12 \catcode`\"=12 \catcode`\.=12 | |
| 386 | +\catcode`\/=12 \catcode`\?=12 \catcode`\*=12 \catcode`\+=12 \catcode`\-=12 | |
| 387 | +\catcode`\<=12 \catcode`\>=12 \catcode`\(=12 \catcode`\)=12 \catcode`\[=12 | |
| 388 | +\catcode`\]=12 \catcode`\==12 \catcode`\|=12} | |
| 389 | +% Sets the category codes for numbers to their normal values. | |
| 390 | +% For local use with argument scanning. | |
| 391 | +\def\IEEEnormalcatcodesnum{\catcode`\0=12 \catcode`\1=12 \catcode`\2=12 | |
| 392 | +\catcode`\3=12 \catcode`\4=12 \catcode`\5=12 \catcode`\6=12 \catcode`\7=12 | |
| 393 | +\catcode`\8=12 \catcode`\9=12} | |
| 394 | +% combined action of \IEEEnormalcatcodespunct and \IEEEnormalcatcodesnum | |
| 395 | +\def\IEEEnormalcatcodes{\IEEEnormalcatcodespunct\IEEEnormalcatcodesnum} | |
| 396 | + | |
| 397 | + | |
| 398 | +% usage: \@IEEEextracttoken*{} | |
| 399 | +% \@IEEEextracttoken fully expands its argument (which it then stores in | |
| 400 | +% \@IEEEextracttokenarg) via \edef and then the meaning of the first | |
| 401 | +% nonbrace (but including the empty group) token found is assigned via \let | |
| 402 | +% to \@IEEEextractedtoken as well as stored in the macro | |
| 403 | +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during | |
| 404 | +% the acquisition of the first are stored in \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded, | |
| 405 | +% however their original relative brace nesting depths are not guaranteed to | |
| 406 | +% be preserved. | |
| 407 | +% If the argument is empty, or if a first nonbrace token does not exist (or | |
| 408 | +% is an empty group), \@IEEEextractedtoken will be \relax and | |
| 409 | +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro and \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded will be empty. | |
| 410 | +% | |
| 411 | +% For example: | |
| 412 | +% \@IEEEextracttoken{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}} | |
| 413 | +% results in: | |
| 414 | +% | |
| 415 | +% \@IEEEextracttokenarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g} | |
| 416 | +% \@IEEEextractedtoken ==> the letter a | |
| 417 | +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro ==> a macro containing a | |
| 418 | +% \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd{ef}g | |
| 419 | +% | |
| 420 | +% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttoken*, does not expand its argument | |
| 421 | +% contents during processing. | |
| 422 | +\def\@IEEEextracttoken{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\def\@@IEEEextracttoken}{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttoken}} | |
| 423 | + | |
| 424 | +\def\@@IEEEextracttoken#1{\@IEEEextracttokendef\@IEEEextracttokenarg{#1}\relax | |
| 425 | +\def\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{}\relax % initialize to empty | |
| 426 | +% if the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single undelimited argument | |
| 427 | +% with anything after it being stripped off as a delimited argument | |
| 428 | +% we know we have one token without any enclosing braces. loop until this is true. | |
| 429 | +\let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEextracttokenarg | |
| 430 | +\loop | |
| 431 | + % trap case of an empty argument as this would cause a problem with | |
| 432 | + % \@@@IEEEextracttoken's first (nondelimited) argument acquisition | |
| 433 | + \ifx\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@empty | |
| 434 | + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{}\relax | |
| 435 | + \else | |
| 436 | + \expandafter\@@@IEEEextracttoken\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER\relax | |
| 437 | + \fi | |
| 438 | + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup | |
| 439 | + \else | |
| 440 | + \let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup=\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro | |
| 441 | +\repeat | |
| 442 | +% we can safely do a \let= here because there should be at most one token | |
| 443 | +% the relax is needed to handle the case of no token found | |
| 444 | +\expandafter\let\expandafter\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\relax} | |
| 445 | + | |
| 446 | +\def\@@@IEEEextracttoken#1#2\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{#1}\relax | |
| 447 | +\def\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{#2}\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter | |
| 448 | +\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter | |
| 449 | +{\expandafter\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded}} | |
| 450 | +%% | |
| 451 | +%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- | |
| 452 | + | |
| 453 | + | |
| 454 | + | |
| 455 | +% Computer Society conditional execution command | |
| 456 | +\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} | |
| 457 | +% inverse | |
| 458 | +\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} | |
| 459 | +% compsoc conference | |
| 460 | +\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} | |
| 461 | +% compsoc not conference | |
| 462 | +\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} | |
| 463 | + | |
| 464 | + | |
| 465 | +% comsoc verify that newtxmath, mtpro2, mt11p or mathtime has been loaded | |
| 466 | +\def\@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\typeout{-- Verifying Times compatible math font.}\relax | |
| 467 | + \@ifpackageloaded{newtxmath}{\typeout{-- newtxmath loaded, OK.}}{\@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}} | |
| 468 | +\def\@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mtpro2}{\typeout{-- mtpro2 loaded, OK.}}{\@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}} | |
| 469 | +\def\@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mt11p}{\typeout{-- mt11p2 loaded, OK.}}{\@@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}} | |
| 470 | +\def\@@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mathtime}{\typeout{-- mathtime loaded, OK.}}{\@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}} | |
| 471 | + | |
| 472 | +% comsoc, if a Times math font was not loaded by user, enforce it | |
| 473 | +\def\@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\typeout{** Times compatible math font not found, forcing.}\relax | |
| 474 | +\IfFileExists{newtxmath.sty}{\typeout{-- Found newtxmath, loading.}\RequirePackage{newtxmath}}{\@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}} | |
| 475 | +\def\@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mtpro2.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mtpro2, loading.}\RequirePackage{mtpro2}}{\@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}} | |
| 476 | +\def\@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mt11p.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mt11p, loading.}\RequirePackage{mt11p}}{\@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}} | |
| 477 | +\def\@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mathtime.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mathtime, loading.}\RequirePackage{mathtime}}{\@@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}} | |
| 478 | +% if no acceptable Times math font package found, error with newtxmath requirement | |
| 479 | +\def\@@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\typeout{** No Times compatible math font package found. newtxmath is required.}\RequirePackage{newtxmath}} | |
| 480 | + | |
| 481 | + | |
| 482 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc | |
| 483 | + % ensure that if newtxmath is used, the cmintegrals option is also invoked | |
| 484 | + \PassOptionsToPackage{cmintegrals}{newtxmath} | |
| 485 | + % comsoc requires a Times like math font | |
| 486 | + % ensure this requirement is satisfied at document start | |
| 487 | + \AtBeginDocument{\@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont} | |
| 488 | +\fi | |
| 489 | + | |
| 490 | + | |
| 491 | + | |
| 492 | +% The IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times. | |
| 493 | +% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package. | |
| 494 | +\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} | |
| 495 | +\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} | |
| 496 | +\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} | |
| 497 | + | |
| 498 | +% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font, | |
| 499 | +% not Times Roman. | |
| 500 | +\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}} | |
| 501 | + | |
| 502 | +% enable the selected main text font | |
| 503 | +\normalfont\selectfont | |
| 504 | + | |
| 505 | + | |
| 506 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc | |
| 507 | + \typeout{-- Using IEEE Communications Society mode.} | |
| 508 | +\fi | |
| 509 | + | |
| 510 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 511 | + \typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.} | |
| 512 | +\fi | |
| 513 | + | |
| 514 | + | |
| 515 | +% V1.7 conference notice message hook | |
| 516 | +\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}% | |
| 517 | +\typeout{** Conference Paper **}% | |
| 518 | +\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}% | |
| 519 | +\typeout{}% | |
| 520 | +\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}% | |
| 521 | +\typeout{ of your paper;}% | |
| 522 | +\typeout{}% | |
| 523 | +\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}% | |
| 524 | +\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}% | |
| 525 | +\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}% | |
| 526 | +\typeout{}} | |
| 527 | + | |
| 528 | + | |
| 529 | +% we can send console reminder messages to the user here | |
| 530 | +\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi} | |
| 531 | + | |
| 532 | + | |
| 533 | +% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode | |
| 534 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else% | |
| 535 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else% | |
| 536 | + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}% | |
| 537 | + \fi% | |
| 538 | +\fi | |
| 539 | + | |
| 540 | + | |
| 541 | +% V1.7 improved paper size setting code. | |
| 542 | +% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that | |
| 543 | +% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered, | |
| 544 | +% even if only effect is to set them to \relax. | |
| 545 | +% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special | |
| 546 | +{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{% | |
| 547 | +% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax | |
| 548 | +% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput | |
| 549 | +% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput. | |
| 550 | +\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth | |
| 551 | +\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}% | |
| 552 | +% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special | |
| 553 | +\ifcase\pdfoutput | |
| 554 | +\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}% | |
| 555 | +\else | |
| 556 | +% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag | |
| 557 | +\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue | |
| 558 | +\fi}} | |
| 559 | + | |
| 560 | +% let the user know the selected papersize | |
| 561 | +\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space | |
| 562 | +(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.} | |
| 563 | + | |
| 564 | +\ifCLASSINFOpdf | |
| 565 | +\typeout{-- Using PDF output.} | |
| 566 | +\else | |
| 567 | +\typeout{-- Using DVI output.} | |
| 568 | +\fi | |
| 569 | + | |
| 570 | + | |
| 571 | +% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{} | |
| 572 | +% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{}, | |
| 573 | +% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc. | |
| 574 | +% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as | |
| 575 | +% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues | |
| 576 | +% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}. | |
| 577 | +% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion. | |
| 578 | +%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}} | |
| 579 | +%\def\@journal{} | |
| 580 | + | |
| 581 | + | |
| 582 | + | |
| 583 | +% pointsize values | |
| 584 | +% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size | |
| 585 | +\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9} | |
| 586 | +\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10} | |
| 587 | +\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11} | |
| 588 | +\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12} | |
| 589 | + | |
| 590 | + | |
| 591 | + | |
| 592 | +% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) | |
| 593 | +% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and | |
| 594 | +% revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems | |
| 595 | +% on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want | |
| 596 | +% normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading) | |
| 597 | +% 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down) | |
| 598 | +% 10pt 58 12pt (exact) | |
| 599 | +% 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down) | |
| 600 | +% 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact) | |
| 601 | +% | |
| 602 | + | |
| 603 | +% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size | |
| 604 | +% in case baselinestretch ever changes. | |
| 605 | +% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink | |
| 606 | +\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip | |
| 607 | +\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip | |
| 608 | + | |
| 609 | + | |
| 610 | + | |
| 611 | +%% ******* WARNING! ******* | |
| 612 | +%% | |
| 613 | +%% Authors should not alter font sizes, baselineskip ("leading"), | |
| 614 | +%% margins or other spacing values in an attempt to squeeze more | |
| 615 | +%% material on each page. | |
| 616 | +%% | |
| 617 | +%% The IEEE's own typesetting software will restore the correct | |
| 618 | +%% values when re-typesetting/proofing the submitted document, | |
| 619 | +%% possibly resulting in unexpected article over length charges. | |
| 620 | +%% | |
| 621 | +%% ******* WARNING! ******* | |
| 622 | + | |
| 623 | + | |
| 624 | +% 9pt option defaults | |
| 625 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine | |
| 626 | +\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.} | |
| 627 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}} | |
| 628 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt} | |
| 629 | +\normalsize | |
| 630 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt | |
| 631 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 632 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 3pt | |
| 633 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt | |
| 634 | +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}} | |
| 635 | +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} | |
| 636 | +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} | |
| 637 | +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} | |
| 638 | +% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt | |
| 639 | +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}} | |
| 640 | +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}} | |
| 641 | +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}} | |
| 642 | +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}} | |
| 643 | +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}} | |
| 644 | +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}} | |
| 645 | +\fi | |
| 646 | +% | |
| 647 | +% 10pt option defaults | |
| 648 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten | |
| 649 | +\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.} | |
| 650 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}} | |
| 651 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt} | |
| 652 | +\normalsize | |
| 653 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt | |
| 654 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 655 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4pt | |
| 656 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt | |
| 657 | +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}} | |
| 658 | +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} | |
| 659 | +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} | |
| 660 | +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} | |
| 661 | +% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt | |
| 662 | +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}} | |
| 663 | +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} | |
| 664 | +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} | |
| 665 | +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} | |
| 666 | +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} | |
| 667 | +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} | |
| 668 | +\fi | |
| 669 | +% | |
| 670 | +% 11pt option defaults | |
| 671 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven | |
| 672 | +\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.} | |
| 673 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}} | |
| 674 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt} | |
| 675 | +\normalsize | |
| 676 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt | |
| 677 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 678 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5pt | |
| 679 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt | |
| 680 | +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} | |
| 681 | +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} | |
| 682 | +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} | |
| 683 | +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} | |
| 684 | +% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt | |
| 685 | +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}} | |
| 686 | +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} | |
| 687 | +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} | |
| 688 | +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} | |
| 689 | +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} | |
| 690 | +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} | |
| 691 | +\fi | |
| 692 | +% | |
| 693 | +% 12pt option defaults | |
| 694 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve | |
| 695 | +\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.} | |
| 696 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}} | |
| 697 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt} | |
| 698 | +\normalsize | |
| 699 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt | |
| 700 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 701 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6pt | |
| 702 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt | |
| 703 | +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} | |
| 704 | +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} | |
| 705 | +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} | |
| 706 | +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} | |
| 707 | +% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt | |
| 708 | +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}} | |
| 709 | +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}} | |
| 710 | +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}} | |
| 711 | +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}} | |
| 712 | +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}} | |
| 713 | +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} | |
| 714 | +\fi | |
| 715 | + | |
| 716 | + | |
| 717 | + | |
| 718 | +% V1.8a compsoc font sizes | |
| 719 | +% compsoc font sizes use bp "Postscript" point units (1/72in) | |
| 720 | +% rather than the traditional pt (1/72.27) | |
| 721 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 722 | +% -- compsoc defaults -- | |
| 723 | +% ** will override some of these values later ** | |
| 724 | +% 9pt | |
| 725 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine | |
| 726 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{11bp}} | |
| 727 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11bp} | |
| 728 | +\normalsize | |
| 729 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp | |
| 730 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 731 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp | |
| 732 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp | |
| 733 | +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5bp}{10bp}} | |
| 734 | +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}} | |
| 735 | +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}} | |
| 736 | +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}} | |
| 737 | +% sublargesize is the same as large - 10bp | |
| 738 | +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10bp}{12bp}} | |
| 739 | +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10bp}{12bp}} | |
| 740 | +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12bp}{14bp}} | |
| 741 | +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14bp}{17bp}} | |
| 742 | +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17bp}{20bp}} | |
| 743 | +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20bp}{24bp}} | |
| 744 | +\fi | |
| 745 | +% | |
| 746 | +% 10pt | |
| 747 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten | |
| 748 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{12bp}} | |
| 749 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12bp} | |
| 750 | +\normalsize | |
| 751 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp | |
| 752 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 753 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp | |
| 754 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp | |
| 755 | +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9bp}{10bp}} | |
| 756 | +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}} | |
| 757 | +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}} | |
| 758 | +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}} | |
| 759 | +% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11bp | |
| 760 | +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11bp}{13.5bp}} | |
| 761 | +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}} | |
| 762 | +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}} | |
| 763 | +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}} | |
| 764 | +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}} | |
| 765 | +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}} | |
| 766 | +\fi | |
| 767 | +% | |
| 768 | +% 11pt | |
| 769 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven | |
| 770 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.5bp}} | |
| 771 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.5bp} | |
| 772 | +\normalsize | |
| 773 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp | |
| 774 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 775 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp | |
| 776 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp | |
| 777 | +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}} | |
| 778 | +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}} | |
| 779 | +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}} | |
| 780 | +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}} | |
| 781 | +% sublargesize is the same as large - 12bp | |
| 782 | +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12bp}{14bp}} | |
| 783 | +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}} | |
| 784 | +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}} | |
| 785 | +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}} | |
| 786 | +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}} | |
| 787 | +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}} | |
| 788 | +\fi | |
| 789 | +% | |
| 790 | +% 12pt | |
| 791 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve | |
| 792 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14bp}}% | |
| 793 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14bp}% | |
| 794 | +\normalsize | |
| 795 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp | |
| 796 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 797 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp | |
| 798 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp | |
| 799 | +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}} | |
| 800 | +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}} | |
| 801 | +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}} | |
| 802 | +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}} | |
| 803 | +% sublargesize is the same as large - 14bp | |
| 804 | +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14bp}{17bp}} | |
| 805 | +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14bp}{17bp}} | |
| 806 | +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17bp}{20bp}} | |
| 807 | +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20bp}{24bp}} | |
| 808 | +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22bp}{26bp}} | |
| 809 | +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}} | |
| 810 | +\fi | |
| 811 | +% | |
| 812 | +% -- override defaults: compsoc journals use special normalsizes -- | |
| 813 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference | |
| 814 | +% | |
| 815 | +% compsoc conferences | |
| 816 | +% 9pt | |
| 817 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine | |
| 818 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}} | |
| 819 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp} | |
| 820 | +\normalsize | |
| 821 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp | |
| 822 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 823 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp | |
| 824 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp | |
| 825 | +\fi | |
| 826 | +% 10pt | |
| 827 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten | |
| 828 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{11.2bp}} | |
| 829 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.2bp} | |
| 830 | +\normalsize | |
| 831 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp | |
| 832 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 833 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp | |
| 834 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp | |
| 835 | +\fi | |
| 836 | +% 11pt | |
| 837 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven | |
| 838 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}} | |
| 839 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp} | |
| 840 | +\normalsize | |
| 841 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp | |
| 842 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 843 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp | |
| 844 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp | |
| 845 | +\fi | |
| 846 | +% 12pt | |
| 847 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve | |
| 848 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}} | |
| 849 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp} | |
| 850 | +\normalsize | |
| 851 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp | |
| 852 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 853 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp | |
| 854 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp | |
| 855 | +\fi | |
| 856 | +% | |
| 857 | +% compsoc nonconferences | |
| 858 | +\else | |
| 859 | +% 9pt | |
| 860 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine | |
| 861 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}} | |
| 862 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp} | |
| 863 | +\normalsize | |
| 864 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp | |
| 865 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 866 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp | |
| 867 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp | |
| 868 | +\fi | |
| 869 | +% 10pt | |
| 870 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten | |
| 871 | +% the official spec is 9.5bp with 11.4bp leading for 10pt, | |
| 872 | +% but measurements of proofs suggest upto 11.723bp leading | |
| 873 | +% here we'll use 11.54bp which gives 61 lines per column | |
| 874 | +% with the standard compsoc margins | |
| 875 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9.5bp}{11.54bp}} | |
| 876 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.54bp} | |
| 877 | +\normalsize | |
| 878 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp | |
| 879 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 880 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp | |
| 881 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp | |
| 882 | +\fi | |
| 883 | +% 11pt | |
| 884 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven | |
| 885 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}} | |
| 886 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp} | |
| 887 | +\normalsize | |
| 888 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp | |
| 889 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 890 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp | |
| 891 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp | |
| 892 | +\fi | |
| 893 | +% 12pt | |
| 894 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve | |
| 895 | +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}} | |
| 896 | +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp} | |
| 897 | +\normalsize | |
| 898 | +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp | |
| 899 | +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip | |
| 900 | +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp | |
| 901 | +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp | |
| 902 | +\fi | |
| 903 | +\fi\fi | |
| 904 | + | |
| 905 | + | |
| 906 | + | |
| 907 | + | |
| 908 | +% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for | |
| 909 | +% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead, but the default and correct | |
| 910 | +% Times font will scale exactly as needed) increase the substitution | |
| 911 | +% tolerance to turn off this warning. | |
| 912 | +% | |
| 913 | +% V1.8a, the compsoc bp font sizes can also cause bogus font substitution | |
| 914 | +% warnings with footnote or scriptsize math and the $\bullet$ itemized | |
| 915 | +% list of \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks. So, increase this to 1.5pt or more. | |
| 916 | +\def\fontsubfuzz{1.7bp} | |
| 917 | + | |
| 918 | + | |
| 919 | +% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with | |
| 920 | +% technote | |
| 921 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% | |
| 922 | + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else% | |
| 923 | + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}% | |
| 924 | + \fi% | |
| 925 | +\fi | |
| 926 | + | |
| 927 | + | |
| 928 | +% V1.7 | |
| 929 | +% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with | |
| 930 | +% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use | |
| 931 | +% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts. | |
| 932 | +\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family | |
| 933 | +\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family | |
| 934 | +\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family | |
| 935 | +\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family | |
| 936 | +\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family | |
| 937 | +\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode | |
| 938 | +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else | |
| 939 | +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else | |
| 940 | +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else | |
| 941 | +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else | |
| 942 | +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else | |
| 943 | +\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax} | |
| 944 | + | |
| 945 | + | |
| 946 | + | |
| 947 | + | |
| 948 | +% set the default \baselinestretch | |
| 949 | +\def\baselinestretch{1} | |
| 950 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls | |
| 951 | + \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes | |
| 952 | +\fi | |
| 953 | + | |
| 954 | + | |
| 955 | +% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch | |
| 956 | +\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined | |
| 957 | +\else | |
| 958 | + \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override | |
| 959 | + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to | |
| 960 | + \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} | |
| 961 | +\fi | |
| 962 | + | |
| 963 | +\small\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect | |
| 964 | + | |
| 965 | + | |
| 966 | + | |
| 967 | + | |
| 968 | +% store the normalsize baselineskip | |
| 969 | +\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip | |
| 970 | +\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax | |
| 971 | +% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip | |
| 972 | +% we could save a register by giving the user access to | |
| 973 | +% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect | |
| 974 | +% its read only internal status | |
| 975 | +\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip | |
| 976 | +\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax | |
| 977 | +% store the nominal value of jot | |
| 978 | +\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot | |
| 979 | +\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax | |
| 980 | + | |
| 981 | +% set \jot | |
| 982 | +\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax | |
| 983 | + | |
| 984 | + | |
| 985 | + | |
| 986 | + | |
| 987 | +% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing | |
| 988 | +% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a | |
| 989 | +% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em) | |
| 990 | +% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%. | |
| 991 | +% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of: | |
| 992 | +% | |
| 993 | +% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt | |
| 994 | +% | |
| 995 | +% However, the IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need | |
| 996 | +% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, the IEEE | |
| 997 | +% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words. | |
| 998 | +% The IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be: | |
| 999 | +% 35% nominal | |
| 1000 | +% 23% minimum | |
| 1001 | +% 50% maximum | |
| 1002 | +% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.) | |
| 1003 | +% | |
| 1004 | +% for bold text, the IEEE increases the spacing a little more: | |
| 1005 | +% 37.5% nominal | |
| 1006 | +% 23% minimum | |
| 1007 | +% 55% maximum | |
| 1008 | + | |
| 1009 | +% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use | |
| 1010 | +% for medium (normal weight) | |
| 1011 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35} | |
| 1012 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23} | |
| 1013 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50} | |
| 1014 | + | |
| 1015 | +% for bold | |
| 1016 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375} | |
| 1017 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23} | |
| 1018 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55} | |
| 1019 | + | |
| 1020 | + | |
| 1021 | +% compsoc nonconference papers use Palatino, | |
| 1022 | +% tweak settings to better match the proofs | |
| 1023 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 1024 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else | |
| 1025 | +% for medium (normal weight) | |
| 1026 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.28} | |
| 1027 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.21} | |
| 1028 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.47} | |
| 1029 | +% for bold | |
| 1030 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.305} | |
| 1031 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.21} | |
| 1032 | +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.52} | |
| 1033 | +\fi\fi | |
| 1034 | + | |
| 1035 | + | |
| 1036 | +% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX: | |
| 1037 | +% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space | |
| 1038 | +% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch | |
| 1039 | +% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink | |
| 1040 | +% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands | |
| 1041 | +% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes | |
| 1042 | +\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{% | |
| 1043 | +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead. | |
| 1044 | +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% | |
| 1045 | +\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1046 | +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% | |
| 1047 | +\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1048 | +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% | |
| 1049 | +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% | |
| 1050 | +\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}} | |
| 1051 | + | |
| 1052 | +% revise the interword spacing for each font weight | |
| 1053 | +\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% | |
| 1054 | +\mdseries | |
| 1055 | +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}% | |
| 1056 | +\bfseries | |
| 1057 | +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}% | |
| 1058 | +}} | |
| 1059 | + | |
| 1060 | +% revise the interword spacing for each font shape | |
| 1061 | +% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are | |
| 1062 | +% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what the IEEE uses) so we | |
| 1063 | +% won't alter these either. | |
| 1064 | +\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% | |
| 1065 | +\normalfont | |
| 1066 | +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens | |
| 1067 | +\normalfont\itshape | |
| 1068 | +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens | |
| 1069 | +}} | |
| 1070 | + | |
| 1071 | +% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape | |
| 1072 | +% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a | |
| 1073 | +% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers. | |
| 1074 | +\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily | |
| 1075 | +\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens | |
| 1076 | +\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens | |
| 1077 | +\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens | |
| 1078 | +\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens | |
| 1079 | +\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens | |
| 1080 | +\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens | |
| 1081 | +\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens | |
| 1082 | +\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens | |
| 1083 | +\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens | |
| 1084 | +\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}} | |
| 1085 | + | |
| 1086 | +% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing | |
| 1087 | +% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make | |
| 1088 | +% sure all the default fonts are loaded | |
| 1089 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else | |
| 1090 | +\@IEEEtunefonts | |
| 1091 | +\fi | |
| 1092 | + | |
| 1093 | +% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts | |
| 1094 | +\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi} | |
| 1095 | + | |
| 1096 | + | |
| 1097 | + | |
| 1098 | + | |
| 1099 | + | |
| 1100 | +% -- V1.8a page setup commands -- | |
| 1101 | + | |
| 1102 | +% The default sample text for calculating margins | |
| 1103 | +% Note that IEEE publications use \scriptsize for headers and footers. | |
| 1104 | +\def\IEEEdefaultsampletext{\normalfont\normalsize gT} | |
| 1105 | +\def\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize T}% IEEE headers default to uppercase | |
| 1106 | +\def\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize gT} | |
| 1107 | + | |
| 1108 | + | |
| 1109 | + | |
| 1110 | +% usage: \IEEEsettextwidth{inner margin}{outer margin} | |
| 1111 | +% Sets \textwidth to allow the specified inner and outer margins | |
| 1112 | +% for the current \paperwidth. | |
| 1113 | +\def\IEEEsettextwidth#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\paperwidth | |
| 1114 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#1\relax | |
| 1115 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB | |
| 1116 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#2\relax | |
| 1117 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB | |
| 1118 | +\textwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA} | |
| 1119 | + | |
| 1120 | + | |
| 1121 | + | |
| 1122 | +% usage: \IEEEsetsidemargin{mode: i, o, c, a}{margin/offset} | |
| 1123 | +% Sets \oddsidemargin and \evensidemargin to yield the specified margin | |
| 1124 | +% of the given mode. | |
| 1125 | +% The available modes are: | |
| 1126 | +% i = inner margin | |
| 1127 | +% o = outer margin | |
| 1128 | +% c = centered, with the given offset | |
| 1129 | +% a = adjust the margins using the given offset | |
| 1130 | +% For the offsets, positive values increase the inner margin. | |
| 1131 | +% \textwidth should be set properly for the given margins before calling this | |
| 1132 | +% function. | |
| 1133 | +\def\IEEEsetsidemargin#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax | |
| 1134 | +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax | |
| 1135 | +% check for mode errors | |
| 1136 | +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty | |
| 1137 | + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak | |
| 1138 | + Defaulting to `i'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}\relax | |
| 1139 | + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=i\relax | |
| 1140 | + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{i}\relax | |
| 1141 | +\else | |
| 1142 | + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else | |
| 1143 | + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax | |
| 1144 | + \fi | |
| 1145 | +\fi | |
| 1146 | +% handle each mode | |
| 1147 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax | |
| 1148 | + \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1149 | +\else | |
| 1150 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax | |
| 1151 | + \oddsidemargin\paperwidth | |
| 1152 | + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth | |
| 1153 | + \divide\oddsidemargin by 2\relax | |
| 1154 | + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax | |
| 1155 | + \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1156 | +\else | |
| 1157 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken o\relax | |
| 1158 | + \oddsidemargin\paperwidth | |
| 1159 | + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth | |
| 1160 | + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 1161 | + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax | |
| 1162 | +\else | |
| 1163 | + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax | |
| 1164 | + \else | |
| 1165 | + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak | |
| 1166 | + Defaulting to `i'}% | |
| 1167 | + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}% | |
| 1168 | + \fi | |
| 1169 | + \oddsidemargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 1170 | + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax | |
| 1171 | +\fi\fi\fi | |
| 1172 | +% odd and even side margins both mean "inner" for single sided pages | |
| 1173 | +\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin | |
| 1174 | +% but are mirrors of each other when twosided is in effect | |
| 1175 | +\if@twoside | |
| 1176 | + \evensidemargin\paperwidth | |
| 1177 | + \advance\evensidemargin by -\textwidth | |
| 1178 | + \advance\evensidemargin by -\oddsidemargin | |
| 1179 | + % have to compensate for both the builtin 1in LaTex offset | |
| 1180 | + % and the fact we already subtracted this offset from \oddsidemargin | |
| 1181 | + \advance\evensidemargin -2in\relax | |
| 1182 | +\fi} | |
| 1183 | + | |
| 1184 | + | |
| 1185 | + | |
| 1186 | +% usage: \IEEEsettextheight[sample text]{top text margin}{bottom text margin} | |
| 1187 | +% Sets \textheight based on the specified top margin and bottom margin. | |
| 1188 | +% Takes into consideration \paperheight, \topskip, and (by default) the | |
| 1189 | +% the actual height and depth of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. | |
| 1190 | +\def\IEEEsettextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettextheight}{\@IEEEsettextheight[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} | |
| 1191 | +\def\@IEEEsettextheight[#1]#2#3{\textheight\paperheight\relax | |
| 1192 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax | |
| 1193 | + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract top margin | |
| 1194 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax | |
| 1195 | + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract bottom margin | |
| 1196 | + \advance \textheight by \topskip% add \topskip | |
| 1197 | + % subtract off everything above the top, and below the bottom, baselines | |
| 1198 | + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1199 | + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 1200 | + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1201 | + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA} | |
| 1202 | + | |
| 1203 | + | |
| 1204 | + | |
| 1205 | +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlength | |
| 1206 | +\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax | |
| 1207 | +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff | |
| 1208 | +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff 0sp\relax | |
| 1209 | +\def\IEEEquantizedlengthint{0} | |
| 1210 | + | |
| 1211 | +% usage: \IEEEquantizelength{mode: d, c, i}{base unit}{length} | |
| 1212 | +% Sets the length \IEEEquantizedlength to be an integer multiple of the given | |
| 1213 | +% (nonzero) base unit such that \IEEEquantizedlength approximates the given | |
| 1214 | +% length. | |
| 1215 | +% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff is a length equal to the difference between the | |
| 1216 | +% \IEEEquantizedlength and the given length. | |
| 1217 | +% \IEEEquantizedlengthint is a macro containing the integer number of base units | |
| 1218 | +% in \IEEEquantizedlength. | |
| 1219 | +% i.e., \IEEEquantizedlength = \IEEEquantizedlengthint * base unit | |
| 1220 | +% The mode determines how \IEEEquantizedlength is quantized: | |
| 1221 | +% d = always decrease (always round down \IEEEquantizeint) | |
| 1222 | +% c = use the closest match | |
| 1223 | +% i = always increase (always round up \IEEEquantizeint) | |
| 1224 | +% In anycase, if the given length is already quantized, | |
| 1225 | +% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff will be set to zero. | |
| 1226 | +\def\IEEEquantizelength#1#2#3{\begingroup | |
| 1227 | +% work in isolation so as not to externally disturb the \@IEEEtrantmp | |
| 1228 | +% variables | |
| 1229 | +% load the argument values indirectly via \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff | |
| 1230 | +% in case the user refers to our \@IEEEtrantmpdimenX, \IEEEquantizedlength, | |
| 1231 | +% etc. in the arguments. we also will work with these as counters, | |
| 1232 | +% i.e., in sp units | |
| 1233 | +% A has the base unit | |
| 1234 | +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #2\relax\relax\relax\relax | |
| 1235 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff | |
| 1236 | +% B has the input length | |
| 1237 | +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #3\relax\relax\relax\relax | |
| 1238 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff | |
| 1239 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax | |
| 1240 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax | |
| 1241 | +% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC will have the quantized int | |
| 1242 | +% \IEEEquantizedlength will have the quantized length | |
| 1243 | +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC will have the quantized diff | |
| 1244 | +% initialize them to zero as this is what will be | |
| 1245 | +% exported if an error occurs | |
| 1246 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC 0\relax | |
| 1247 | +\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax | |
| 1248 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC 0sp\relax | |
| 1249 | +% extract mode | |
| 1250 | +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax | |
| 1251 | +% check for mode errors | |
| 1252 | +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty | |
| 1253 | + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak | |
| 1254 | + Defaulting to `d'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c and i.}\relax | |
| 1255 | + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=d\relax | |
| 1256 | + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{d}\relax | |
| 1257 | +\else | |
| 1258 | + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else | |
| 1259 | + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEquantizelength\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax | |
| 1260 | + \fi | |
| 1261 | +\fi | |
| 1262 | +% check for base unit is zero error | |
| 1263 | +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=0\relax | |
| 1264 | +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Base unit is zero in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak | |
| 1265 | + \string\IEEEquantizedlength\space and \string\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\space are set to zero}{Division by zero is not allowed.}\relax | |
| 1266 | +\else% base unit is nonzero | |
| 1267 | + % \@IEEEtrantmpcountC carries the number of integer units | |
| 1268 | + % in the quantized length (integer length \ base) | |
| 1269 | + \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\relax | |
| 1270 | + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax | |
| 1271 | + % \IEEEquantizedlength has the (rounded down) quantized length | |
| 1272 | + % = base * int | |
| 1273 | + \IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1274 | + \multiply\IEEEquantizedlength by \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\relax | |
| 1275 | + % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the difference | |
| 1276 | + % = quantized length - length | |
| 1277 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax | |
| 1278 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax | |
| 1279 | + % trap special case of length being already quantized | |
| 1280 | + % to avoid a roundup under i option | |
| 1281 | + \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC=0sp\relax | |
| 1282 | + \else % length not is already quantized | |
| 1283 | + % set dimenA to carry the upper quantized (absolute value) difference: | |
| 1284 | + % quantizedlength + base - length | |
| 1285 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEquantizedlength\relax | |
| 1286 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax | |
| 1287 | + % set dimenB to carry the lower quantized (absolute value) difference: | |
| 1288 | + % length - quantizedlength | |
| 1289 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\IEEEquantizedlength\relax | |
| 1290 | + % handle each mode | |
| 1291 | + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax | |
| 1292 | + % compare upper and lower amounts, select upper if lower > upper | |
| 1293 | + \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1294 | + % use upper | |
| 1295 | + \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax | |
| 1296 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax | |
| 1297 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 1298 | + \else% <=. uselower | |
| 1299 | + % no need to do anything for lower, use output values already setup | |
| 1300 | + \fi | |
| 1301 | + \else% not mode c | |
| 1302 | + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax | |
| 1303 | + % always round up under i mode | |
| 1304 | + \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax | |
| 1305 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax | |
| 1306 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 1307 | + \else | |
| 1308 | + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken d\relax | |
| 1309 | + \else | |
| 1310 | + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak | |
| 1311 | + Defaulting to `d'}% | |
| 1312 | + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c, and i.}\relax | |
| 1313 | + \fi % if d | |
| 1314 | + % no need to do anything for d, use output values already setup | |
| 1315 | + \fi\fi % if i, c | |
| 1316 | + \fi % if length is already quantized | |
| 1317 | +\fi% if base unit is zero | |
| 1318 | +% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing | |
| 1319 | +% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables. | |
| 1320 | +% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC has the quantized int | |
| 1321 | +% \IEEEquantizedlength has the quantized length | |
| 1322 | +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the quantized diff | |
| 1323 | +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax | |
| 1324 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax | |
| 1325 | +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax | |
| 1326 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\relax | |
| 1327 | +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax | |
| 1328 | +\endgroup | |
| 1329 | +% locally assign the outputs here from the macros | |
| 1330 | +\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro sp\relax | |
| 1331 | +\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro sp\relax | |
| 1332 | +\edef\IEEEquantizedlengthint{\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro}\relax} | |
| 1333 | + | |
| 1334 | + | |
| 1335 | + | |
| 1336 | +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff | |
| 1337 | +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff 0sp\relax | |
| 1338 | + | |
| 1339 | +% usage: \IEEEquantizetextheight[base unit]{mode: d, c, i} | |
| 1340 | +% Sets \textheight to be an integer multiple of the current \baselineskip | |
| 1341 | +% (or the optionally specified base unit) plus the first (\topskip) line. | |
| 1342 | +% \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff is a length equal to the difference between | |
| 1343 | +% the new quantized and original \textheight. | |
| 1344 | +% \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc is a macro containing the integer number of | |
| 1345 | +% lines per column under the quantized \textheight. i.e., | |
| 1346 | +% \textheight = \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc * \baselineskip + \topskip | |
| 1347 | +% The mode determines how \textheight is quantized: | |
| 1348 | +% d = always decrease (always round down the number of lines per column) | |
| 1349 | +% c = use the closest match | |
| 1350 | +% i = always increase (always round up the number of lines per column) | |
| 1351 | +% In anycase, if \textheight is already quantized, it will remain unchanged, | |
| 1352 | +% and \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff will be set to zero. | |
| 1353 | +% Depends on: \IEEEquantizelength | |
| 1354 | +\def\IEEEquantizetextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizetextheight}{\@IEEEquantizetextheight[\baselineskip]}} | |
| 1355 | +\def\@IEEEquantizetextheight[#1]#2{\begingroup | |
| 1356 | +% use our \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff as a scratch pad | |
| 1357 | +% we need to subtract off \topskip before quantization | |
| 1358 | +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\textheight | |
| 1359 | +\advance\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff by -\topskip\relax | |
| 1360 | +\IEEEquantizelength{#2}{#1}{\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff} | |
| 1361 | +% add back \topskip line | |
| 1362 | +\advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \topskip | |
| 1363 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthint\relax | |
| 1364 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax | |
| 1365 | +% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing | |
| 1366 | +% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables. | |
| 1367 | +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax | |
| 1368 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax | |
| 1369 | +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax | |
| 1370 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\relax | |
| 1371 | +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax | |
| 1372 | +\endgroup | |
| 1373 | +% locally assign the outputs here from the macros | |
| 1374 | +\textheight\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro sp\relax | |
| 1375 | +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro sp\relax | |
| 1376 | +\edef\IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc{\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro}} | |
| 1377 | + | |
| 1378 | + | |
| 1379 | + | |
| 1380 | +% usage: \IEEEsettopmargin[sample text]{mode: t, b, c, a, q}{margin/offset} | |
| 1381 | +% Sets \topmargin based on the specified vertical margin. | |
| 1382 | +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \headsep, | |
| 1383 | +% \topskip, and (by default) the the actual height (or, for the bottom, depth) | |
| 1384 | +% of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. | |
| 1385 | +% The available modes are: | |
| 1386 | +% t = top margin | |
| 1387 | +% b = bottom margin | |
| 1388 | +% c = vertically centered, with the given offset | |
| 1389 | +% a = adjust the vertical margins using the given offset | |
| 1390 | +% q = adjust the margins using \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff and the given offset | |
| 1391 | +% For the offsets, positive values increase the top margin. | |
| 1392 | +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \textheight should be set properly for the | |
| 1393 | +% given margins before calling this function. | |
| 1394 | +\def\IEEEsettopmargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettopmargin}{\@IEEEsettopmargin[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} | |
| 1395 | +\def\@IEEEsettopmargin[#1]#2#3{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax | |
| 1396 | +\@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax | |
| 1397 | +% check for mode errors | |
| 1398 | +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty | |
| 1399 | + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak | |
| 1400 | + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax | |
| 1401 | + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax | |
| 1402 | + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax | |
| 1403 | +\else | |
| 1404 | + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else | |
| 1405 | + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax | |
| 1406 | + \fi | |
| 1407 | +\fi | |
| 1408 | +% handle each mode | |
| 1409 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax | |
| 1410 | + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1411 | +\else | |
| 1412 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken q\relax | |
| 1413 | + % we need to adjust by half the \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff value | |
| 1414 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\relax | |
| 1415 | + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax | |
| 1416 | + % a positive \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff means we need to reduce \topmargin | |
| 1417 | + % because \textheight has been lenghtened | |
| 1418 | + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax | |
| 1419 | + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1420 | +\else | |
| 1421 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax | |
| 1422 | + \topmargin\paperheight | |
| 1423 | + \advance\topmargin by -\textheight | |
| 1424 | + % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout | |
| 1425 | + \advance \topmargin by \topskip | |
| 1426 | + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1427 | + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax | |
| 1428 | + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1429 | + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax | |
| 1430 | + \divide\topmargin by 2\relax | |
| 1431 | + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1432 | +\else | |
| 1433 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax | |
| 1434 | + \topmargin\paperheight | |
| 1435 | + \advance\topmargin by -\textheight | |
| 1436 | + % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout | |
| 1437 | + \advance \topmargin by \topskip | |
| 1438 | + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1439 | + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax | |
| 1440 | + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1441 | +\else | |
| 1442 | + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax | |
| 1443 | + \else | |
| 1444 | + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak | |
| 1445 | + Defaulting to `t'}% | |
| 1446 | + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax | |
| 1447 | + \fi | |
| 1448 | + \topmargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1449 | + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1450 | + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax | |
| 1451 | +\fi\fi % if t, b, c | |
| 1452 | +% convert desired top margin into actual \topmargin | |
| 1453 | +% this is not done for the q or a modes because they are only adjustments | |
| 1454 | +\advance \topmargin by -\topskip | |
| 1455 | +\advance \topmargin by -1in | |
| 1456 | +\advance \topmargin by -\headheight | |
| 1457 | +\advance \topmargin by -\headsep | |
| 1458 | +\fi\fi % if q, a | |
| 1459 | +} | |
| 1460 | + | |
| 1461 | + | |
| 1462 | + | |
| 1463 | +% usage: \IEEEsetheadermargin[header sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset} | |
| 1464 | +% Differentially adjusts \topmargin and \headsep (such that their sum is unchanged) | |
| 1465 | +% based on the specified header margin. | |
| 1466 | +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \topskip, and (by default) | |
| 1467 | +% the actual height (or depth) of the \IEEEdefaultheadersampletext and | |
| 1468 | +% \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. | |
| 1469 | +% The available modes are: | |
| 1470 | +% t = top margin (top of the header text to the top of the page) | |
| 1471 | +% b = bottom margin (bottom of the header text to the top of the main text) | |
| 1472 | +% c = vertically centered between the main text and the top of the page, | |
| 1473 | +% with the given offset | |
| 1474 | +% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset | |
| 1475 | +% For the offsets, positive values move the header downward. | |
| 1476 | +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \topmargin should be set properly before | |
| 1477 | +% calling this function. | |
| 1478 | +\def\IEEEsetheadermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetheadermargin}{\@IEEEsetheadermargin[\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext]}} | |
| 1479 | +\def\@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} | |
| 1480 | +\def\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax | |
| 1481 | +\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax | |
| 1482 | +% check for mode errors | |
| 1483 | +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty | |
| 1484 | + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak | |
| 1485 | + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax | |
| 1486 | + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax | |
| 1487 | + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax | |
| 1488 | +\else | |
| 1489 | + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else | |
| 1490 | + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax | |
| 1491 | + \fi | |
| 1492 | +\fi | |
| 1493 | +% handle each mode | |
| 1494 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax | |
| 1495 | + % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment | |
| 1496 | + % value as is. The end adjustment of \topmargin and \headsep will | |
| 1497 | + % do all that is needed | |
| 1498 | +\else | |
| 1499 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax | |
| 1500 | + % get the bottom margin | |
| 1501 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax | |
| 1502 | + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1503 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1504 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip | |
| 1505 | + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1506 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1507 | + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin | |
| 1508 | + % subtract from it the top header margin | |
| 1509 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin | |
| 1510 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\topmargin | |
| 1511 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\headheight | |
| 1512 | + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1513 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1514 | + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom and top margins | |
| 1515 | + % we need to adjust by half this amount to center the header | |
| 1516 | + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax | |
| 1517 | + % and add to offset | |
| 1518 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB | |
| 1519 | +\else | |
| 1520 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax | |
| 1521 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax | |
| 1522 | + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1523 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1524 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip | |
| 1525 | + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1526 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1527 | + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin | |
| 1528 | + % get the difference between the actual and the desired | |
| 1529 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 1530 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB | |
| 1531 | +\else | |
| 1532 | + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax | |
| 1533 | + \else | |
| 1534 | + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak | |
| 1535 | + Defaulting to `t'}% | |
| 1536 | + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax | |
| 1537 | + \fi | |
| 1538 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin | |
| 1539 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topmargin | |
| 1540 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \headheight | |
| 1541 | + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1542 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1543 | + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header top margin | |
| 1544 | + % get the difference between the desired and the actual | |
| 1545 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB | |
| 1546 | +\fi\fi % if t, b, c | |
| 1547 | +\fi % if a | |
| 1548 | +% advance \topmargin by the needed amount and reduce \headsep by the same | |
| 1549 | +% so as not to disturb the location of the main text | |
| 1550 | +\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1551 | +\advance\headsep by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1552 | +} | |
| 1553 | + | |
| 1554 | + | |
| 1555 | + | |
| 1556 | +% usage: \IEEEsetfootermargin[footer sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset} | |
| 1557 | +% Adjusts \footskip based on the specified footer margin. | |
| 1558 | +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \paperheight, \headheight, | |
| 1559 | +% \headsep, \textheight and (by default) the actual height (or depth) of the | |
| 1560 | +% \IEEEdefaultfootersampletext and \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. | |
| 1561 | +% The available modes are: | |
| 1562 | +% t = top margin (top of the footer text to the bottom of the main text) | |
| 1563 | +% b = bottom margin (bottom of the footer text to the bottom of page) | |
| 1564 | +% c = vertically centered between the main text and the bottom of the page, | |
| 1565 | +% with the given offset | |
| 1566 | +% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset | |
| 1567 | +% For the offsets, positive values move the footer downward. | |
| 1568 | +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip, \topmargin, and \textheight should be set | |
| 1569 | +% properly before calling this function. | |
| 1570 | +\def\IEEEsetfootermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetfootermargin}{\@IEEEsetfootermargin[\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext]}} | |
| 1571 | +\def\@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} | |
| 1572 | +\def\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax | |
| 1573 | +\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax | |
| 1574 | +% check for mode errors | |
| 1575 | +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty | |
| 1576 | + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak | |
| 1577 | + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax | |
| 1578 | + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax | |
| 1579 | + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax | |
| 1580 | +\else | |
| 1581 | + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else | |
| 1582 | + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax | |
| 1583 | + \fi | |
| 1584 | +\fi | |
| 1585 | +% handle each mode | |
| 1586 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax | |
| 1587 | + % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment | |
| 1588 | + % value as is. The end adjustment of \footskip will do all that | |
| 1589 | + % is needed | |
| 1590 | +\else | |
| 1591 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax | |
| 1592 | + % calculate the bottom margin | |
| 1593 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset | |
| 1594 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax | |
| 1595 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax | |
| 1596 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax | |
| 1597 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax | |
| 1598 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax | |
| 1599 | + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1600 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB | |
| 1601 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight | |
| 1602 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1603 | + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin | |
| 1604 | + % now subtract off the footer top margin | |
| 1605 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -\footskip\relax | |
| 1606 | + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1607 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1608 | + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1609 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1610 | + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom | |
| 1611 | + % and top footer margins | |
| 1612 | + % our adjustment must be half this value to center the footer | |
| 1613 | + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax | |
| 1614 | + % add to the offset | |
| 1615 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB | |
| 1616 | +\else | |
| 1617 | +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax | |
| 1618 | + % calculate the bottom margin | |
| 1619 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset | |
| 1620 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax | |
| 1621 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax | |
| 1622 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax | |
| 1623 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax | |
| 1624 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax | |
| 1625 | + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1626 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB | |
| 1627 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight | |
| 1628 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1629 | + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin | |
| 1630 | + % get the difference between the actual and the desired | |
| 1631 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 1632 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB | |
| 1633 | +\else | |
| 1634 | + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax | |
| 1635 | + \else | |
| 1636 | + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak | |
| 1637 | + Defaulting to `t'}% | |
| 1638 | + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax | |
| 1639 | + \fi | |
| 1640 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax | |
| 1641 | + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1642 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1643 | + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 1644 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC | |
| 1645 | + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer top margin | |
| 1646 | + % get the difference between the desired and the actual | |
| 1647 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB | |
| 1648 | +\fi\fi % if t, b, c | |
| 1649 | +\fi % if a | |
| 1650 | +% advance \footskip by the needed amount | |
| 1651 | +\advance\footskip by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax | |
| 1652 | +} | |
| 1653 | + | |
| 1654 | +% -- End V1.8a page setup commands -- | |
| 1655 | + | |
| 1656 | + | |
| 1657 | + | |
| 1658 | + | |
| 1659 | + | |
| 1660 | +% V1.6 | |
| 1661 | +% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations | |
| 1662 | +% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise | |
| 1663 | +% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox | |
| 1664 | +% warning. The author may still have to tweak things, | |
| 1665 | +% but the appearance will be much better "right out | |
| 1666 | +% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior. | |
| 1667 | +% TeX default is 50 | |
| 1668 | +\hyphenpenalty=750 | |
| 1669 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 1670 | +\hyphenpenalty 500 | |
| 1671 | +\fi | |
| 1672 | +% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better. | |
| 1673 | +% The TeX default is 1000 | |
| 1674 | +\hbadness=1350 | |
| 1675 | +% The IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation | |
| 1676 | +\frenchspacing | |
| 1677 | + | |
| 1678 | +% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks | |
| 1679 | +\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700 | |
| 1680 | +\relpenalty=800 % default 500 | |
| 1681 | + | |
| 1682 | +% v1.8a increase these to discourage widows and orphans | |
| 1683 | +\clubpenalty=1000 % default 150 | |
| 1684 | +\widowpenalty=1000 % default 150 | |
| 1685 | +\displaywidowpenalty=1000 % default 50 | |
| 1686 | + | |
| 1687 | + | |
| 1688 | +% margin note stuff | |
| 1689 | +\marginparsep 10pt | |
| 1690 | +\marginparwidth 20pt | |
| 1691 | +\marginparpush 25pt | |
| 1692 | + | |
| 1693 | + | |
| 1694 | +% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch | |
| 1695 | +\lineskip 0pt | |
| 1696 | +\normallineskip 0pt | |
| 1697 | +\lineskiplimit 0pt | |
| 1698 | +\normallineskiplimit 0pt | |
| 1699 | + | |
| 1700 | +% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the | |
| 1701 | +% footline | |
| 1702 | +\footskip 0.4in | |
| 1703 | + | |
| 1704 | +% normally zero, should be relative to font height. | |
| 1705 | +% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes) | |
| 1706 | +\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex | |
| 1707 | + | |
| 1708 | +\parindent 1.0em | |
| 1709 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 1710 | + \parindent 1.5em | |
| 1711 | +\fi | |
| 1712 | + | |
| 1713 | +\headheight 12pt | |
| 1714 | +\headsep 18pt | |
| 1715 | +% use the normal font baselineskip | |
| 1716 | +% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch | |
| 1717 | +\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip | |
| 1718 | + | |
| 1719 | + | |
| 1720 | +% V1.8 \maxdepth defaults to 4pt, but should be font size dependent | |
| 1721 | +\maxdepth=0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip | |
| 1722 | +\textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt | |
| 1723 | + | |
| 1724 | +% set the default top margin to 58pt | |
| 1725 | +% which results in a \topmargin of -49.59pt for 10pt documents | |
| 1726 | +\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{58pt} | |
| 1727 | +% tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/column. | |
| 1728 | +% standard is: 9pt/63 lpc; 10pt/58 lpc; 11pt/52 lpc; 12pt/50 lpc | |
| 1729 | +\IEEEquantizetextheight{c} | |
| 1730 | +% tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom | |
| 1731 | +\IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} | |
| 1732 | + | |
| 1733 | + | |
| 1734 | +\columnsep 1pc | |
| 1735 | +\textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc | |
| 1736 | + | |
| 1737 | +% set the default side margins to center the text | |
| 1738 | +\IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} | |
| 1739 | + | |
| 1740 | + | |
| 1741 | +% adjust margins for default conference mode | |
| 1742 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference | |
| 1743 | + \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt) | |
| 1744 | + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.75in} | |
| 1745 | + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. | |
| 1746 | + % standard is: 9pt/61 lpc; 10pt/56 lpc; 11pt/50 lpc; 12pt/48 lpc | |
| 1747 | + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} | |
| 1748 | + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom | |
| 1749 | + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} | |
| 1750 | +\fi | |
| 1751 | + | |
| 1752 | + | |
| 1753 | +% compsoc text sizes, margins and spacings | |
| 1754 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 1755 | + \columnsep 12bp | |
| 1756 | + % CS specs for \textwdith are 6.875in | |
| 1757 | + % \textwidth 6.875in | |
| 1758 | + % however, measurements from proofs show they are using 3.5in columns | |
| 1759 | + \textwidth 7in | |
| 1760 | + \advance\textwidth by \columnsep | |
| 1761 | + % set the side margins to center the text | |
| 1762 | + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} | |
| 1763 | + % top/bottom margins to center | |
| 1764 | + % could just set \textheight to 9.75in for all the different paper sizes | |
| 1765 | + % and then quantize, but we'll do it the long way here to allow for easy | |
| 1766 | + % future per-paper size adjustments | |
| 1767 | + \IEEEsettextheight{0.625in}{0.625in}% 11in - 2 * 0.625in = 9.75in is the standard text height for compsoc journals | |
| 1768 | + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.625in} | |
| 1769 | + \if@IEEEusingcspaper | |
| 1770 | + \IEEEsettextheight{0.5in}{0.5in}% 10.75in - 2 * 0.5in = 9.75in | |
| 1771 | + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.5in} | |
| 1772 | + \fi | |
| 1773 | + \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper | |
| 1774 | + \IEEEsettextheight{24.675mm}{24.675mm}% 297mm - 2 * 24.675mm = 247.650mm (9.75in) | |
| 1775 | + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{24.675mm} | |
| 1776 | + \fi | |
| 1777 | + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. | |
| 1778 | + % standard is: 9pt/65 lpc; 10pt/61 lpc; 11pt/53 lpc; 12pt/49 lpc | |
| 1779 | + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} | |
| 1780 | + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom | |
| 1781 | + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} | |
| 1782 | + | |
| 1783 | +% compsoc conference | |
| 1784 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference | |
| 1785 | + % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep | |
| 1786 | + \columnsep 0.25in | |
| 1787 | + \IEEEsettextwidth{0.75in}{0.75in} | |
| 1788 | + % set the side margins to center the text (0.75in for letterpaper) | |
| 1789 | + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} | |
| 1790 | + % compsoc conferences want 1in top and bottom margin | |
| 1791 | + \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in} | |
| 1792 | + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in} | |
| 1793 | + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. | |
| 1794 | + % standard is: 9pt/58 lpc; 10pt/53 lpc; 11pt/48 lpc; 12pt/46 lpc | |
| 1795 | + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} | |
| 1796 | + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom | |
| 1797 | + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} | |
| 1798 | + \fi | |
| 1799 | +\fi | |
| 1800 | + | |
| 1801 | + | |
| 1802 | + | |
| 1803 | +% draft mode settings override that of all other modes | |
| 1804 | +% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra | |
| 1805 | +% space between the lines for editor's comments | |
| 1806 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls | |
| 1807 | + % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type | |
| 1808 | + \IEEEsettextwidth{1in}{1in} | |
| 1809 | + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} | |
| 1810 | + % want 1in top and bottom margins | |
| 1811 | + \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in} | |
| 1812 | + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in} | |
| 1813 | + % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines. | |
| 1814 | + % this may cause the top and bottom margins to be off a tad | |
| 1815 | + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} | |
| 1816 | + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom | |
| 1817 | + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} | |
| 1818 | +\fi | |
| 1819 | + | |
| 1820 | + | |
| 1821 | + | |
| 1822 | +% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin | |
| 1823 | +% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner. | |
| 1824 | +\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined | |
| 1825 | +\else | |
| 1826 | + \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined | |
| 1827 | + \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} | |
| 1828 | + \fi | |
| 1829 | +\fi | |
| 1830 | + | |
| 1831 | +\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined | |
| 1832 | +\else | |
| 1833 | + % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer. | |
| 1834 | + \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined | |
| 1835 | + \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} | |
| 1836 | + \fi | |
| 1837 | + \IEEEsettextwidth{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} | |
| 1838 | + \IEEEsetsidemargin{i}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} | |
| 1839 | + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and | |
| 1840 | + outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} | |
| 1841 | +\fi | |
| 1842 | + | |
| 1843 | + | |
| 1844 | + | |
| 1845 | +% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin | |
| 1846 | +% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin | |
| 1847 | +\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined | |
| 1848 | +\else | |
| 1849 | + \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined | |
| 1850 | + \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} | |
| 1851 | + \fi | |
| 1852 | +\fi | |
| 1853 | + | |
| 1854 | +\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined | |
| 1855 | +\else | |
| 1856 | + % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin | |
| 1857 | + \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined | |
| 1858 | + \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} | |
| 1859 | + \fi | |
| 1860 | + \IEEEsettextheight{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} | |
| 1861 | + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} | |
| 1862 | + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and | |
| 1863 | + bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} | |
| 1864 | +\fi | |
| 1865 | + | |
| 1866 | + | |
| 1867 | + | |
| 1868 | +% default to center header and footer text in the margins | |
| 1869 | +\IEEEsetheadermargin{c}{0pt} | |
| 1870 | +\IEEEsetfootermargin{c}{0pt} | |
| 1871 | + | |
| 1872 | +% adjust header and footer positions for compsoc journals | |
| 1873 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 1874 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONjournal | |
| 1875 | + \IEEEsetheadermargin{b}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} | |
| 1876 | + \IEEEsetfootermargin{t}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} | |
| 1877 | + \fi | |
| 1878 | +\fi | |
| 1879 | + | |
| 1880 | + | |
| 1881 | +% V1.8a display lines per column info message on user's console | |
| 1882 | +\def\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\textheight | |
| 1883 | +% topskip represents only one line even if > baselineskip | |
| 1884 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -1\topskip | |
| 1885 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 1886 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 1887 | +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip | |
| 1888 | +% need to add one line to include topskip (first) line | |
| 1889 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 1 | |
| 1890 | +% save lines per column value as text | |
| 1891 | +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB} | |
| 1892 | +% backout topskip advance to allow direct \@IEEEtrantmpcountA comparison | |
| 1893 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by -1 | |
| 1894 | +% restore value as text height (without topskip) rather than just as number of lines | |
| 1895 | +\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip | |
| 1896 | +% is the column height an integer number of lines per column? | |
| 1897 | +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpcountB | |
| 1898 | +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{exact} | |
| 1899 | +\else | |
| 1900 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax | |
| 1901 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax | |
| 1902 | +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{approximate, difference = \the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA} | |
| 1903 | +\fi | |
| 1904 | +\typeout{-- Lines per column: \@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt\space (\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt).}} | |
| 1905 | +% delay execution till start of document to allow for user changes | |
| 1906 | +\AtBeginDocument{\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn} | |
| 1907 | + | |
| 1908 | + | |
| 1909 | + | |
| 1910 | +% LIST SPACING CONTROLS | |
| 1911 | + | |
| 1912 | +% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing | |
| 1913 | +% above and below \trivlist | |
| 1914 | +% Both \list and IED lists override this. | |
| 1915 | +% However, \trivlist will use this as will most | |
| 1916 | +% things built from \trivlist like the \center | |
| 1917 | +% environment. | |
| 1918 | +\topsep 0.5\baselineskip | |
| 1919 | + | |
| 1920 | +% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded | |
| 1921 | +% or followed by blank lines. the IEEE does not increase | |
| 1922 | +% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero. | |
| 1923 | +% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster. | |
| 1924 | +\partopsep \z@ | |
| 1925 | + | |
| 1926 | +% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. | |
| 1927 | +% The IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs | |
| 1928 | +% so this is also zero. | |
| 1929 | +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to | |
| 1930 | +% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists). | |
| 1931 | +\parsep \z@ | |
| 1932 | + | |
| 1933 | +% Controls the extra spacing between list items. | |
| 1934 | +% The IEEE does not put extra spacing between items. | |
| 1935 | +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect | |
| 1936 | +% lists (but not IED lists). | |
| 1937 | +\itemsep \z@ | |
| 1938 | + | |
| 1939 | +% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list | |
| 1940 | +% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter | |
| 1941 | +% it, you have to do so when you call the \list. | |
| 1942 | +% However, the IEEE uses this for the theorem environment | |
| 1943 | +% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below | |
| 1944 | +\itemindent -1em | |
| 1945 | + | |
| 1946 | +% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to | |
| 1947 | +% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list. | |
| 1948 | +% Hence this statement does nothing for lists. | |
| 1949 | +% But, quote and verse do use it for indention. | |
| 1950 | +\leftmargin 2em | |
| 1951 | + | |
| 1952 | +% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list | |
| 1953 | +% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and | |
| 1954 | +% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they | |
| 1955 | +% all are overridden. | |
| 1956 | +\leftmargini 2em | |
| 1957 | +%\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used. | |
| 1958 | +%\leftmargini 0em | |
| 1959 | +\leftmarginii 1em | |
| 1960 | +\leftmarginiii 1.5em | |
| 1961 | +\leftmarginiv 1.5em | |
| 1962 | +\leftmarginv 1.0em | |
| 1963 | +\leftmarginvi 1.0em | |
| 1964 | +\labelsep 0.5em | |
| 1965 | +\labelwidth \z@ | |
| 1966 | + | |
| 1967 | + | |
| 1968 | +% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained. | |
| 1969 | +% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the | |
| 1970 | +% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the | |
| 1971 | +% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). | |
| 1972 | +% \topsep is now 2pt as the IEEE puts a little extra space around | |
| 1973 | +% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list. | |
| 1974 | +% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in | |
| 1975 | +% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes | |
| 1976 | +% of these values DO affect \list | |
| 1977 | +% | |
| 1978 | +\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} | |
| 1979 | +\let\@listI\@listi | |
| 1980 | +\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii% | |
| 1981 | + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} | |
| 1982 | +\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii% | |
| 1983 | + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} | |
| 1984 | +\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv% | |
| 1985 | + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} | |
| 1986 | +\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv% | |
| 1987 | + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} | |
| 1988 | +\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi% | |
| 1989 | + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} | |
| 1990 | + | |
| 1991 | + | |
| 1992 | +% The IEEE uses 5) not 5. | |
| 1993 | +\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} | |
| 1994 | + | |
| 1995 | +% The IEEE uses a) not (a) | |
| 1996 | +\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} | |
| 1997 | + | |
| 1998 | +% The IEEE uses iii) not iii. | |
| 1999 | +\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} | |
| 2000 | + | |
| 2001 | +% The IEEE uses A) not A. | |
| 2002 | +\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} | |
| 2003 | + | |
| 2004 | +% exactly the same as in article.cls | |
| 2005 | +\def\p@enumii{\theenumi} | |
| 2006 | +\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} | |
| 2007 | +\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} | |
| 2008 | + | |
| 2009 | +% itemized list label styles | |
| 2010 | +\def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$} | |
| 2011 | +\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}} | |
| 2012 | +\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$} | |
| 2013 | +\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$} | |
| 2014 | + | |
| 2015 | + | |
| 2016 | + | |
| 2017 | +% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS **** | |
| 2018 | +% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls | |
| 2019 | +% *************************** | |
| 2020 | +% | |
| 2021 | +% | |
| 2022 | +% The IEEE seems to use at least two different values by | |
| 2023 | +% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right | |
| 2024 | +% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal | |
| 2025 | +% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use | |
| 2026 | +% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications | |
| 2027 | +% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent. | |
| 2028 | +% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose | |
| 2029 | +% which one you like in your document using a command such as: | |
| 2030 | +% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB} | |
| 2031 | +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA | |
| 2032 | +\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent | |
| 2033 | + | |
| 2034 | +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB | |
| 2035 | +\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent | |
| 2036 | +% However, we'll default to using \parindent | |
| 2037 | +% which makes more sense to me | |
| 2038 | +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent | |
| 2039 | +\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA | |
| 2040 | + | |
| 2041 | + | |
| 2042 | +% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels | |
| 2043 | +% are indented to the right. | |
| 2044 | +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention | |
| 2045 | +\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent | |
| 2046 | +\IEEEelabelindent \parindent | |
| 2047 | + | |
| 2048 | +% This controls the default amount the description list labels | |
| 2049 | +% are indented to the right. | |
| 2050 | +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention | |
| 2051 | +\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent | |
| 2052 | +\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent | |
| 2053 | + | |
| 2054 | +% This is the value actually used within the IED lists. | |
| 2055 | +% The IED environments automatically set its value to | |
| 2056 | +% one of the three values above, so global changes do | |
| 2057 | +% not have any effect | |
| 2058 | +\newdimen\IEEElabelindent | |
| 2059 | +\IEEElabelindent \parindent | |
| 2060 | + | |
| 2061 | +% The actual amount labels will be indented is | |
| 2062 | +% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below | |
| 2063 | +% corresponding to the level of nesting depth | |
| 2064 | +% This provides a means by which the user can | |
| 2065 | +% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper | |
| 2066 | +% levels | |
| 2067 | +% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE" | |
| 2068 | +% values. What the IEEE actually does may depend on the specific | |
| 2069 | +% circumstances. | |
| 2070 | +% The first list level almost always has full indention. | |
| 2071 | +% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation | |
| 2072 | +% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing | |
| 2073 | +% that they don't use any indentation. | |
| 2074 | +\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one | |
| 2075 | +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases | |
| 2076 | +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0? | |
| 2077 | +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0} | |
| 2078 | +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0} | |
| 2079 | +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0} | |
| 2080 | + | |
| 2081 | +% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto | |
| 2082 | +% set to one of the 6 values above | |
| 2083 | +% global changes here have no effect | |
| 2084 | +\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0} | |
| 2085 | + | |
| 2086 | +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED | |
| 2087 | +% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for | |
| 2088 | +% the labels. | |
| 2089 | +% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later | |
| 2090 | +% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted | |
| 2091 | +% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty | |
| 2092 | +\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep | |
| 2093 | +\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em | |
| 2094 | + | |
| 2095 | +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED | |
| 2096 | +% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for | |
| 2097 | +% the labels (nomenclature lists). The IEEE usually increases the | |
| 2098 | +% spacing in these cases | |
| 2099 | +\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep | |
| 2100 | +\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em | |
| 2101 | + | |
| 2102 | +% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and | |
| 2103 | +% below each IED list. the IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing | |
| 2104 | +% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. | |
| 2105 | +% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later | |
| 2106 | +% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted | |
| 2107 | +% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty | |
| 2108 | +\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep | |
| 2109 | +\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt | |
| 2110 | + | |
| 2111 | + | |
| 2112 | +% This command is executed within each IED list environment | |
| 2113 | +% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the | |
| 2114 | +% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing | |
| 2115 | +% global parameters that affect things other than lists. | |
| 2116 | +% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}} | |
| 2117 | +% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until | |
| 2118 | +% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. | |
| 2119 | +\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax} | |
| 2120 | + | |
| 2121 | +% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based | |
| 2122 | +% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent | |
| 2123 | +% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label} | |
| 2124 | +% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively: | |
| 2125 | +% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep | |
| 2126 | +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % | |
| 2127 | +\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}% | |
| 2128 | +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% | |
| 2129 | +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}} | |
| 2130 | + | |
| 2131 | +% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the | |
| 2132 | +% width of the given text. It is the same as | |
| 2133 | +% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text} | |
| 2134 | +% and useful as a shorter alternative. | |
| 2135 | +% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width | |
| 2136 | +% of the longest label in the list | |
| 2137 | +\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}} | |
| 2138 | + | |
| 2139 | +% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the | |
| 2140 | +% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal | |
| 2141 | +% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via | |
| 2142 | +% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list | |
| 2143 | +% environments. | |
| 2144 | +\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}} | |
| 2145 | + | |
| 2146 | +% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically | |
| 2147 | +% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep | |
| 2148 | +% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin | |
| 2149 | +% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) | |
| 2150 | +% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list | |
| 2151 | +% environments to have an effect. | |
| 2152 | +\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin | |
| 2153 | +\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse | |
| 2154 | + | |
| 2155 | +% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by | |
| 2156 | +% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level. | |
| 2157 | +% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option | |
| 2158 | +% of the IED list environments to have an effect. | |
| 2159 | +\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor | |
| 2160 | +\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse | |
| 2161 | + | |
| 2162 | + | |
| 2163 | +% internal variable to indicate type of IED label | |
| 2164 | +% justification | |
| 2165 | +% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right | |
| 2166 | +\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0} | |
| 2167 | + | |
| 2168 | + | |
| 2169 | +% commands to allow the user to control IED | |
| 2170 | +% label justifications. Use these commands within | |
| 2171 | +% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl | |
| 2172 | +% Note that changing the normal list justifications | |
| 2173 | +% is nonstandard and the IEEE may not like it if you do so! | |
| 2174 | +% I include these commands as they may be helpful to | |
| 2175 | +% those who are using these enhanced list controls for | |
| 2176 | +% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work. | |
| 2177 | +% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right | |
| 2178 | +% justification, description defaults to left. | |
| 2179 | +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left | |
| 2180 | +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center | |
| 2181 | +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right | |
| 2182 | + | |
| 2183 | + | |
| 2184 | + | |
| 2185 | + | |
| 2186 | +% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies | |
| 2187 | +% this allows us to set all the list parameters within | |
| 2188 | +% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) | |
| 2189 | +% from overriding any of our parameters | |
| 2190 | +% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers | |
| 2191 | +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % | |
| 2192 | +\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}% | |
| 2193 | +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}% | |
| 2194 | +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}% | |
| 2195 | +\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}% | |
| 2196 | +\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}% | |
| 2197 | +\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}% | |
| 2198 | +\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}% | |
| 2199 | +\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}% | |
| 2200 | +\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}% | |
| 2201 | +\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}} | |
| 2202 | + | |
| 2203 | +% Note controlled spacing here | |
| 2204 | +\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax% | |
| 2205 | +\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax% | |
| 2206 | +\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax% | |
| 2207 | +\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax% | |
| 2208 | +\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax% | |
| 2209 | +\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax% | |
| 2210 | +\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax% | |
| 2211 | +\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax% | |
| 2212 | +\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax% | |
| 2213 | +\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax} | |
| 2214 | + | |
| 2215 | + | |
| 2216 | +% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments | |
| 2217 | +% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description | |
| 2218 | +% which must be created by the base classes | |
| 2219 | +% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate | |
| 2220 | +\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize | |
| 2221 | +\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize | |
| 2222 | +\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate | |
| 2223 | +\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate | |
| 2224 | + | |
| 2225 | +% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls | |
| 2226 | +\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription} | |
| 2227 | + {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin | |
| 2228 | + \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}} | |
| 2229 | + {\endlist} | |
| 2230 | +\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep | |
| 2231 | + \normalfont\bfseries #1} | |
| 2232 | + | |
| 2233 | + | |
| 2234 | +% override LaTeX's default IED lists | |
| 2235 | +\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize} | |
| 2236 | +\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize} | |
| 2237 | +\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} | |
| 2238 | +\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} | |
| 2239 | +\def\description{\@IEEEdescription} | |
| 2240 | +\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription} | |
| 2241 | + | |
| 2242 | +% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that | |
| 2243 | +% override itemize, enumerate, or description | |
| 2244 | +\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize} | |
| 2245 | +\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize} | |
| 2246 | +\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} | |
| 2247 | +\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} | |
| 2248 | +\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription} | |
| 2249 | +\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription} | |
| 2250 | + | |
| 2251 | + | |
| 2252 | +% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal | |
| 2253 | +% commands so they are protected against redefinition | |
| 2254 | +\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}} | |
| 2255 | +\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}} | |
| 2256 | +\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}} | |
| 2257 | +\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist} | |
| 2258 | +\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist} | |
| 2259 | +\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist} | |
| 2260 | + | |
| 2261 | + | |
| 2262 | +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS | |
| 2263 | +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS | |
| 2264 | +% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001 | |
| 2265 | +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % | |
| 2266 | +\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{% | |
| 2267 | + \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% | |
| 2268 | + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% | |
| 2269 | + \advance\@itemdepth\@ne% | |
| 2270 | + \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% | |
| 2271 | + % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level | |
| 2272 | + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be | |
| 2273 | + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% | |
| 2274 | + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment | |
| 2275 | + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default | |
| 2276 | + % set other defaults | |
| 2277 | + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% | |
| 2278 | + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% | |
| 2279 | + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% | |
| 2280 | + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent% | |
| 2281 | + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% | |
| 2282 | + \partopsep 0ex% | |
| 2283 | + \parsep 0ex% | |
| 2284 | + \itemsep 0ex% | |
| 2285 | + \rightmargin 0em% | |
| 2286 | + \listparindent 0em% | |
| 2287 | + \itemindent 0em% | |
| 2288 | + % calculate the label width | |
| 2289 | + % the user can override this later if | |
| 2290 | + % they specified a \labelwidth | |
| 2291 | + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}% | |
| 2292 | + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters | |
| 2293 | + \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{% | |
| 2294 | + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes | |
| 2295 | + % to our globals | |
| 2296 | + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel | |
| 2297 | + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters | |
| 2298 | + #1\relax% | |
| 2299 | + % If the user has requested not to use the | |
| 2300 | + % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent | |
| 2301 | + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% | |
| 2302 | + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% | |
| 2303 | + \fi% | |
| 2304 | + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, | |
| 2305 | + % calculate our left margin based | |
| 2306 | + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and | |
| 2307 | + % \labelsep | |
| 2308 | + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% | |
| 2309 | + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% | |
| 2310 | + \fi}\fi\fi}% | |
| 2311 | + | |
| 2312 | + | |
| 2313 | +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS | |
| 2314 | +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS | |
| 2315 | +% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001 | |
| 2316 | +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % | |
| 2317 | +\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{% | |
| 2318 | + \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% | |
| 2319 | + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% | |
| 2320 | + \advance\@enumdepth\@ne% | |
| 2321 | + \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% | |
| 2322 | + % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level | |
| 2323 | + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be | |
| 2324 | + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% | |
| 2325 | + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment | |
| 2326 | + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default | |
| 2327 | + % set other defaults | |
| 2328 | + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% | |
| 2329 | + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% | |
| 2330 | + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% | |
| 2331 | + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent% | |
| 2332 | + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% | |
| 2333 | + \partopsep 0ex% | |
| 2334 | + \parsep 0ex% | |
| 2335 | + \itemsep 0ex% | |
| 2336 | + \rightmargin 0em% | |
| 2337 | + \listparindent 0em% | |
| 2338 | + \itemindent 0em% | |
| 2339 | + % calculate the label width | |
| 2340 | + % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using | |
| 2341 | + % normalfont 1) to 9) | |
| 2342 | + % The user can override this later | |
| 2343 | + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}% | |
| 2344 | + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters | |
| 2345 | + \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}% | |
| 2346 | + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes | |
| 2347 | + % to our globals | |
| 2348 | + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel | |
| 2349 | + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters | |
| 2350 | + #1\relax% | |
| 2351 | + % If the user has requested not to use the | |
| 2352 | + % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent | |
| 2353 | + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% | |
| 2354 | + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% | |
| 2355 | + \fi% | |
| 2356 | + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, | |
| 2357 | + % calculate our left margin based | |
| 2358 | + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and | |
| 2359 | + % \labelsep | |
| 2360 | + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% | |
| 2361 | + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% | |
| 2362 | + \fi}\fi\fi}% | |
| 2363 | + | |
| 2364 | + | |
| 2365 | +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS | |
| 2366 | +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS | |
| 2367 | +% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001 | |
| 2368 | +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % | |
| 2369 | +\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{% | |
| 2370 | + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% | |
| 2371 | + % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level | |
| 2372 | + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be | |
| 2373 | + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% | |
| 2374 | + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment | |
| 2375 | + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default | |
| 2376 | + % set other defaults | |
| 2377 | + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% | |
| 2378 | + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% | |
| 2379 | + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% | |
| 2380 | + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent% | |
| 2381 | + % assume normal labelsep | |
| 2382 | + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% | |
| 2383 | + \partopsep 0ex% | |
| 2384 | + \parsep 0ex% | |
| 2385 | + \itemsep 0ex% | |
| 2386 | + \rightmargin 0em% | |
| 2387 | + \listparindent 0em% | |
| 2388 | + \itemindent 0em% | |
| 2389 | + % Bogus label width in case the user forgets | |
| 2390 | + % to set it. | |
| 2391 | + % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you | |
| 2392 | + % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to | |
| 2393 | + % display it on the screen during compilation | |
| 2394 | + % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out | |
| 2395 | + % which label is the widest) | |
| 2396 | + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}% | |
| 2397 | + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters | |
| 2398 | + \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes | |
| 2399 | + % to our globals | |
| 2400 | + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel | |
| 2401 | + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters | |
| 2402 | + #1\relax% | |
| 2403 | + % If the user has requested not to use the | |
| 2404 | + % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent | |
| 2405 | + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% | |
| 2406 | + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% | |
| 2407 | + \fi% | |
| 2408 | + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, | |
| 2409 | + % calculate our left margin based | |
| 2410 | + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and | |
| 2411 | + % \labelsep | |
| 2412 | + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% | |
| 2413 | + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax% | |
| 2414 | + \fi}\fi} | |
| 2415 | + | |
| 2416 | +% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed. | |
| 2417 | +\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax | |
| 2418 | +\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else | |
| 2419 | +\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax | |
| 2420 | +\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else | |
| 2421 | +\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} | |
| 2422 | + | |
| 2423 | + | |
| 2424 | +% compsoc uses a larger value for the normal labelsep | |
| 2425 | +% and also extra spacing above and below each list | |
| 2426 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 2427 | + \IEEEiednormlabelsep 1.2em | |
| 2428 | + \IEEEiedtopsep 6pt plus 3pt minus 3pt | |
| 2429 | +\fi | |
| 2430 | + | |
| 2431 | + | |
| 2432 | +% VERSE and QUOTE | |
| 2433 | +% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment | |
| 2434 | +\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr | |
| 2435 | + \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent | |
| 2436 | + \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax} | |
| 2437 | + {\endlist} | |
| 2438 | +\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent | |
| 2439 | + \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax} | |
| 2440 | + {\endlist} | |
| 2441 | +\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax} | |
| 2442 | + {\endlist} | |
| 2443 | + | |
| 2444 | + | |
| 2445 | +% \titlepage | |
| 2446 | +% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct | |
| 2447 | +% way to create the title page. | |
| 2448 | +\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn | |
| 2449 | + \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} | |
| 2450 | +\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} | |
| 2451 | + | |
| 2452 | +% standard values from article.cls | |
| 2453 | +\arraycolsep 5pt | |
| 2454 | +\arrayrulewidth .4pt | |
| 2455 | +\doublerulesep 2pt | |
| 2456 | + | |
| 2457 | +\tabcolsep 6pt | |
| 2458 | +\tabbingsep 0.5em | |
| 2459 | + | |
| 2460 | + | |
| 2461 | +%% FOOTNOTES | |
| 2462 | +% | |
| 2463 | +%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt | |
| 2464 | +% V1.6 respond to changes in font size | |
| 2465 | +% space added above the footnotes (if present) | |
| 2466 | +\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip | |
| 2467 | + | |
| 2468 | +% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes | |
| 2469 | +% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in | |
| 2470 | +% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep | |
| 2471 | +% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed | |
| 2472 | +% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since | |
| 2473 | +% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7\baselineskip | |
| 2474 | +% above the baseline and 0.3\baselineskip below it, we need to | |
| 2475 | +% use 0.7\baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing | |
| 2476 | +% between all the lines of the footnotes. The IEEE often uses a tad | |
| 2477 | +% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps | |
| 2478 | +% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran | |
| 2479 | +% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle. | |
| 2480 | +{\footnotesize | |
| 2481 | +\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip} | |
| 2482 | + | |
| 2483 | + | |
| 2484 | +\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins | |
| 2485 | +\fboxsep = 3pt | |
| 2486 | +\fboxrule = .4pt | |
| 2487 | +% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark | |
| 2488 | +% Note that the IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need | |
| 2489 | +% box resizing tricks here. | |
| 2490 | +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em | |
| 2491 | +% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks | |
| 2492 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 2493 | +\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }} | |
| 2494 | +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1} | |
| 2495 | +\fi | |
| 2496 | + | |
| 2497 | +% The IEEE does not use footnote rules | |
| 2498 | +\def\footnoterule{} | |
| 2499 | + | |
| 2500 | +% V1.7 for compsoc, the IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot" | |
| 2501 | +% system to implement this. | |
| 2502 | +\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule | |
| 2503 | +\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse | |
| 2504 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 2505 | +\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule | |
| 2506 | +\kern-5pt | |
| 2507 | +\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill} | |
| 2508 | +\kern4.6pt | |
| 2509 | +\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse | |
| 2510 | +\else | |
| 2511 | +\relax | |
| 2512 | +\fi} | |
| 2513 | +\fi | |
| 2514 | + | |
| 2515 | +% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages | |
| 2516 | +\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 | |
| 2517 | + | |
| 2518 | +% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations | |
| 2519 | +% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000, | |
| 2520 | +% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100. | |
| 2521 | +\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 | |
| 2522 | + | |
| 2523 | +% default allows section depth up to /paragraph | |
| 2524 | +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} | |
| 2525 | + | |
| 2526 | +% technotes do not allow /paragraph | |
| 2527 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote | |
| 2528 | + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} | |
| 2529 | +\fi | |
| 2530 | +% neither do compsoc conferences | |
| 2531 | +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}} | |
| 2532 | + | |
| 2533 | + | |
| 2534 | +\newcounter{section} | |
| 2535 | +\newcounter{subsection}[section] | |
| 2536 | +\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] | |
| 2537 | +\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection] | |
| 2538 | + | |
| 2539 | +% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may | |
| 2540 | +% have their own, different, implementations | |
| 2541 | +\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation] | |
| 2542 | + | |
| 2543 | +% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents | |
| 2544 | +\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1 | |
| 2545 | +\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray) | |
| 2546 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 2547 | +% compsoc is all arabic | |
| 2548 | +\def\thesection{\arabic{section}} | |
| 2549 | +\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}} | |
| 2550 | +\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} | |
| 2551 | +\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} | |
| 2552 | +\else | |
| 2553 | +\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I | |
| 2554 | +% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - | |
| 2555 | +\def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A | |
| 2556 | +% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by the IEEE rather than I-A.1 | |
| 2557 | +\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1 | |
| 2558 | +\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a | |
| 2559 | +\fi | |
| 2560 | + | |
| 2561 | +% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to | |
| 2562 | +% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks. | |
| 2563 | +% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but | |
| 2564 | +% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions. | |
| 2565 | +\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}% | |
| 2566 | +\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax} | |
| 2567 | + | |
| 2568 | + | |
| 2569 | +% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings) | |
| 2570 | +% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes | |
| 2571 | +% in the former to automatically appear in the latter | |
| 2572 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 2573 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference | |
| 2574 | + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} | |
| 2575 | + \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.} | |
| 2576 | + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.} | |
| 2577 | + \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.} | |
| 2578 | + \else% compsoc not conferencs | |
| 2579 | + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection} | |
| 2580 | + \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}} | |
| 2581 | + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}} | |
| 2582 | + \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}} | |
| 2583 | + \fi | |
| 2584 | +\else% not compsoc | |
| 2585 | + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I. | |
| 2586 | + \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B. | |
| 2587 | + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3) | |
| 2588 | + \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d) | |
| 2589 | +\fi | |
| 2590 | + | |
| 2591 | +% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum | |
| 2592 | +\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1) | |
| 2593 | +% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray | |
| 2594 | +\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a) | |
| 2595 | +% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on | |
| 2596 | +% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis | |
| 2597 | +\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis} | |
| 2598 | + | |
| 2599 | + | |
| 2600 | + | |
| 2601 | +% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does | |
| 2602 | +\def\contentsname{Contents} | |
| 2603 | +\def\listfigurename{List of Figures} | |
| 2604 | +\def\listtablename{List of Tables} | |
| 2605 | +\def\refname{References} | |
| 2606 | +\def\indexname{Index} | |
| 2607 | +\def\figurename{Fig.} | |
| 2608 | +\def\tablename{TABLE} | |
| 2609 | +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}} | |
| 2610 | +\def\partname{Part} | |
| 2611 | +\def\appendixname{Appendix} | |
| 2612 | +\def\abstractname{Abstract} | |
| 2613 | +% IEEE specific names | |
| 2614 | +\def\IEEEkeywordsname{Index Terms} | |
| 2615 | +\def\IEEEproofname{Proof} | |
| 2616 | + | |
| 2617 | + | |
| 2618 | +% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS | |
| 2619 | +% | |
| 2620 | +\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em} | |
| 2621 | +\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em} | |
| 2622 | +\def\@dotsep{4.5} | |
| 2623 | +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} | |
| 2624 | + | |
| 2625 | +% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily | |
| 2626 | +% collide with the section titles. | |
| 2627 | +% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders. | |
| 2628 | +% MDS 1/2001 | |
| 2629 | +\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}} | |
| 2630 | +\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}% | |
| 2631 | + \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth% | |
| 2632 | + \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par% | |
| 2633 | + \endgroup} | |
| 2634 | +% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep | |
| 2635 | +\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}} | |
| 2636 | +\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}} | |
| 2637 | +% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth | |
| 2638 | +% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents | |
| 2639 | +% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are! | |
| 2640 | +\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}} | |
| 2641 | +\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}} | |
| 2642 | +\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}} | |
| 2643 | +\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}} | |
| 2644 | +\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}} | |
| 2645 | +\let\l@table\l@figure | |
| 2646 | + | |
| 2647 | + | |
| 2648 | +% Definitions for floats | |
| 2649 | +% | |
| 2650 | +% Normal Floats | |
| 2651 | +% V1.8 floatsep et al. revised down by 0.15\baselineskip | |
| 2652 | +% to account for the sideeffects of \topskip compensation | |
| 2653 | +\floatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip | |
| 2654 | +\textfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip | |
| 2655 | +\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil | |
| 2656 | +\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil | |
| 2657 | +\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil | |
| 2658 | +\def\topfraction{0.9} | |
| 2659 | +\def\bottomfraction{0.4} | |
| 2660 | +\def\floatpagefraction{0.8} | |
| 2661 | +% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page | |
| 2662 | +\def\textfraction{0.1} | |
| 2663 | + | |
| 2664 | +% Double Column Floats | |
| 2665 | +\dblfloatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip | |
| 2666 | + | |
| 2667 | +\dbltextfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip | |
| 2668 | +% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e. | |
| 2669 | +% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best | |
| 2670 | +% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable | |
| 2671 | +% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and | |
| 2672 | +% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with | |
| 2673 | +% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex | |
| 2674 | +% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998. | |
| 2675 | +% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't | |
| 2676 | +% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing. | |
| 2677 | + | |
| 2678 | +\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil | |
| 2679 | +\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil | |
| 2680 | +\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil | |
| 2681 | +\def\dbltopfraction{0.8} | |
| 2682 | +\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8} | |
| 2683 | +\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4} | |
| 2684 | + | |
| 2685 | +\intextsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip | |
| 2686 | +\setcounter{topnumber}{2} | |
| 2687 | +\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2} | |
| 2688 | +\setcounter{totalnumber}{4} | |
| 2689 | + | |
| 2690 | + | |
| 2691 | + | |
| 2692 | +% article class provides these, we should too. | |
| 2693 | +\newlength\abovecaptionskip | |
| 2694 | +\newlength\belowcaptionskip | |
| 2695 | +% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table | |
| 2696 | +% captions | |
| 2697 | +\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip} | |
| 2698 | +% compsoc journals are a little more generous | |
| 2699 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal | |
| 2700 | + \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.75\baselineskip} | |
| 2701 | +\fi\fi | |
| 2702 | +\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt} | |
| 2703 | +% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be | |
| 2704 | +% overridden by a user | |
| 2705 | +\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% | |
| 2706 | +\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% | |
| 2707 | + | |
| 2708 | + | |
| 2709 | +% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments | |
| 2710 | +% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref. | |
| 2711 | +\def\@IEEEtablestring{table} | |
| 2712 | + | |
| 2713 | + | |
| 2714 | +% V1.8 compensate for \topskip so top of top figures align with tops of the first lines of main text | |
| 2715 | +% here we calculate a space equal to the amount \topskip exceeds the main text height | |
| 2716 | +% we hook in at \@floatboxreset | |
| 2717 | +\def\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace{\ifdim\prevdepth=-1000pt\relax | |
| 2718 | +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{1\topskip}\relax | |
| 2719 | +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-0.7\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\relax | |
| 2720 | +\vspace*{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\fi} | |
| 2721 | +% V1.8 compensate for \topskip at the top of top tables so caption text is on main text baseline | |
| 2722 | +% use a strut set on the caption baseline within \@makecaption | |
| 2723 | +\def\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\ifdim\prevdepth=-1000pt\rule{0pt}{\topskip}\fi} | |
| 2724 | +% the \ifdim\prevdepth checks are always expected to be true for IEEE style float caption ordering | |
| 2725 | +% because top of figure content and top of captions in tables is the first thing on the vertical | |
| 2726 | +% list of these floats | |
| 2727 | +% thanks to Donald Arseneau for his 2000/11/11 post "Re: caption hacking" with info on this topic. | |
| 2728 | + | |
| 2729 | + | |
| 2730 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 2731 | +% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption | |
| 2732 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference | |
| 2733 | +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% | |
| 2734 | +% test if is a for a figure or table | |
| 2735 | +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% | |
| 2736 | +% if a table, do table caption | |
| 2737 | +\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% | |
| 2738 | +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace | |
| 2739 | +% if not a table, format it as a figure | |
| 2740 | +\else | |
| 2741 | +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace | |
| 2742 | +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}% | |
| 2743 | +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% | |
| 2744 | +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around | |
| 2745 | +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}% | |
| 2746 | +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% | |
| 2747 | +% if caption is shorter than a line, center | |
| 2748 | +\else% | |
| 2749 | +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% | |
| 2750 | +\fi\fi} | |
| 2751 | +% | |
| 2752 | +\else% nonconference compsoc | |
| 2753 | +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% | |
| 2754 | +% test if is a for a figure or table | |
| 2755 | +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% | |
| 2756 | +% if a table, do table caption | |
| 2757 | +\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% | |
| 2758 | +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace | |
| 2759 | +% if not a table, format it as a figure | |
| 2760 | +\else | |
| 2761 | +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace | |
| 2762 | +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}% | |
| 2763 | +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% | |
| 2764 | +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around | |
| 2765 | +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}% | |
| 2766 | +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% | |
| 2767 | +% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify | |
| 2768 | +\else% | |
| 2769 | +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% | |
| 2770 | +\fi\fi} | |
| 2771 | +\fi | |
| 2772 | +% | |
| 2773 | +\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption | |
| 2774 | +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% | |
| 2775 | +% test if is a for a figure or table | |
| 2776 | +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% | |
| 2777 | +% if a table, do table caption | |
| 2778 | +\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% | |
| 2779 | +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace | |
| 2780 | +% if not a table, format it as a figure | |
| 2781 | +\else | |
| 2782 | +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace | |
| 2783 | +% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one | |
| 2784 | +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\nobreakspace #2}% | |
| 2785 | +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% | |
| 2786 | +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around | |
| 2787 | +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\nobreakspace}% | |
| 2788 | +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% | |
| 2789 | +% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise | |
| 2790 | +\else% | |
| 2791 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% | |
| 2792 | +\else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% | |
| 2793 | +\fi\fi\fi} | |
| 2794 | +\fi | |
| 2795 | + | |
| 2796 | + | |
| 2797 | + | |
| 2798 | +% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label | |
| 2799 | +% within \caption | |
| 2800 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff | |
| 2801 | +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering{\footnotesize #1}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% | |
| 2802 | +\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label | |
| 2803 | +\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax | |
| 2804 | +\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}% | |
| 2805 | +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}% | |
| 2806 | +\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave | |
| 2807 | +\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi} | |
| 2808 | +\fi | |
| 2809 | + | |
| 2810 | + | |
| 2811 | +% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with | |
| 2812 | +% preview-latex | |
| 2813 | +\newcounter{figure} | |
| 2814 | +\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} | |
| 2815 | +\def\fps@figure{tbp} | |
| 2816 | +\def\ftype@figure{1} | |
| 2817 | +\def\ext@figure{lof} | |
| 2818 | +\def\fnum@figure{\figurename\nobreakspace\thefigure} | |
| 2819 | +% V1.8 within figures add \@IEEEfiguretopskipspace compensation to LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset | |
| 2820 | +\def\figure{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\normalsize\@setminipage\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace}\@float{figure}} | |
| 2821 | +\def\endfigure{\end@float} | |
| 2822 | +% V1.8 also add \@IEEEfiguretopskipspace compensation to \figure* | |
| 2823 | +\@namedef{figure*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\normalsize\@setminipage\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace}\@dblfloat{figure}} | |
| 2824 | +\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat} | |
| 2825 | + | |
| 2826 | +\newcounter{table} | |
| 2827 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 2828 | +\def\thetable{\arabic{table}} | |
| 2829 | +\else | |
| 2830 | +\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table} | |
| 2831 | +\fi | |
| 2832 | +\def\fps@table{tbp} | |
| 2833 | +\def\ftype@table{2} | |
| 2834 | +\def\ext@table{lot} | |
| 2835 | +\def\fnum@table{\tablename\nobreakspace\thetable} | |
| 2836 | +% V1.6 The IEEE uses 8pt text for tables | |
| 2837 | +% within tables alter LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset to use \footnotesize | |
| 2838 | +\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}} | |
| 2839 | +\def\endtable{\end@float} | |
| 2840 | +% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well. | |
| 2841 | +\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}} | |
| 2842 | +\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat} | |
| 2843 | + | |
| 2844 | + | |
| 2845 | + | |
| 2846 | + | |
| 2847 | +%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- | |
| 2848 | +%% V1.8a | |
| 2849 | + | |
| 2850 | +% usage: \@IEEEstripouterbraces*{} | |
| 2851 | +% \@IEEEstripouterbraces fully expands its argument (which it then stores | |
| 2852 | +% in \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg) via \edef, then removes any outer enclosing | |
| 2853 | +% braces, and finally stores the result in the macro | |
| 2854 | +% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces. | |
| 2855 | +% | |
| 2856 | +% For example: | |
| 2857 | +% \@IEEEstripouterbraces{{{{ab}c}}} | |
| 2858 | +% results in: | |
| 2859 | +% | |
| 2860 | +% \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg ==> a macro containing {{{ab}c}} | |
| 2861 | +% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces ==> a macro containing {ab}c | |
| 2862 | +% | |
| 2863 | +% the *-star form,\@IEEEstripouterbraces*, does not expand the argument | |
| 2864 | +% contents during processing | |
| 2865 | +\def\@IEEEstripouterbraces{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\edef\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}} | |
| 2866 | + | |
| 2867 | +\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1{\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg{#1}\relax | |
| 2868 | +% If the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single delimited | |
| 2869 | +% argument, we know we have one sequence of tokens without any enclosing | |
| 2870 | +% braces. Loop until this is true. | |
| 2871 | +\loop | |
| 2872 | + \expandafter\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER | |
| 2873 | +\ifx\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg | |
| 2874 | +\else | |
| 2875 | + \let\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces | |
| 2876 | +\repeat} | |
| 2877 | + | |
| 2878 | +\def\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces{#1}} | |
| 2879 | + | |
| 2880 | + | |
| 2881 | + | |
| 2882 | +% usage: \@IEEEextractgroup*{} | |
| 2883 | +% \@IEEEextractgroup fully expands its argument (which it then stores in | |
| 2884 | +% \@IEEEextractgrouparg) via \edef and then assigns the first "brace group" | |
| 2885 | +% of tokens to the macro \@IEEEextractedgroup. | |
| 2886 | +% The remaining groups, if any, are stored in the macro | |
| 2887 | +% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain. If the argument does not contain the requisite | |
| 2888 | +% groups, the respective macros will be defined to be empty. | |
| 2889 | +% There is an asymmetry in that \@IEEEextractedgroup is stripped of its first | |
| 2890 | +% outer grouping while \@IEEEextractedgroupremain retains even the outer | |
| 2891 | +% grouping (if present) that originally identified it as a group. | |
| 2892 | +% | |
| 2893 | +% For example: | |
| 2894 | +% \@IEEEextractgroup{{{ab}}{c{de}}} | |
| 2895 | +% results in: | |
| 2896 | +% | |
| 2897 | +% \@IEEEextractgrouparg ==> a macro containing {{ab}}{c{de}} | |
| 2898 | +% \@IEEEextractedgroup ==> a macro containing {ab} | |
| 2899 | +% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain ==> a macro containing {c{de}} | |
| 2900 | +% | |
| 2901 | +% The *-star form, \@IEEEextractgroup*, does not expand its argument | |
| 2902 | +% contents during processing. | |
| 2903 | +\def\@IEEEextractgroup{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\def\@@IEEEextractgroup}{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\edef\@@IEEEextractgroup}} | |
| 2904 | + | |
| 2905 | +\def\@@IEEEextractgroup#1{\@IEEEextractgroupdef\@IEEEextractgrouparg{#1}\relax | |
| 2906 | +% trap the case of an empty extracted group as this would cause problems with | |
| 2907 | +% \@IEEEextractgroupremain's argument acquisition | |
| 2908 | +\ifx\@IEEEextractgrouparg\@empty | |
| 2909 | + \def\@IEEEextractedgroup{}\relax | |
| 2910 | + \def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{}\relax | |
| 2911 | +\else | |
| 2912 | + % We have to use some dirty tricks here. We want to insert {} around | |
| 2913 | + % whatever remains after the first group so that TeX's argument scanner | |
| 2914 | + % will preserve any originally enclosing braces as well as provide an | |
| 2915 | + % empty argument to acquire even if there isn't a second group. | |
| 2916 | + % In this first of two dirty tricks, we put a } at the end of the structure | |
| 2917 | + % we are going to extract from. The \ifnum0=`{\fi keeps TeX happy to allow | |
| 2918 | + % what would otherwise be an unbalanced macro definition for | |
| 2919 | + % \@@IEEEextractgroup to be acceptable to it. | |
| 2920 | + \ifnum0=`{\fi\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroupremain\@IEEEextractgrouparg}\relax | |
| 2921 | +\fi} | |
| 2922 | + | |
| 2923 | +% In the second part of the dirty tricks, we insert a leading { right after | |
| 2924 | +% the first group is acquired, but before the remainder is. Again, the | |
| 2925 | +% \ifnum0=`}\fi keeps TeX happy during definition time, but will disappear | |
| 2926 | +% during run time. | |
| 2927 | +\def\@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroup{#1}\expandafter\@@IEEEextractgroupremain\expandafter{\ifnum0=`}\fi} | |
| 2928 | + | |
| 2929 | +\def\@@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{#1}} | |
| 2930 | + | |
| 2931 | + | |
| 2932 | + | |
| 2933 | +% \@IEEEextracttoken relocated at top because margin setting commands rely on it | |
| 2934 | + | |
| 2935 | + | |
| 2936 | + | |
| 2937 | +% usage: \@IEEEextracttokengroups*{} | |
| 2938 | +% \@IEEEextracttokengroups fully expands its argument (which it then stores | |
| 2939 | +% in \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg) and then assigns the first "brace group" of | |
| 2940 | +% tokens (with the outermost braces removed) to the macro | |
| 2941 | +% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup. | |
| 2942 | +% The meaning of the first nonbrace (but including the empty group) token | |
| 2943 | +% within this first group is assigned via \let to \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken | |
| 2944 | +% as well as stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro. If a first | |
| 2945 | +% nonbrace token does not exist (or is an empty group), these will be \relax | |
| 2946 | +% and empty, respectively. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during | |
| 2947 | +% the acquisition of the first token in the first group are stored in | |
| 2948 | +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded, however their original relative brace | |
| 2949 | +% nesting depths are not guaranteed to be preserved. | |
| 2950 | +% The first group within this first group is stored in the macro | |
| 2951 | +% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup. | |
| 2952 | +% Likewise for the next group after the first: \@IEEEextractednextgroup, | |
| 2953 | +% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup, \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttoken, | |
| 2954 | +% \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttokenmacro, and | |
| 2955 | +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded. | |
| 2956 | +% All tokens/groups after the first group, including any enclosing braces, | |
| 2957 | +% are stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain which will | |
| 2958 | +% be empty if none exist. | |
| 2959 | +% | |
| 2960 | +% For example: | |
| 2961 | +% \@IEEEextracttokengroups{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}} | |
| 2962 | +% will result in: | |
| 2963 | +% | |
| 2964 | +% \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g} | |
| 2965 | +% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup ==> a macro containing {ab}{cd} | |
| 2966 | +% \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain ==> a macro containing {{ef}g} | |
| 2967 | +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken ==> the letter a | |
| 2968 | +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing a | |
| 2969 | +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd | |
| 2970 | +% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ab | |
| 2971 | +% \@IEEEextractednextgroup ==> a macro containing {ef}g | |
| 2972 | +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken ==> the letter e | |
| 2973 | +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing e | |
| 2974 | +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing fg | |
| 2975 | +% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ef | |
| 2976 | +% | |
| 2977 | +% If given an empty argument, \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken and | |
| 2978 | +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken will be set to \relax | |
| 2979 | +% and all the macros will be empty. | |
| 2980 | +% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttokengroups*, does not expand its argument | |
| 2981 | +% contents during processing. | |
| 2982 | +% | |
| 2983 | +% Depends on: \@IEEEextractgroup, \@IEEEextracttoken | |
| 2984 | +\def\@IEEEextracttokengroups{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}} | |
| 2985 | +\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups#1{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg{#1}\relax | |
| 2986 | +% begin extraction, these functions are safe with empty arguments | |
| 2987 | +% first group | |
| 2988 | +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg}\relax | |
| 2989 | +\let\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup | |
| 2990 | +\let\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain\@IEEEextractedgroupremain | |
| 2991 | +\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax | |
| 2992 | +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken | |
| 2993 | +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro | |
| 2994 | +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded | |
| 2995 | +% first first group | |
| 2996 | +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax | |
| 2997 | +\let\@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup | |
| 2998 | +% next group | |
| 2999 | +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain}\relax | |
| 3000 | +\let\@IEEEextractednextgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup | |
| 3001 | +\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax | |
| 3002 | +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken | |
| 3003 | +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro | |
| 3004 | +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded | |
| 3005 | +% next first group | |
| 3006 | +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax | |
| 3007 | +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup} | |
| 3008 | + | |
| 3009 | + | |
| 3010 | +%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- | |
| 3011 | + | |
| 3012 | + | |
| 3013 | + | |
| 3014 | + | |
| 3015 | +%% | |
| 3016 | +%% START OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS | |
| 3017 | +%% | |
| 3018 | +%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX | |
| 3019 | +%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, | |
| 3020 | +%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, | |
| 3021 | +%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding. | |
| 3022 | +%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) | |
| 3023 | + | |
| 3024 | + | |
| 3025 | +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form | |
| 3026 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse | |
| 3027 | + | |
| 3028 | +\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter | |
| 3029 | +% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray | |
| 3030 | +% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both | |
| 3031 | +\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue | |
| 3032 | + | |
| 3033 | +\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined | |
| 3034 | +\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used | |
| 3035 | + | |
| 3036 | + | |
| 3037 | +% The default math style used by the columns | |
| 3038 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle} | |
| 3039 | +% The default text style used by the columns | |
| 3040 | +% default to using the current font | |
| 3041 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax} | |
| 3042 | + | |
| 3043 | +% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray | |
| 3044 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax} | |
| 3045 | +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax} | |
| 3046 | + | |
| 3047 | + | |
| 3048 | + | |
| 3049 | +% V1.8 flags to indicate that equation numbering is to persist | |
| 3050 | +\newif\if@IEEEeqnumpersist% | |
| 3051 | +\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse | |
| 3052 | +\newif\if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% | |
| 3053 | +\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse | |
| 3054 | +% | |
| 3055 | +% V1.8 flags to indicate if (sub)equation number of last line was preadvanced | |
| 3056 | +\newif\if@IEEEeqnumpreadv% | |
| 3057 | +\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse | |
| 3058 | +\newif\if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv% | |
| 3059 | +\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse | |
| 3060 | + | |
| 3061 | +\newcount\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback% saves previous value of IEEEsubequation number in case we need to restore it | |
| 3062 | + | |
| 3063 | +% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber | |
| 3064 | +% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package | |
| 3065 | +% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as | |
| 3066 | +% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else. | |
| 3067 | +% This command is intended for use in non-IEEEeqnarray math environments | |
| 3068 | +\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue} | |
| 3069 | + | |
| 3070 | + | |
| 3071 | +% IEEEyes/nonumber | |
| 3072 | +% V1.8 add persistant * forms | |
| 3073 | +% These commands can alter the type of equation an IEEEeqnarray line is. | |
| 3074 | +\def\IEEEyesnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEeqnumpersisttrue\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEyesnumber}{\@IEEEyesnumber}} | |
| 3075 | + | |
| 3076 | +\def\@IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue | |
| 3077 | +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray | |
| 3078 | +\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax | |
| 3079 | + \stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax | |
| 3080 | + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label | |
| 3081 | +\fi | |
| 3082 | +% even if we reached this eqn num via a preadv, it is legit now | |
| 3083 | +\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse | |
| 3084 | +\fi} | |
| 3085 | + | |
| 3086 | +\def\IEEEnonumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\global\@eqnswfalse}{\global\@eqnswfalse}} | |
| 3087 | + | |
| 3088 | + | |
| 3089 | +\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersisttrue\@IEEEyessubnumber}{\@IEEEyessubnumber}} | |
| 3090 | +% | |
| 3091 | +\def\@IEEEyessubnumber{\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray | |
| 3092 | + \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax% if it already is a subequation, we are good to go as-is | |
| 3093 | + \else% if we are a regular equation we have to watch out for two cases | |
| 3094 | + \if@IEEEeqnumpreadv% if this equation is the result of a preadvance, backout and bump the sub eqnnum | |
| 3095 | + \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne\global\c@IEEEsubequation=\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback\addtocounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\relax | |
| 3096 | + \else% non-preadvanced equations just need initialization of their sub eqnnum | |
| 3097 | + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\relax | |
| 3098 | + \fi | |
| 3099 | + \fi% fi already is subequation | |
| 3100 | + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax | |
| 3101 | + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label | |
| 3102 | + \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% no longer a preadv anymore | |
| 3103 | + \global\@eqnswtrue | |
| 3104 | +\fi} | |
| 3105 | + | |
| 3106 | + | |
| 3107 | +\def\IEEEnosubnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEnosubnumber}{\@IEEEnosubnumber}} | |
| 3108 | +% | |
| 3109 | +\def\@IEEEnosubnumber{\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray | |
| 3110 | + \if@eqnsw % we do nothing unless we know we will display because we play with the counters here | |
| 3111 | + % if it currently is a subequation, bump up to the next equation number and turn off the subequation | |
| 3112 | + \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax\addtocounter{equation}{1}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\relax | |
| 3113 | + \fi | |
| 3114 | + \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% no longer a preadv anymore | |
| 3115 | + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax | |
| 3116 | + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label | |
| 3117 | + \fi | |
| 3118 | +\fi} | |
| 3119 | + | |
| 3120 | + | |
| 3121 | + | |
| 3122 | +% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers | |
| 3123 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}} | |
| 3124 | + | |
| 3125 | +% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments | |
| 3126 | +% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the | |
| 3127 | +% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox | |
| 3128 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text} | |
| 3129 | +\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}\relax | |
| 3130 | +% check if column is defined for the precolumn definition | |
| 3131 | +% We have to be careful here because TeX scans for & even within an \iffalse | |
| 3132 | +% where it does not expand macros. So, if we used only one \ifx and a #3 | |
| 3133 | +% appeared in the false branch and the user inserted another alignment | |
| 3134 | +% structure that uses & in the \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{}, TeX will not see that | |
| 3135 | +% there is an inner alignment in the false branch yet still will see any & | |
| 3136 | +% there and will think that they apply to the outer alignment resulting in an | |
| 3137 | +% incomplete \ifx error. | |
| 3138 | +% So, here we use separate checks for the pre and post parts in order to keep | |
| 3139 | +% the #3 outside of all conditionals. | |
| 3140 | +\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined\relax | |
| 3141 | +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname | |
| 3142 | +\else% if not, error and use default type | |
| 3143 | +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak | |
| 3144 | +Using a default centering column instead}% | |
| 3145 | +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% | |
| 3146 | +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname | |
| 3147 | +\fi | |
| 3148 | +% The ten \relax are to help prevent misleading error messages in case a user | |
| 3149 | +% accidently inserted a macro that tries to acquire additional arguments. | |
| 3150 | +#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax | |
| 3151 | +% check if column is defined for the postcolumn definition | |
| 3152 | +\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined\relax | |
| 3153 | +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname | |
| 3154 | +\else% if not, use the default type | |
| 3155 | +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname | |
| 3156 | +\fi | |
| 3157 | +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it | |
| 3158 | +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi} | |
| 3159 | + | |
| 3160 | +% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray | |
| 3161 | +\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi} | |
| 3162 | + | |
| 3163 | + | |
| 3164 | +% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type | |
| 3165 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text} | |
| 3166 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}% | |
| 3167 | +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}% | |
| 3168 | +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}} | |
| 3169 | + | |
| 3170 | + | |
| 3171 | +% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types | |
| 3172 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition} | |
| 3173 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}% | |
| 3174 | +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}} | |
| 3175 | + | |
| 3176 | + | |
| 3177 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types | |
| 3178 | + | |
| 3179 | + | |
| 3180 | +% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list | |
| 3181 | +% used to build up the \halign preamble | |
| 3182 | +\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}% | |
| 3183 | +\@@IEEEappendtoksA} | |
| 3184 | + | |
| 3185 | +% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument | |
| 3186 | +% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register | |
| 3187 | +\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}% | |
| 3188 | +\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}% | |
| 3189 | +\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA} | |
| 3190 | + | |
| 3191 | +% define some common column types for the user | |
| 3192 | +% math | |
| 3193 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} | |
| 3194 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} | |
| 3195 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$} | |
| 3196 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} | |
| 3197 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} | |
| 3198 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$} | |
| 3199 | +% text | |
| 3200 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} | |
| 3201 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} | |
| 3202 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{} | |
| 3203 | + | |
| 3204 | +% vertical rules | |
| 3205 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} | |
| 3206 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} | |
| 3207 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} | |
| 3208 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}% | |
| 3209 | +{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} | |
| 3210 | + | |
| 3211 | +% horizontal rules | |
| 3212 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil} | |
| 3213 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil} | |
| 3214 | + | |
| 3215 | +% plain | |
| 3216 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{} | |
| 3217 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$} | |
| 3218 | + | |
| 3219 | +% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined | |
| 3220 | +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} | |
| 3221 | + | |
| 3222 | + | |
| 3223 | +% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types) | |
| 3224 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} | |
| 3225 | +% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types) | |
| 3226 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt} | |
| 3227 | + | |
| 3228 | +% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column | |
| 3229 | +% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox | |
| 3230 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue | |
| 3231 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue | |
| 3232 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue | |
| 3233 | + | |
| 3234 | + | |
| 3235 | + | |
| 3236 | +% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell | |
| 3237 | +% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way. | |
| 3238 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness] | |
| 3239 | +% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. | |
| 3240 | +\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax} | |
| 3241 | + | |
| 3242 | +% creates a blank separator row | |
| 3243 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands] | |
| 3244 | +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] | |
| 3245 | +% blank arguments inherit the default values | |
| 3246 | +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers | |
| 3247 | +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} | |
| 3248 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}} | |
| 3249 | +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% | |
| 3250 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% | |
| 3251 | +% get the skip value, based on the font commands | |
| 3252 | +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 | |
| 3253 | +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes | |
| 3254 | +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% | |
| 3255 | +\else% | |
| 3256 | +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% | |
| 3257 | +\fi% | |
| 3258 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} | |
| 3259 | + | |
| 3260 | +% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates | |
| 3261 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands] | |
| 3262 | +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] | |
| 3263 | +% blank arguments inherit the default values | |
| 3264 | +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers | |
| 3265 | +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols | |
| 3266 | +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it | |
| 3267 | +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% | |
| 3268 | +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} | |
| 3269 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}} | |
| 3270 | +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% | |
| 3271 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% | |
| 3272 | +% get the skip value, based on the font commands | |
| 3273 | +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 | |
| 3274 | +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes | |
| 3275 | +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% | |
| 3276 | +\else% | |
| 3277 | +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% | |
| 3278 | +\fi% | |
| 3279 | +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} | |
| 3280 | + | |
| 3281 | + | |
| 3282 | + | |
| 3283 | +% draws a single rule across all the columns optional | |
| 3284 | +% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default | |
| 3285 | +% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts | |
| 3286 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness] | |
| 3287 | +\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols | |
| 3288 | +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it | |
| 3289 | +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% | |
| 3290 | +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} | |
| 3291 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule | |
| 3292 | +% turn off any struts | |
| 3293 | +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} | |
| 3294 | + | |
| 3295 | + | |
| 3296 | +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then | |
| 3297 | +% another single rule row | |
| 3298 | +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default | |
| 3299 | +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default | |
| 3300 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] | |
| 3301 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols | |
| 3302 | +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it | |
| 3303 | +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% | |
| 3304 | +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} | |
| 3305 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}% | |
| 3306 | +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}} | |
| 3307 | +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% | |
| 3308 | +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] | |
| 3309 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% | |
| 3310 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% | |
| 3311 | +\else% | |
| 3312 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax% | |
| 3313 | +\fi% | |
| 3314 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% | |
| 3315 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% | |
| 3316 | +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]% | |
| 3317 | +\else% | |
| 3318 | +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]% | |
| 3319 | +\fi% | |
| 3320 | +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% | |
| 3321 | +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it | |
| 3322 | +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% | |
| 3323 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% | |
| 3324 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% | |
| 3325 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% | |
| 3326 | +\else% | |
| 3327 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% | |
| 3328 | +\fi% | |
| 3329 | +} | |
| 3330 | + | |
| 3331 | +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then | |
| 3332 | +% another single rule row | |
| 3333 | +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default | |
| 3334 | +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default | |
| 3335 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] | |
| 3336 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols | |
| 3337 | +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it | |
| 3338 | +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% | |
| 3339 | +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}} | |
| 3340 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}% | |
| 3341 | +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}} | |
| 3342 | +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% | |
| 3343 | +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] | |
| 3344 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% | |
| 3345 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% | |
| 3346 | +\else% | |
| 3347 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% | |
| 3348 | +\fi% | |
| 3349 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% | |
| 3350 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% | |
| 3351 | +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]% | |
| 3352 | +\else% | |
| 3353 | +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]% | |
| 3354 | +\fi% | |
| 3355 | +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% | |
| 3356 | +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it | |
| 3357 | +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% | |
| 3358 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% | |
| 3359 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% | |
| 3360 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% | |
| 3361 | +\else% | |
| 3362 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% | |
| 3363 | +\fi% | |
| 3364 | +} | |
| 3365 | + | |
| 3366 | + | |
| 3367 | + | |
| 3368 | +% inserts a full row's worth of &'s | |
| 3369 | +% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns | |
| 3370 | +% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers | |
| 3371 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax% | |
| 3372 | +\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all | |
| 3373 | +\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax% | |
| 3374 | +\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% | |
| 3375 | +\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count | |
| 3376 | +\repeat% | |
| 3377 | +\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s | |
| 3378 | +} | |
| 3379 | + | |
| 3380 | + | |
| 3381 | + | |
| 3382 | +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines | |
| 3383 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl | |
| 3384 | + | |
| 3385 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts | |
| 3386 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt} | |
| 3387 | + | |
| 3388 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of | |
| 3389 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray | |
| 3390 | + | |
| 3391 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height | |
| 3392 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth | |
| 3393 | + | |
| 3394 | +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value | |
| 3395 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used | |
| 3396 | + | |
| 3397 | + | |
| 3398 | + | |
| 3399 | +% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut | |
| 3400 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax% | |
| 3401 | +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% | |
| 3402 | +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% | |
| 3403 | +% remove stretchability | |
| 3404 | +\dimen0\skip0\relax% | |
| 3405 | +\dimen2\skip2\relax% | |
| 3406 | +% save values | |
| 3407 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}% | |
| 3408 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}} | |
| 3409 | + | |
| 3410 | +% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut | |
| 3411 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax% | |
| 3412 | +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax% | |
| 3413 | +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax% | |
| 3414 | +% remove stretchability | |
| 3415 | +\dimen0\skip0\relax% | |
| 3416 | +\dimen2\skip2\relax% | |
| 3417 | +% restore values | |
| 3418 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% | |
| 3419 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}} | |
| 3420 | + | |
| 3421 | + | |
| 3422 | +% globally restores the strut height and depth to the | |
| 3423 | +% master values and sets the master strut flag to true | |
| 3424 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax% | |
| 3425 | +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% | |
| 3426 | +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% | |
| 3427 | +% remove stretchability | |
| 3428 | +\dimen0\skip0\relax% | |
| 3429 | +\dimen2\skip2\relax% | |
| 3430 | +% restore values | |
| 3431 | +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% | |
| 3432 | +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% | |
| 3433 | +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue} | |
| 3434 | + | |
| 3435 | + | |
| 3436 | +% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current | |
| 3437 | +% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth | |
| 3438 | +% and the use master strut flag, global | |
| 3439 | +% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried | |
| 3440 | +% into the isolation/strut column | |
| 3441 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax% | |
| 3442 | +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else% | |
| 3443 | +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}% | |
| 3444 | +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}% | |
| 3445 | +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% | |
| 3446 | +\fi} | |
| 3447 | + | |
| 3448 | + | |
| 3449 | + | |
| 3450 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands] | |
| 3451 | +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height | |
| 3452 | +% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside | |
| 3453 | +% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut | |
| 3454 | +% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut | |
| 3455 | +% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip | |
| 3456 | +% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively. | |
| 3457 | +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under | |
| 3458 | +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current | |
| 3459 | +% font is used. | |
| 3460 | +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 | |
| 3461 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} | |
| 3462 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}% | |
| 3463 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% | |
| 3464 | +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}% | |
| 3465 | +\skip0=\skip3\relax% | |
| 3466 | +\else% arg one present | |
| 3467 | +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}% | |
| 3468 | +\skip0=\skip3\relax% | |
| 3469 | +\fi% if null arg | |
| 3470 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}% | |
| 3471 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% | |
| 3472 | +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}% | |
| 3473 | +\skip2=\skip3\relax% | |
| 3474 | +\else% arg two present | |
| 3475 | +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}% | |
| 3476 | +\skip2=\skip3\relax% | |
| 3477 | +\fi% if null arg | |
| 3478 | +% remove stretchability, just to be safe | |
| 3479 | +\dimen0\skip0\relax% | |
| 3480 | +\dimen2\skip2\relax% | |
| 3481 | +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth | |
| 3482 | +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size | |
| 3483 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% | |
| 3484 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% | |
| 3485 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master | |
| 3486 | +\else% outer, have to set master strut too | |
| 3487 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% | |
| 3488 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% | |
| 3489 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% | |
| 3490 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% | |
| 3491 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut | |
| 3492 | +\fi} | |
| 3493 | + | |
| 3494 | + | |
| 3495 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands] | |
| 3496 | +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height | |
| 3497 | +% and depth to both the master and local struts. | |
| 3498 | +% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth | |
| 3499 | +% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use | |
| 3500 | +% of the local strut values. | |
| 3501 | +% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead. | |
| 3502 | +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under | |
| 3503 | +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current | |
| 3504 | +% font is used. | |
| 3505 | +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 | |
| 3506 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} | |
| 3507 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}% | |
| 3508 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% | |
| 3509 | +\skip0=0pt\relax% | |
| 3510 | +\else% arg one present | |
| 3511 | +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}% | |
| 3512 | +\skip0=\skip3\relax% | |
| 3513 | +\fi% if null arg | |
| 3514 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}% | |
| 3515 | +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% | |
| 3516 | +\skip2=0pt\relax% | |
| 3517 | +\else% arg two present | |
| 3518 | +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}% | |
| 3519 | +\skip2=\skip3\relax% | |
| 3520 | +\fi% if null arg | |
| 3521 | +% remove stretchability, just to be safe | |
| 3522 | +\dimen0\skip0\relax% | |
| 3523 | +\dimen2\skip2\relax% | |
| 3524 | +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth | |
| 3525 | +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size | |
| 3526 | +% get local strut size | |
| 3527 | +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% | |
| 3528 | +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% | |
| 3529 | +% add it to the user supplied values | |
| 3530 | +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% | |
| 3531 | +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% | |
| 3532 | +% update the local strut size | |
| 3533 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% | |
| 3534 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% | |
| 3535 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master | |
| 3536 | +\else% outer, have to set master strut too | |
| 3537 | +% get master strut size | |
| 3538 | +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% | |
| 3539 | +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% | |
| 3540 | +% add it to the user supplied values | |
| 3541 | +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% | |
| 3542 | +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% | |
| 3543 | +% update the local and master strut sizes | |
| 3544 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% | |
| 3545 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% | |
| 3546 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% | |
| 3547 | +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% | |
| 3548 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut | |
| 3549 | +\fi} | |
| 3550 | + | |
| 3551 | + | |
| 3552 | +% allow user a way to see the struts | |
| 3553 | +\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts | |
| 3554 | +\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse | |
| 3555 | + | |
| 3556 | +% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values | |
| 3557 | +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2 | |
| 3558 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax% | |
| 3559 | +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut | |
| 3560 | +% get master strut size | |
| 3561 | +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% | |
| 3562 | +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% | |
| 3563 | +\else% | |
| 3564 | +% get local strut size | |
| 3565 | +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% | |
| 3566 | +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% | |
| 3567 | +\fi% | |
| 3568 | +% remove stretchability, probably not needed | |
| 3569 | +\dimen0\skip0\relax% | |
| 3570 | +\dimen2\skip2\relax% | |
| 3571 | +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth | |
| 3572 | +% allow user to see struts if desired | |
| 3573 | +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% | |
| 3574 | +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% | |
| 3575 | +\else% | |
| 3576 | +\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi} | |
| 3577 | + | |
| 3578 | + | |
| 3579 | +% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray | |
| 3580 | +% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. | |
| 3581 | +% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands] | |
| 3582 | +% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax] | |
| 3583 | +% blank arguments inherit the default values | |
| 3584 | +% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2 | |
| 3585 | +\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}} | |
| 3586 | +\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}} | |
| 3587 | +\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}} | |
| 3588 | +\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax% | |
| 3589 | +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}% | |
| 3590 | +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% | |
| 3591 | +\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax% | |
| 3592 | +\else% | |
| 3593 | +\skip0=#1\relax% | |
| 3594 | +\fi% | |
| 3595 | +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}% | |
| 3596 | +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% | |
| 3597 | +\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax% | |
| 3598 | +\else% | |
| 3599 | +\skip2=#2\relax% | |
| 3600 | +\fi% | |
| 3601 | +% remove stretchability, probably not needed | |
| 3602 | +\dimen0\skip0\relax% | |
| 3603 | +\dimen2\skip2\relax% | |
| 3604 | +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% | |
| 3605 | +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% | |
| 3606 | +\else% | |
| 3607 | +\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}} | |
| 3608 | + | |
| 3609 | + | |
| 3610 | +% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the | |
| 3611 | +% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot | |
| 3612 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]% | |
| 3613 | +\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt} | |
| 3614 | + | |
| 3615 | + | |
| 3616 | +% equation and subequation forms to use to setup hyperref's \@currentHref | |
| 3617 | +\def\@IEEEtheHrefequation{equation.\theHequation} | |
| 3618 | +\def\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation{equation.\theHequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} | |
| 3619 | + | |
| 3620 | + | |
| 3621 | +\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnumpersisttrue\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} | |
| 3622 | +\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray} | |
| 3623 | + | |
| 3624 | +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} | |
| 3625 | +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray} | |
| 3626 | + | |
| 3627 | + | |
| 3628 | +% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. | |
| 3629 | +% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row. | |
| 3630 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols} | |
| 3631 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}} | |
| 3632 | +% We have to be careful here to normalize catcodes just before acquiring the | |
| 3633 | +% cols as that specification may contain punctuation which could be subject | |
| 3634 | +% to document catcode changes. | |
| 3635 | +\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]{\begingroup\IEEEnormalcatcodes\@@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]} | |
| 3636 | +\def\@@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{\endgroup | |
| 3637 | + % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not | |
| 3638 | + % the star form was involked | |
| 3639 | + \if@IEEEeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue | |
| 3640 | + \else% not the star form | |
| 3641 | + \global\@eqnswfalse | |
| 3642 | + \fi% if star form | |
| 3643 | + % provide a basic hyperref \theHequation if this has not already been setup (hyperref not loaded, or no section counter) | |
| 3644 | + \@ifundefined{theHequation}{\def\theHequation{\arabic{equation}}}{}\relax | |
| 3645 | + % provide dummy hyperref commands in case hyperref is not loaded | |
| 3646 | + \providecommand{\Hy@raisedlink}[1]{}\relax | |
| 3647 | + \providecommand{\hyper@anchorstart}[1]{}\relax | |
| 3648 | + \providecommand{\hyper@anchorend}{}\relax | |
| 3649 | + \providecommand{\@currentHref}{}\relax | |
| 3650 | + \@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse% reset eqnpreadv flag | |
| 3651 | + \@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% reset subeqnpreadv flag | |
| 3652 | + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign | |
| 3653 | + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default | |
| 3654 | + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise | |
| 3655 | + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off | |
| 3656 | + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it | |
| 3657 | + \lineskip=0pt\relax | |
| 3658 | + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax | |
| 3659 | + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% | |
| 3660 | + \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% | |
| 3661 | + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math | |
| 3662 | + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, | |
| 3663 | + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build | |
| 3664 | + %V1.8 Here we preadvance to the next equation number. | |
| 3665 | + % If the user later wants a continued subequation, we can roll back. | |
| 3666 | + \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation% | |
| 3667 | + \stepcounter{equation}\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue% advance equation counter before first line | |
| 3668 | + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet | |
| 3669 | + \let\@IEEEcurrentlabelsave\@currentlabel% save current label as we later change it globally | |
| 3670 | + \let\@IEEEcurrentHrefsave\@currentHref% save current href label as we later change it globally | |
| 3671 | + \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label | |
| 3672 | + \def\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label | |
| 3673 | + \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides | |
| 3674 | + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults | |
| 3675 | + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers | |
| 3676 | + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line | |
| 3677 | + \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#2}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA | |
| 3678 | + % put in the column for the equation number | |
| 3679 | + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first | |
| 3680 | + \toks0={##}% | |
| 3681 | + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking | |
| 3682 | + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% | |
| 3683 | + % add the isolation column | |
| 3684 | + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% | |
| 3685 | + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking | |
| 3686 | + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% | |
| 3687 | + % add the equation number col to the preamble | |
| 3688 | + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}% | |
| 3689 | + % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col | |
| 3690 | + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build | |
| 3691 | + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax | |
| 3692 | + % begin the display alignment | |
| 3693 | + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines | |
| 3694 | + $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup | |
| 3695 | + % "exspand" the preamble | |
| 3696 | + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} | |
| 3697 | + | |
| 3698 | +% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use | |
| 3699 | +% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed, | |
| 3700 | +% restore counters (to backout any equation setup for a next line that was never used) | |
| 3701 | +% to their correct values and exit | |
| 3702 | +\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup | |
| 3703 | +\if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi | |
| 3704 | +\if@IEEEeqnumpreadv\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne\global\c@IEEEsubequation=\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback\fi | |
| 3705 | +\global\let\@currentlabel\@IEEEcurrentlabelsave% restore current label | |
| 3706 | +\global\let\@currentHref\@IEEEcurrentHrefsave% restore current href label | |
| 3707 | +$$\@ignoretrue} | |
| 3708 | + | |
| 3709 | + | |
| 3710 | +% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to | |
| 3711 | +% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount] | |
| 3712 | +% These "cr" macros are modified versions of those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray | |
| 3713 | +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid | |
| 3714 | +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column | |
| 3715 | +% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns | |
| 3716 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column | |
| 3717 | + {\ifnum0=`}\fi | |
| 3718 | + \@ifstar{% | |
| 3719 | + \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR | |
| 3720 | + }{% | |
| 3721 | + \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR | |
| 3722 | + }% | |
| 3723 | +} | |
| 3724 | + | |
| 3725 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip} | |
| 3726 | + | |
| 3727 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{% | |
| 3728 | + \ifnum0=`{\fi}% | |
| 3729 | + \@@IEEEeqnarraycr | |
| 3730 | + \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}% | |
| 3731 | + | |
| 3732 | +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register | |
| 3733 | + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column | |
| 3734 | + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax | |
| 3735 | + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak | |
| 3736 | + environment}% | |
| 3737 | + {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarray column\MessageBreak | |
| 3738 | + specifications.}\relax% | |
| 3739 | + \else | |
| 3740 | + \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all | |
| 3741 | + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax | |
| 3742 | + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% | |
| 3743 | + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count | |
| 3744 | + \repeat | |
| 3745 | + % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column | |
| 3746 | + \fi | |
| 3747 | + % execute the &'s | |
| 3748 | + \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA% | |
| 3749 | + % handle the strut/isolation column | |
| 3750 | + \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed | |
| 3751 | + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray | |
| 3752 | + &% and enter the equation number column | |
| 3753 | + \if@eqnsw% only if we display something | |
| 3754 | + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}}% start a hyperref anchor | |
| 3755 | + \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\relax% displaying an equation number means | |
| 3756 | + \global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse\relax% the equation counters point to valid equations | |
| 3757 | + % V1.8 Here we setup the counters, currentlabel and status for what would be the *next* | |
| 3758 | + % equation line as would be the case under the current settings. However, there are two problems. | |
| 3759 | + % One problem is that there might not ever be a next line. The second problem is that the user | |
| 3760 | + % may later alter the meaning of a line with commands such as \IEEEyessubnumber. So, to handle | |
| 3761 | + % these cases we have to record the current values of the (sub)equation counters and revert back | |
| 3762 | + % to them if the next line is changed or never comes. The \if@IEEEeqnumpreadv, \if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv | |
| 3763 | + % and \@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback stuff tracks this. | |
| 3764 | + % The logic to handle all this is surprisingly complex, but a nice feature of the approach here is | |
| 3765 | + % that the equation counters and labels remain valid for what the line would be unless a | |
| 3766 | + % \IEEEyessubnumber et al. later changes it. So, any hyperref links are always correct. | |
| 3767 | + \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax% handle subequation | |
| 3768 | + \theIEEEsubequationdis\relax | |
| 3769 | + \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% setup for default type of next line | |
| 3770 | + \stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvtrue\relax | |
| 3771 | + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax | |
| 3772 | + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label | |
| 3773 | + \else | |
| 3774 | + % if no subeqnum persist, go ahead and setup for a new equation number | |
| 3775 | + \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation | |
| 3776 | + \stepcounter{equation}\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue\relax | |
| 3777 | + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax | |
| 3778 | + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label | |
| 3779 | + \fi | |
| 3780 | + \else% display a standard equation number | |
| 3781 | + \theequationdis\relax | |
| 3782 | + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\relax% not really needed | |
| 3783 | + \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% setup for default type of next line | |
| 3784 | + % subequations that follow plain equations carry the same equation number e.g, 5, 5a rather than 5, 6a | |
| 3785 | + \stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvtrue\relax | |
| 3786 | + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax | |
| 3787 | + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label | |
| 3788 | + \else | |
| 3789 | + % if no subeqnum persist, go ahead and setup for a new equation number | |
| 3790 | + \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation | |
| 3791 | + \stepcounter{equation}\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue\relax | |
| 3792 | + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax | |
| 3793 | + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label | |
| 3794 | + \fi | |
| 3795 | + \fi% | |
| 3796 | + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorend}% end hyperref anchor | |
| 3797 | + \fi% fi only if we display something | |
| 3798 | + % reset the flags to indicate the default preferences of the display of equation numbers | |
| 3799 | + \if@IEEEeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue\else\global\@eqnswfalse\fi | |
| 3800 | + \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue\fi% ditto for the subequation flag | |
| 3801 | + % reset the number of columns the user actually used | |
| 3802 | + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax | |
| 3803 | + % the real end of the line | |
| 3804 | + \cr} | |
| 3805 | + | |
| 3806 | + | |
| 3807 | + | |
| 3808 | + | |
| 3809 | + | |
| 3810 | +% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything | |
| 3811 | +% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second | |
| 3812 | +% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray, | |
| 3813 | +% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested. | |
| 3814 | +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox | |
| 3815 | +% within an hbox. | |
| 3816 | +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within | |
| 3817 | +% a \hbox{$ $} construct. | |
| 3818 | +% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or | |
| 3819 | +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode. | |
| 3820 | +% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to - | |
| 3821 | +% natural width is the default. | |
| 3822 | +% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing | |
| 3823 | +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols} | |
| 3824 | +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3825 | +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3826 | +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3827 | +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3828 | + | |
| 3829 | +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3830 | +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3831 | +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3832 | +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3833 | + | |
| 3834 | +\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% | |
| 3835 | +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3836 | +\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3837 | + | |
| 3838 | +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% | |
| 3839 | +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3840 | +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} | |
| 3841 | + | |
| 3842 | +% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} | |
| 3843 | +% for \vcenter in non-math mode | |
| 3844 | +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW% | |
| 3845 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse | |
| 3846 | + | |
| 3847 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}} | |
| 3848 | +% We have to be careful here to normalize catcodes just before acquiring the | |
| 3849 | +% cols as that specification may contain punctuation which could be subject | |
| 3850 | +% to document catcode changes. | |
| 3851 | +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\begingroup\IEEEnormalcatcodes\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}} | |
| 3852 | +\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}} | |
| 3853 | + | |
| 3854 | +% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs | |
| 3855 | +\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\endgroup\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign | |
| 3856 | + \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values | |
| 3857 | + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default | |
| 3858 | + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise | |
| 3859 | + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off | |
| 3860 | + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it | |
| 3861 | + \lineskip=0pt\relax% | |
| 3862 | + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% | |
| 3863 | + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% | |
| 3864 | + \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% | |
| 3865 | + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math | |
| 3866 | + % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox | |
| 3867 | + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue | |
| 3868 | + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue | |
| 3869 | + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue | |
| 3870 | + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, | |
| 3871 | + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build | |
| 3872 | + \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides | |
| 3873 | + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults | |
| 3874 | + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing | |
| 3875 | + \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#4}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA | |
| 3876 | + % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col | |
| 3877 | + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first | |
| 3878 | + \toks0={##}% | |
| 3879 | + % add the isolation column to the preamble | |
| 3880 | + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% | |
| 3881 | + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build | |
| 3882 | + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax | |
| 3883 | + % begin the alignment | |
| 3884 | + \everycr{}% | |
| 3885 | + % use only the very first token to determine the positioning | |
| 3886 | + \@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax | |
| 3887 | + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else | |
| 3888 | + \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarraybox position specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax | |
| 3889 | + \fi | |
| 3890 | + % \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are ignored | |
| 3891 | + % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now | |
| 3892 | + \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% | |
| 3893 | + % use the appropriate vbox type | |
| 3894 | + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax% | |
| 3895 | + \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% | |
| 3896 | + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines | |
| 3897 | + \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% | |
| 3898 | + \bgroup | |
| 3899 | + % "exspand" the preamble | |
| 3900 | + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} | |
| 3901 | + | |
| 3902 | +% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, | |
| 3903 | +% exit from math mode if needed, and exit | |
| 3904 | +\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status | |
| 3905 | +&% enter isolation/strut column | |
| 3906 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed | |
| 3907 | +\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values | |
| 3908 | +% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray | |
| 3909 | +% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values) | |
| 3910 | +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% | |
| 3911 | +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox | |
| 3912 | +\crcr\egroup\egroup% | |
| 3913 | +% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed | |
| 3914 | +\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi} | |
| 3915 | + | |
| 3916 | + | |
| 3917 | + | |
| 3918 | +% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to | |
| 3919 | +% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount] | |
| 3920 | +% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray | |
| 3921 | +% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\ | |
| 3922 | +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid | |
| 3923 | +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column | |
| 3924 | +% carry strut status into isolation/strut column | |
| 3925 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status | |
| 3926 | +&% enter isolation/strut column | |
| 3927 | +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed | |
| 3928 | +% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray | |
| 3929 | +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% | |
| 3930 | +{\ifnum0=`}\fi% | |
| 3931 | +\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}} | |
| 3932 | + | |
| 3933 | +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] | |
| 3934 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip} | |
| 3935 | + | |
| 3936 | +% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot | |
| 3937 | +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}% | |
| 3938 | +\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}} | |
| 3939 | + | |
| 3940 | + | |
| 3941 | + | |
| 3942 | +% usage: \@IEEEbuildpreamble{column specifiers} | |
| 3943 | +% starts the halign preamble build | |
| 3944 | +% the assembled preamble is put in \@IEEEtrantmptoksA | |
| 3945 | +\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble#1{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register | |
| 3946 | +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known | |
| 3947 | +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start | |
| 3948 | +\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known | |
| 3949 | +% ensure these are valid | |
| 3950 | +\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}% | |
| 3951 | +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition | |
| 3952 | +% currently acquired numerically referenced glue | |
| 3953 | +% use a name that is easier to remember | |
| 3954 | +\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% | |
| 3955 | +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0% | |
| 3956 | +% tracks number of columns in the preamble | |
| 3957 | +\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0% | |
| 3958 | +% record the default end glues | |
| 3959 | +\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% | |
| 3960 | +\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% | |
| 3961 | +\edef\@IEEEedefMACRO{#1}\relax% fully expand the preamble to support macro containers | |
| 3962 | +% now parse the user's column specifications | |
| 3963 | +% \ignorespaces is used as a delimiter, need at least one trailing \relax because | |
| 3964 | +% \@@IEEEbuildpreamble looks into the future | |
| 3965 | +\expandafter\@@IEEEbuildpreamble\@IEEEedefMACRO\ignorespaces\relax\relax} | |
| 3966 | + | |
| 3967 | + | |
| 3968 | +% usage: \@@IEEEbuildpreamble{current column}{next column} | |
| 3969 | +% parses and builds the halign preamble | |
| 3970 | +\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% | |
| 3971 | +% use only the very first token to check the end | |
| 3972 | +\@IEEEextracttokengroups{#1}\relax | |
| 3973 | +\ifx\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\ignorespaces\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% | |
| 3974 | +% identify current and next token type | |
| 3975 | +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid | |
| 3976 | +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next | |
| 3977 | +% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def | |
| 3978 | +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi% | |
| 3979 | +% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name | |
| 3980 | +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi% | |
| 3981 | +% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue | |
| 3982 | +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi% | |
| 3983 | +% process the acquired glue | |
| 3984 | +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi% | |
| 3985 | +% process the acquired col | |
| 3986 | +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi% | |
| 3987 | +% ready prevtype for next col spec. | |
| 3988 | +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype% | |
| 3989 | +% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group | |
| 3990 | +\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} | |
| 3991 | + | |
| 3992 | + | |
| 3993 | +% usage: \@@IEEEfinishpreamble{discarded} | |
| 3994 | +% executed just after preamble build is completed | |
| 3995 | +% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue | |
| 3996 | +% argument is not used | |
| 3997 | +\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax | |
| 3998 | +\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% | |
| 3999 | +{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% | |
| 4000 | +\fi%num cols less than 1 | |
| 4001 | +%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue | |
| 4002 | +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} | |
| 4003 | + | |
| 4004 | + | |
| 4005 | +% usage: \@IEEEgetcoltype{col specifier}{\output}{error more} | |
| 4006 | +% Identify and return the column specifier's type code in the given | |
| 4007 | +% \output macro: | |
| 4008 | +% n = number | |
| 4009 | +% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) | |
| 4010 | +% c = letter | |
| 4011 | +% e = \ignorespaces (end of sequence) | |
| 4012 | +% u = undefined | |
| 4013 | +% error mode: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char | |
| 4014 | +\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% | |
| 4015 | +% use only the very first token to determine the type | |
| 4016 | +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax | |
| 4017 | +% \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are discarded | |
| 4018 | +\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise | |
| 4019 | +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtoken\ignorespaces\let#2=e\else | |
| 4020 | +\ifcat\@IEEEextractedtoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences | |
| 4021 | +\if0\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else | |
| 4022 | +\if1\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else | |
| 4023 | +\if2\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else | |
| 4024 | +\if3\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else | |
| 4025 | +\if4\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else | |
| 4026 | +\if5\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else | |
| 4027 | +\if6\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else | |
| 4028 | +\if7\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else | |
| 4029 | +\if8\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else | |
| 4030 | +\if9\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else | |
| 4031 | +\ifcat,\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=g\relax | |
| 4032 | +\else\ifcat a\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | |
| 4033 | +\if#2u\relax | |
| 4034 | +\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% | |
| 4035 | +{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak | |
| 4036 | +as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} | |
| 4037 | + | |
| 4038 | + | |
| 4039 | +% usage: \@IEEEgetcurcol{col specifier} | |
| 4040 | +% verify the letter referenced column exists | |
| 4041 | +% and return its name in \@IEEEBPcurcolname | |
| 4042 | +% if column specifier is invalid, use the default column @IEEEdefault | |
| 4043 | +\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% | |
| 4044 | +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name | |
| 4045 | +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak | |
| 4046 | +Using a default centering column instead}% | |
| 4047 | +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% | |
| 4048 | +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} | |
| 4049 | + | |
| 4050 | + | |
| 4051 | +% usage: \@IEEEgetcurglue{glue specifier}{\output} | |
| 4052 | +% identify the predefined (punctuation) glue value | |
| 4053 | +% and return it in the given output macro | |
| 4054 | +\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% | |
| 4055 | +% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) | |
| 4056 | +% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) | |
| 4057 | +% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em) | |
| 4058 | +% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em) | |
| 4059 | +% ' = \quad 1em | |
| 4060 | +% " = \qquad 2em | |
| 4061 | +% . = 0.5\arraycolsep | |
| 4062 | +% / = \arraycolsep | |
| 4063 | +% ? = 2\arraycolsep | |
| 4064 | +% * = 1fil | |
| 4065 | +% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter | |
| 4066 | +% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero | |
| 4067 | +% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6 | |
| 4068 | +% value for 1em. | |
| 4069 | +% | |
| 4070 | +% use only the very first token to determine the type | |
| 4071 | +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax | |
| 4072 | +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else | |
| 4073 | + \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarray predefined inter-column glue type specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax | |
| 4074 | +\fi | |
| 4075 | +% get the math font 1em value | |
| 4076 | +% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs | |
| 4077 | +% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. | |
| 4078 | +% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure | |
| 4079 | +% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done, | |
| 4080 | +% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work. | |
| 4081 | +% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic. | |
| 4082 | +{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}% | |
| 4083 | +% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad). | |
| 4084 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% | |
| 4085 | +% identify the glue value based on the first token | |
| 4086 | +% we discard anything after the first | |
| 4087 | +\if!\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else | |
| 4088 | +\if,\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else | |
| 4089 | +\if:\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else | |
| 4090 | +\if;\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else | |
| 4091 | +\if'\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else | |
| 4092 | +\if"\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else | |
| 4093 | +\if.\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else | |
| 4094 | +\if/\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else | |
| 4095 | +\if?\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else | |
| 4096 | +\if *\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else | |
| 4097 | +\if+\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else | |
| 4098 | +\if-\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else | |
| 4099 | +\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% | |
| 4100 | +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak | |
| 4101 | +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak | |
| 4102 | +0pt instead}% | |
| 4103 | +{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak | |
| 4104 | +IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} | |
| 4105 | + | |
| 4106 | + | |
| 4107 | +% usage: \@IEEEprocessNcol{digit} | |
| 4108 | +% process a numerical digit from the column specification | |
| 4109 | +% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value | |
| 4110 | +% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired | |
| 4111 | +\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g% | |
| 4112 | +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak | |
| 4113 | +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak | |
| 4114 | +after the first}% | |
| 4115 | +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak | |
| 4116 | +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% | |
| 4117 | +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded | |
| 4118 | +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax% | |
| 4119 | +\else% if we previously aborted a glue | |
| 4120 | +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion | |
| 4121 | +\else%acquire this number | |
| 4122 | +% save the previous type before the numerical digits started | |
| 4123 | +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi% | |
| 4124 | +\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax% | |
| 4125 | +\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan | |
| 4126 | +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition | |
| 4127 | +\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% | |
| 4128 | +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}% | |
| 4129 | +\else%user glue not defined | |
| 4130 | +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak | |
| 4131 | +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak | |
| 4132 | +0pt instead}% | |
| 4133 | +{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak | |
| 4134 | +\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}% | |
| 4135 | +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% | |
| 4136 | +\fi% glue defined or not | |
| 4137 | +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue | |
| 4138 | +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue | |
| 4139 | +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition | |
| 4140 | +\fi%close acquisition, get glue | |
| 4141 | +\fi%discard or acquire number | |
| 4142 | +\fi%prevtype glue or not | |
| 4143 | +} | |
| 4144 | + | |
| 4145 | + | |
| 4146 | +% process an acquired glue | |
| 4147 | +% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble | |
| 4148 | +\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions | |
| 4149 | +\else | |
| 4150 | +% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else | |
| 4151 | +% as this is not used in the preamble, but before | |
| 4152 | +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}% | |
| 4153 | +\else%not the start glue | |
| 4154 | +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues | |
| 4155 | +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak | |
| 4156 | +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak | |
| 4157 | +after the first}% | |
| 4158 | +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak | |
| 4159 | +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% | |
| 4160 | +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue | |
| 4161 | +\else% not a back to back glue | |
| 4162 | +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble | |
| 4163 | +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi | |
| 4164 | +\toks0={##}% | |
| 4165 | +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this | |
| 4166 | +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi | |
| 4167 | +% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand | |
| 4168 | +% the column definition | |
| 4169 | +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}% | |
| 4170 | +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% | |
| 4171 | +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% | |
| 4172 | +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% | |
| 4173 | +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% | |
| 4174 | +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% | |
| 4175 | +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% | |
| 4176 | +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% | |
| 4177 | +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% | |
| 4178 | +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% | |
| 4179 | +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble | |
| 4180 | +\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column | |
| 4181 | +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak | |
| 4182 | +type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak | |
| 4183 | +specifier}% | |
| 4184 | +{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak | |
| 4185 | +between column types.}% | |
| 4186 | +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue | |
| 4187 | +\fi% previous was a column | |
| 4188 | +\fi% back-to-back glues | |
| 4189 | +\fi% is start column glue | |
| 4190 | +\fi% prev type not a | |
| 4191 | +} | |
| 4192 | + | |
| 4193 | + | |
| 4194 | +% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble | |
| 4195 | +\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else | |
| 4196 | +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else | |
| 4197 | +% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue) | |
| 4198 | +% so we must add this column to the preamble now | |
| 4199 | +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first | |
| 4200 | +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue | |
| 4201 | +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue | |
| 4202 | +\toks0={##}% | |
| 4203 | +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this | |
| 4204 | +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi | |
| 4205 | +% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand | |
| 4206 | +% the column definition | |
| 4207 | +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% | |
| 4208 | +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% | |
| 4209 | +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% | |
| 4210 | +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% | |
| 4211 | +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% | |
| 4212 | +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% | |
| 4213 | +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% | |
| 4214 | +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% | |
| 4215 | +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% | |
| 4216 | +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble | |
| 4217 | +\fi%next type not numeral | |
| 4218 | +\fi%next type not glue | |
| 4219 | +} | |
| 4220 | + | |
| 4221 | + | |
| 4222 | +%% | |
| 4223 | +%% END OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS | |
| 4224 | +%% | |
| 4225 | + | |
| 4226 | + | |
| 4227 | + | |
| 4228 | + | |
| 4229 | + | |
| 4230 | +% set up the running headers and footers | |
| 4231 | +% | |
| 4232 | +% header and footer font and size specifications | |
| 4233 | +\def\@IEEEheaderstyle{\normalfont\scriptsize} | |
| 4234 | +\def\@IEEEfooterstyle{\normalfont\scriptsize} | |
| 4235 | +% | |
| 4236 | +% compsoc uses sans-serif headers and footers | |
| 4237 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 4238 | + \def\@IEEEheaderstyle{\normalfont\sffamily\scriptsize} | |
| 4239 | + \def\@IEEEfooterstyle{\normalfont\sffamily\scriptsize} | |
| 4240 | +\fi | |
| 4241 | + | |
| 4242 | + | |
| 4243 | +% standard page style, ps@headings | |
| 4244 | +\def\ps@headings{% default to standard twoside headers, no footers | |
| 4245 | +% will change later if the mode requires otherwise | |
| 4246 | +\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\rightmark\hfil\thepage}\relax | |
| 4247 | +\def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax | |
| 4248 | +\let\@oddfoot\@empty | |
| 4249 | +\let\@evenfoot\@empty | |
| 4250 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote | |
| 4251 | + % technote twoside | |
| 4252 | + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax | |
| 4253 | + \def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax | |
| 4254 | +\fi | |
| 4255 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls | |
| 4256 | + % draft footers | |
| 4257 | + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax | |
| 4258 | + \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax | |
| 4259 | +\fi | |
| 4260 | +% oneside | |
| 4261 | +\if@twoside\else | |
| 4262 | + % standard one side headers | |
| 4263 | + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax | |
| 4264 | + \let\@evenhead\@empty | |
| 4265 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls | |
| 4266 | + % oneside draft footers | |
| 4267 | + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax | |
| 4268 | + \let\@evenfoot\@empty | |
| 4269 | + \fi | |
| 4270 | +\fi | |
| 4271 | +% turn off headers for conferences | |
| 4272 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference | |
| 4273 | + \let\@oddhead\@empty | |
| 4274 | + \let\@evenhead\@empty | |
| 4275 | +\fi | |
| 4276 | +% turn off footers for draftclsnofoot | |
| 4277 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot | |
| 4278 | + \let\@oddfoot\@empty | |
| 4279 | + \let\@evenfoot\@empty | |
| 4280 | +\fi} | |
| 4281 | + | |
| 4282 | + | |
| 4283 | +% title page style, ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle | |
| 4284 | +\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{% default title page headers, no footers | |
| 4285 | +\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax | |
| 4286 | +\def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax | |
| 4287 | +\let\@oddfoot\@empty | |
| 4288 | +\let\@evenfoot\@empty | |
| 4289 | +% will change later if the mode requires otherwise | |
| 4290 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls | |
| 4291 | + % draft footers | |
| 4292 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else | |
| 4293 | + % but only if not draftclsnofoot | |
| 4294 | + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax | |
| 4295 | + \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax | |
| 4296 | + \fi | |
| 4297 | +\else | |
| 4298 | + % all nondraft mode footers | |
| 4299 | + \if@IEEEusingpubid | |
| 4300 | + % for title pages that are using a pubid | |
| 4301 | + % do not repeat pubid on the title page if using a peer review cover page | |
| 4302 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else | |
| 4303 | + % for noncompsoc papers, the pubid uses footnotesize and | |
| 4304 | + % is at the same vertical position as where the last baseline would normally be | |
| 4305 | + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax | |
| 4306 | + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax | |
| 4307 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 4308 | + % for compsoc papers, the pubid is at the same vertical position as the normal footer | |
| 4309 | + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax | |
| 4310 | + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax | |
| 4311 | + \fi | |
| 4312 | + \fi | |
| 4313 | + \fi | |
| 4314 | +\fi | |
| 4315 | +% turn off headers for conferences | |
| 4316 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference | |
| 4317 | + \let\@oddhead\@empty | |
| 4318 | + \let\@evenhead\@empty | |
| 4319 | +\fi} | |
| 4320 | + | |
| 4321 | + | |
| 4322 | +% peer review cover page style, ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle | |
| 4323 | +\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% default peer review cover no headers, no footers | |
| 4324 | +\let\@oddhead\@empty | |
| 4325 | +\let\@evenhead\@empty | |
| 4326 | +\let\@oddfoot\@empty | |
| 4327 | +\let\@evenfoot\@empty | |
| 4328 | +% will change later if the mode requires otherwise | |
| 4329 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls | |
| 4330 | + % draft footers | |
| 4331 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else | |
| 4332 | + % but only if not draftclsnofoot | |
| 4333 | + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax | |
| 4334 | + \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax | |
| 4335 | + \fi | |
| 4336 | +\else | |
| 4337 | + % all nondraft mode footers | |
| 4338 | + \if@IEEEusingpubid | |
| 4339 | + % for peer review cover pages that are using a pubid | |
| 4340 | + % for noncompsoc papers, the pubid uses footnotesize and | |
| 4341 | + % is at the same vertical position as where the last baseline would normally be | |
| 4342 | + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax | |
| 4343 | + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax | |
| 4344 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 4345 | + % for compsoc papers, the pubid is at the same vertical position as the normal footer | |
| 4346 | + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax | |
| 4347 | + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax | |
| 4348 | + \fi | |
| 4349 | + \fi | |
| 4350 | +\fi} | |
| 4351 | + | |
| 4352 | + | |
| 4353 | + | |
| 4354 | +%% Defines the command for putting the header. | |
| 4355 | +%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text | |
| 4356 | +%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually | |
| 4357 | +%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the | |
| 4358 | +%% arguments to \markboth. | |
| 4359 | +%% V1.7b add \protect to work with Babel | |
| 4360 | +\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\MakeUppercase{\protect#1}}% | |
| 4361 | +\def\rightmark{\MakeUppercase{\protect#2}}} | |
| 4362 | + | |
| 4363 | +\def\today{\ifcase\month\or | |
| 4364 | + January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or | |
| 4365 | + July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi | |
| 4366 | + \space\number\day, \number\year} | |
| 4367 | + | |
| 4368 | + | |
| 4369 | + | |
| 4370 | + | |
| 4371 | +%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS | |
| 4372 | +%% | |
| 4373 | +%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff | |
| 4374 | +% | |
| 4375 | +% | |
| 4376 | +% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], [" | |
| 4377 | +\def\@citex[#1]#2{% | |
| 4378 | + \let\@citea\@empty | |
| 4379 | + \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do | |
| 4380 | + {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}% | |
| 4381 | + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% | |
| 4382 | + \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi | |
| 4383 | + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% | |
| 4384 | + \G@refundefinedtrue | |
| 4385 | + \@latex@warning | |
| 4386 | + {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% | |
| 4387 | + {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}} | |
| 4388 | + | |
| 4389 | +% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's | |
| 4390 | +% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the | |
| 4391 | +% following format controls are already defined and will not | |
| 4392 | +% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the | |
| 4393 | +% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" - | |
| 4394 | +% all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12] | |
| 4395 | +% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}. | |
| 4396 | +% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will | |
| 4397 | +% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally | |
| 4398 | +% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in | |
| 4399 | +% that \cite. | |
| 4400 | +% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments | |
| 4401 | +% to produce the IEEE style. | |
| 4402 | +\def\citepunct{], [} | |
| 4403 | +\def\citedash{]--[} | |
| 4404 | + | |
| 4405 | +% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty | |
| 4406 | +\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname} | |
| 4407 | + | |
| 4408 | +% V1.6 class files should always provide these | |
| 4409 | +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em} | |
| 4410 | +\let\@openbib@code\@empty | |
| 4411 | +% V1.8b article.cls is now providing these too | |
| 4412 | +% we do not use \@mkboth, nor alter the page style | |
| 4413 | +\newenvironment{theindex} | |
| 4414 | + {\if@twocolumn | |
| 4415 | + \@restonecolfalse | |
| 4416 | + \else | |
| 4417 | + \@restonecoltrue | |
| 4418 | + \fi | |
| 4419 | + \twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]% | |
| 4420 | + \parindent\z@ | |
| 4421 | + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax | |
| 4422 | + \columnseprule \z@ | |
| 4423 | + \columnsep 35\p@ | |
| 4424 | + \let\item\@idxitem} | |
| 4425 | + {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} | |
| 4426 | +\newcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@} | |
| 4427 | +\newcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}} | |
| 4428 | +\newcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}} | |
| 4429 | +\newcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax} | |
| 4430 | + | |
| 4431 | + | |
| 4432 | + | |
| 4433 | +% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. | |
| 4434 | +% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in | |
| 4435 | +% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty: | |
| 4436 | +% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature} | |
| 4437 | +% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak} | |
| 4438 | +\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}} | |
| 4439 | +\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack | |
| 4440 | + \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% | |
| 4441 | + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% | |
| 4442 | + \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}% | |
| 4443 | + \@esphack} | |
| 4444 | + | |
| 4445 | +% \IEEEnoauxwrite{} allows for citations that do not add to or affect | |
| 4446 | +% the order of the existing citation list. Can be useful for \cite | |
| 4447 | +% within \thanks{}. | |
| 4448 | +\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEnoauxwrite}[1]{\relax | |
| 4449 | +\if@filesw | |
| 4450 | +\@fileswfalse | |
| 4451 | +#1\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax | |
| 4452 | +\@fileswtrue | |
| 4453 | +\else | |
| 4454 | +#1\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax | |
| 4455 | +\fi} | |
| 4456 | + | |
| 4457 | +% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before | |
| 4458 | +% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance | |
| 4459 | +% the columns on the last page | |
| 4460 | +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that | |
| 4461 | + % the command is not executed | |
| 4462 | +\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage} | |
| 4463 | + | |
| 4464 | +% allow the user to alter the triggered command | |
| 4465 | +\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}} | |
| 4466 | + | |
| 4467 | +% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the | |
| 4468 | +% command is executed | |
| 4469 | +\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1% | |
| 4470 | +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}% | |
| 4471 | + | |
| 4472 | +% trigger command at the given reference | |
| 4473 | +\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax% | |
| 4474 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% | |
| 4475 | +\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi} | |
| 4476 | + | |
| 4477 | + | |
| 4478 | +\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]} | |
| 4479 | + | |
| 4480 | +% compsoc journals and conferences left align the reference numbers | |
| 4481 | +\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}} | |
| 4482 | + | |
| 4483 | +% controls bib item spacing | |
| 4484 | +\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt} | |
| 4485 | + | |
| 4486 | +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}} | |
| 4487 | + | |
| 4488 | + | |
| 4489 | +\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}% | |
| 4490 | + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% | |
| 4491 | + % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger | |
| 4492 | + \footnotesize\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% | |
| 4493 | + \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% | |
| 4494 | + {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% | |
| 4495 | + \leftmargin\labelwidth | |
| 4496 | + \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax | |
| 4497 | + \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax | |
| 4498 | + \usecounter{enumiv}% | |
| 4499 | + \let\p@enumiv\@empty | |
| 4500 | + \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% | |
| 4501 | + \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem% | |
| 4502 | + \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}% | |
| 4503 | +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% | |
| 4504 | +% originally: | |
| 4505 | +% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000% | |
| 4506 | +% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more | |
| 4507 | +% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference. | |
| 4508 | +% The IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with | |
| 4509 | +% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, | |
| 4510 | +% but the final result will be much more like what the IEEE will publish. | |
| 4511 | +% MDS 11/2000 | |
| 4512 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100% | |
| 4513 | +\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi% | |
| 4514 | + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax} | |
| 4515 | +\let\endthebibliography=\endlist | |
| 4516 | + | |
| 4517 | + | |
| 4518 | + | |
| 4519 | + | |
| 4520 | +% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS | |
| 4521 | +% | |
| 4522 | +% | |
| 4523 | +% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author | |
| 4524 | +% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font | |
| 4525 | +\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}} | |
| 4526 | + | |
| 4527 | + | |
| 4528 | +% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation. | |
| 4529 | +% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote | |
| 4530 | +% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} | |
| 4531 | +% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you | |
| 4532 | +% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote | |
| 4533 | +% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks. | |
| 4534 | +% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical | |
| 4535 | +% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that | |
| 4536 | +% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding | |
| 4537 | +% with the text above. | |
| 4538 | +% V1.7 make this a robust command | |
| 4539 | +% V1.8 transmag uses an arabic author affiliation symbol | |
| 4540 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag | |
| 4541 | +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize #1}}} | |
| 4542 | +\else | |
| 4543 | +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or% | |
| 4544 | + \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger% | |
| 4545 | + \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}} | |
| 4546 | +\fi | |
| 4547 | + | |
| 4548 | + | |
| 4549 | +% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS | |
| 4550 | +% | |
| 4551 | +% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode) | |
| 4552 | +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} | |
| 4553 | +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize} | |
| 4554 | +% The default if the user does not use an author block | |
| 4555 | +\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} | |
| 4556 | + | |
| 4557 | +% adjustment spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode) | |
| 4558 | +% can be negative | |
| 4559 | +\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em} | |
| 4560 | +% compsoc conferences need more space here | |
| 4561 | +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}} | |
| 4562 | + | |
| 4563 | +% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode) | |
| 4564 | +% This can be negative. | |
| 4565 | +% The IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these | |
| 4566 | +% controls in place in case they ever change their mind. | |
| 4567 | +% Personally, I like 0.75ex. | |
| 4568 | +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex} | |
| 4569 | +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex} | |
| 4570 | +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex} | |
| 4571 | +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex} | |
| 4572 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag | |
| 4573 | +% transmag uses one line of space above first affiliation block | |
| 4574 | +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{1\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} | |
| 4575 | +\fi | |
| 4576 | + | |
| 4577 | +% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode) | |
| 4578 | +% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make | |
| 4579 | +% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the | |
| 4580 | +% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, | |
| 4581 | +% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep | |
| 4582 | +% these above 2.6ex | |
| 4583 | +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex} | |
| 4584 | +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex} | |
| 4585 | + | |
| 4586 | +% This tracks the required strut size. | |
| 4587 | +% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used. | |
| 4588 | +\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex} | |
| 4589 | + | |
| 4590 | +% variables to retain font size and style across groups | |
| 4591 | +% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later | |
| 4592 | +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10} | |
| 4593 | +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12} | |
| 4594 | +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1} | |
| 4595 | +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm} | |
| 4596 | +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m} | |
| 4597 | +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n} | |
| 4598 | + | |
| 4599 | +% saves the current font attributes | |
| 4600 | +\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size% | |
| 4601 | +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip% | |
| 4602 | +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding% | |
| 4603 | +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family% | |
| 4604 | +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series% | |
| 4605 | +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape} | |
| 4606 | + | |
| 4607 | +% restores the saved font attributes | |
| 4608 | +\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}% | |
| 4609 | +\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}% | |
| 4610 | +\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}% | |
| 4611 | +\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}% | |
| 4612 | +\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}% | |
| 4613 | +\selectfont} | |
| 4614 | + | |
| 4615 | + | |
| 4616 | +% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column | |
| 4617 | +\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse | |
| 4618 | + | |
| 4619 | + | |
| 4620 | +% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace | |
| 4621 | +% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines | |
| 4622 | +% within the halign environment. | |
| 4623 | +% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above | |
| 4624 | +% baseline portion at 70% of the total length. | |
| 4625 | +% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch | |
| 4626 | +\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace% | |
| 4627 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% | |
| 4628 | +\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}} | |
| 4629 | + | |
| 4630 | + | |
| 4631 | +% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. | |
| 4632 | +% Makes formatting easy for conferences | |
| 4633 | +% | |
| 4634 | +% use real definitions in conference mode | |
| 4635 | +% name block | |
| 4636 | +\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style | |
| 4637 | +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row | |
| 4638 | +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs | |
| 4639 | +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro | |
| 4640 | +% do a spacer row if needed | |
| 4641 | +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi | |
| 4642 | +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column | |
| 4643 | +%restore the correct strut value | |
| 4644 | +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}% | |
| 4645 | +% input the author names | |
| 4646 | +#1% | |
| 4647 | +% end the row if the user did not already | |
| 4648 | +\crcr} | |
| 4649 | +% spacer row for names | |
| 4650 | +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}} | |
| 4651 | +% | |
| 4652 | +% affiliation block | |
| 4653 | +\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style | |
| 4654 | +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row | |
| 4655 | +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs | |
| 4656 | +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro | |
| 4657 | +% do a spacer row if needed | |
| 4658 | +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi | |
| 4659 | +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column | |
| 4660 | +%restore the correct strut value | |
| 4661 | +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}% | |
| 4662 | +% input the author affiliations | |
| 4663 | +#1% | |
| 4664 | +% end the row if the user did not already | |
| 4665 | +\crcr | |
| 4666 | +% V1.8 transmag does not use any additional affiliation spacing after the first author | |
| 4667 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0pt}\fi} | |
| 4668 | + | |
| 4669 | +% spacer row for affiliations | |
| 4670 | +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}} | |
| 4671 | + | |
| 4672 | + | |
| 4673 | +% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other | |
| 4674 | +% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks. | |
| 4675 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference | |
| 4676 | +\else | |
| 4677 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else | |
| 4678 | + % not conference, peerreviewca or transmag mode | |
| 4679 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\else | |
| 4680 | + \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}% | |
| 4681 | + \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}% | |
| 4682 | + \fi | |
| 4683 | + \fi | |
| 4684 | +\fi | |
| 4685 | + | |
| 4686 | + | |
| 4687 | + | |
| 4688 | +% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular | |
| 4689 | +\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style | |
| 4690 | + \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing | |
| 4691 | + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% | |
| 4692 | + \baselineskip=0pt\relax% | |
| 4693 | + \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font | |
| 4694 | + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math | |
| 4695 | + \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one | |
| 4696 | + \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing | |
| 4697 | + \everycr{}% ensure no problems here | |
| 4698 | + \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet | |
| 4699 | + \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space | |
| 4700 | + \vtop\bgroup%vtop box | |
| 4701 | + \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax | |
| 4702 | + \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr} | |
| 4703 | + | |
| 4704 | +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox | |
| 4705 | +\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup} | |
| 4706 | + | |
| 4707 | +% handle bogus star form | |
| 4708 | +\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}} | |
| 4709 | + | |
| 4710 | +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] | |
| 4711 | +\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip} | |
| 4712 | + | |
| 4713 | +% end the line and do the optional spacer | |
| 4714 | +\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}} | |
| 4715 | + | |
| 4716 | + | |
| 4717 | + | |
| 4718 | +% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages | |
| 4719 | +\newif\if@IEEEWARNand | |
| 4720 | +\@IEEEWARNandtrue | |
| 4721 | + | |
| 4722 | +% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a | |
| 4723 | +% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid | |
| 4724 | +% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes. | |
| 4725 | +\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override | |
| 4726 | + | |
| 4727 | +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only | |
| 4728 | + when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse} | |
| 4729 | + | |
| 4730 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% | |
| 4731 | +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% | |
| 4732 | +\fi | |
| 4733 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca | |
| 4734 | +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% | |
| 4735 | +\fi | |
| 4736 | +% V1.8 transmag uses conference author format | |
| 4737 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag | |
| 4738 | +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% | |
| 4739 | +\fi | |
| 4740 | + | |
| 4741 | +% page clearing command | |
| 4742 | +% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles | |
| 4743 | +% for the inserted blank pages | |
| 4744 | +\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else | |
| 4745 | +\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi} | |
| 4746 | + | |
| 4747 | +% V1.8b hooks to allow adjustment of space above title | |
| 4748 | +\def\IEEEtitletopspace{0.5\baselineskip} | |
| 4749 | +% an added extra amount to allow for adjustment/offset | |
| 4750 | +\def\IEEEtitletopspaceextra{0pt} | |
| 4751 | + | |
| 4752 | +% user command to invoke the title page | |
| 4753 | +\def\maketitle{\par% | |
| 4754 | + \begingroup% | |
| 4755 | + \normalfont% | |
| 4756 | + \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty | |
| 4757 | + \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author | |
| 4758 | + \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well. | |
| 4759 | + \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines | |
| 4760 | + \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info | |
| 4761 | + % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc | |
| 4762 | + \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}% | |
| 4763 | + \normalsize% | |
| 4764 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview | |
| 4765 | + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% | |
| 4766 | + \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks% | |
| 4767 | + \else | |
| 4768 | + \if@twocolumn% | |
| 4769 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% | |
| 4770 | + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% | |
| 4771 | + \else | |
| 4772 | + \twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@maketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}\@IEEEaftertitletext}]% | |
| 4773 | + \fi | |
| 4774 | + \else | |
| 4775 | + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% | |
| 4776 | + \fi | |
| 4777 | + \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks% | |
| 4778 | + \fi | |
| 4779 | + % pullup page for pubid if used. | |
| 4780 | + \if@IEEEusingpubid | |
| 4781 | + \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}% | |
| 4782 | + \fi | |
| 4783 | + \endgroup | |
| 4784 | + \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax | |
| 4785 | + \gdef\@thanks{}% | |
| 4786 | + % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers | |
| 4787 | + % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}% | |
| 4788 | + \let\thanks\relax} | |
| 4789 | + | |
| 4790 | + | |
| 4791 | +% V1.8 parbox to format \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext | |
| 4792 | +\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{1\textwidth}{#1}} | |
| 4793 | +% V1.8 compsoc is partial width | |
| 4794 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 4795 | +% comparison with proofs suggests it's in the range of 92.1-92.3% | |
| 4796 | +\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.922\textwidth}{\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\rightskip\@flushglue\leftskip\z@skip}#1}} | |
| 4797 | +\fi | |
| 4798 | + | |
| 4799 | +% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice | |
| 4800 | +% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional | |
| 4801 | +% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line | |
| 4802 | +\def\@maketitle{\newpage | |
| 4803 | +\bgroup\par\vskip\IEEEtitletopspace\vskip\IEEEtitletopspaceextra\centering% | |
| 4804 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes, V1.8a abstract and index terms are not treated differently for compsoc technotes | |
| 4805 | + {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\Large\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\large\sffamily}\@author | |
| 4806 | + \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par}\relax | |
| 4807 | +\else% not a technote | |
| 4808 | + \vskip0.2em{\Huge\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\bfseries\LARGE\fi\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip | |
| 4809 | + \bfseries\Large}\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\@title\par}\relax | |
| 4810 | + \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\vskip1.0em\par% | |
| 4811 | + % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode | |
| 4812 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% | |
| 4813 | + {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% | |
| 4814 | + \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax | |
| 4815 | + \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal | |
| 4816 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca | |
| 4817 | + % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode | |
| 4818 | + {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% | |
| 4819 | + \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par | |
| 4820 | + {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax | |
| 4821 | + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill | |
| 4822 | + \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax | |
| 4823 | + \else% journal, peerreview or transmag | |
| 4824 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag | |
| 4825 | + % transmag also handles author names just like conference mode | |
| 4826 | + % it also uses \@IEEEtitleabstractindextex, but with one line less | |
| 4827 | + % space above, and one more below | |
| 4828 | + {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% | |
| 4829 | + \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par | |
| 4830 | + {\vspace{0.5\baselineskip}\relax\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\par}}\relax | |
| 4831 | + \else% journal or peerreview | |
| 4832 | + {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par | |
| 4833 | + {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax | |
| 4834 | + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill | |
| 4835 | + \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax | |
| 4836 | + \fi | |
| 4837 | + \fi | |
| 4838 | + \fi | |
| 4839 | +\fi\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup} | |
| 4840 | + | |
| 4841 | + | |
| 4842 | +% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers | |
| 4843 | +% V1.8a full width diamond line for single column use | |
| 4844 | +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak | |
| 4845 | +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak | |
| 4846 | +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax} | |
| 4847 | +% V1.8a narrower width diamond line for double column use | |
| 4848 | +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak | |
| 4849 | +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak | |
| 4850 | +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\relax} | |
| 4851 | +% V1.8a bare core without rules to base a last resort on for very narrow linewidths | |
| 4852 | +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii{\mbox{}\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak | |
| 4853 | +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak | |
| 4854 | +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\mbox{}\relax} | |
| 4855 | + | |
| 4856 | +% V1.8a allow \IEEEcompsocdiamondline to adjust for different linewidths. | |
| 4857 | +% Use \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei if its width is less than 0.66\linewidth (0.487 nominal for single column) | |
| 4858 | +% if not, fall back to \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii if its width is less than 0.75\linewidth (0.659 nominal for double column) | |
| 4859 | +% if all else fails, try to make a custom diamondline based on the abnormally narrow linewidth | |
| 4860 | +\def\IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei}\relax | |
| 4861 | +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.66\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei\relax | |
| 4862 | +\else | |
| 4863 | +\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii}\relax | |
| 4864 | +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.75\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii\relax | |
| 4865 | +\else | |
| 4866 | +\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii}\relax | |
| 4867 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\linewidth\relax | |
| 4868 | +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{-1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\relax | |
| 4869 | +\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax | |
| 4870 | +\fi\fi} | |
| 4871 | + | |
| 4872 | + | |
| 4873 | +% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def | |
| 4874 | +% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule | |
| 4875 | +\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue} | |
| 4876 | + | |
| 4877 | + | |
| 4878 | +\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark | |
| 4879 | + \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks | |
| 4880 | + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape | |
| 4881 | + \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}} | |
| 4882 | +\let\@thanks\@empty | |
| 4883 | + | |
| 4884 | + | |
| 4885 | +% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par. | |
| 4886 | +\long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}} | |
| 4887 | + | |
| 4888 | + | |
| 4889 | +% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and | |
| 4890 | +% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts. | |
| 4891 | +\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}% | |
| 4892 | +\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{1.2em}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% | |
| 4893 | +\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax} | |
| 4894 | + | |
| 4895 | + | |
| 4896 | +% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item | |
| 4897 | +\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse | |
| 4898 | + | |
| 4899 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 4900 | +% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks | |
| 4901 | +% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \IEEEquantizevspace | |
| 4902 | +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark | |
| 4903 | + \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks | |
| 4904 | + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule | |
| 4905 | + {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax | |
| 4906 | + \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}} | |
| 4907 | +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item} | |
| 4908 | +\else | |
| 4909 | +% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks | |
| 4910 | +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}} | |
| 4911 | +% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[] | |
| 4912 | +\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}% | |
| 4913 | +{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}} | |
| 4914 | +% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument | |
| 4915 | +\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break | |
| 4916 | +\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces} | |
| 4917 | +\fi | |
| 4918 | + | |
| 4919 | + | |
| 4920 | +% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed | |
| 4921 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview | |
| 4922 | +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}% | |
| 4923 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn | |
| 4924 | +\twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}}] | |
| 4925 | +\else | |
| 4926 | +\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip | |
| 4927 | +\fi | |
| 4928 | +\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}} | |
| 4929 | +\else | |
| 4930 | +% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected | |
| 4931 | +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax} | |
| 4932 | +\fi | |
| 4933 | + | |
| 4934 | +% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers. | |
| 4935 | +\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}% | |
| 4936 | +\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par | |
| 4937 | +\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup} | |
| 4938 | + | |
| 4939 | + | |
| 4940 | + | |
| 4941 | +% V1.6 | |
| 4942 | +% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text | |
| 4943 | +% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column | |
| 4944 | +% of two column text (technotes). | |
| 4945 | +\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize | |
| 4946 | +% adjust spacing to next text | |
| 4947 | +% v1.6b handle peer review papers | |
| 4948 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview | |
| 4949 | +% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages | |
| 4950 | +% regardless of the other paper modes | |
| 4951 | + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip | |
| 4952 | +\else | |
| 4953 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference | |
| 4954 | + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% | |
| 4955 | + \else% | |
| 4956 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote | |
| 4957 | + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% | |
| 4958 | + \else% journal uses more space | |
| 4959 | + \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip% | |
| 4960 | + \fi | |
| 4961 | + \fi | |
| 4962 | +\fi}} | |
| 4963 | + | |
| 4964 | + | |
| 4965 | +% set the nominal and minimum values for the quantized title spacer | |
| 4966 | +% the quantization algorithm will not allow the spacer size to | |
| 4967 | +% become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be lengthened | |
| 4968 | +% default to journal values | |
| 4969 | +\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip} | |
| 4970 | +\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip} | |
| 4971 | +% conferences and technotes need tighter spacing | |
| 4972 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference | |
| 4973 | + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip} | |
| 4974 | + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip} | |
| 4975 | +\fi | |
| 4976 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote | |
| 4977 | + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip} | |
| 4978 | + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip} | |
| 4979 | +\fi | |
| 4980 | + | |
| 4981 | + | |
| 4982 | +% V1.8a | |
| 4983 | +\def\IEEEquantizevspace{\begingroup\@ifstar{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformtrue\@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformfalse\@IEEEquantizevspace}} | |
| 4984 | +% \IEEEquantizevspace[output dimen register]{object}[object decl] | |
| 4985 | +% {top baselineskip} | |
| 4986 | +% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip] | |
| 4987 | +% {unit height}{nominal vspace}{minimum vspace} | |
| 4988 | +% | |
| 4989 | +% Calculates and creates the vspace needed to make the combined height with | |
| 4990 | +% the given object an integer multiple of the given unit height. This command | |
| 4991 | +% is more general than the older \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace it replaces. | |
| 4992 | +% | |
| 4993 | +% The star form has no effect at present, but is reserved for future use. | |
| 4994 | +% | |
| 4995 | +% If the optional argument [output dimen register] is given, the calculated | |
| 4996 | +% vspace height is stored in the given output dimen (or skip) register | |
| 4997 | +% and no other action is taken, otherwise the object followed by a vspace* | |
| 4998 | +% of the appropriate height is evaluated/output. | |
| 4999 | +% | |
| 5000 | +% The optional object decl (declarations) is code that is evaluated just | |
| 5001 | +% before the object's height is evaluated. Its intented purpose is to allow | |
| 5002 | +% for the alteration or disabling of code within the object during internal | |
| 5003 | +% height evaluation (e.g., \long\def\thanks#1{\relax} ). | |
| 5004 | +% This special code is not invoked if/when the object is rendered at the end. | |
| 5005 | +% | |
| 5006 | +% The nominal vspace is the target value of the added vspace and the minimum | |
| 5007 | +% vspace is the lower allowed limit. The vspacer will be the value that achieves | |
| 5008 | +% integral overall height, in terms of the given unit height, that is closest | |
| 5009 | +% to the nominal vspace and that is not less than the specified minimum vspace. | |
| 5010 | +% | |
| 5011 | +% The line spacing algorithm of TeX is somewhat involved and requires special | |
| 5012 | +% care with regard to the first line of a vertical list (which is indicated | |
| 5013 | +% when \prevdepth is -1000pt or less). top baselineskip specifies the | |
| 5014 | +% baselineskip or topskip used prior to the object. If the height of the | |
| 5015 | +% first line of the object is greater than the given top baselineskip, then | |
| 5016 | +% the top baselineskip is subtracted from the height of the first line and | |
| 5017 | +% that difference is considered along with the rest of the object height | |
| 5018 | +% (because the object will be shifted down by an amount = | |
| 5019 | +% top line height - top baselineskip). Otherwise, the height of the first line | |
| 5020 | +% of the object is ignored as far as the calculations are concerned. | |
| 5021 | +% This algorithm is adequate for objects that appear at the top of a page | |
| 5022 | +% (e.g., titles) where \topskip spacing is used. | |
| 5023 | +% | |
| 5024 | +% However, as explained on page 78 of the TeXbook, interline spacing is more | |
| 5025 | +% complex when \baselineskip is being used (indicated by \prevdepth > | |
| 5026 | +% -1000pt). The four optional parameters offset, prevdepth, lineskip limit and | |
| 5027 | +% lineskip are assumed to be equal to be 0pt, \prevdepth, \lineskiplimit and | |
| 5028 | +% \lineskip, respectively, if they are omitted. | |
| 5029 | +% | |
| 5030 | +% The prevdepth is the depth of the line before the object, the lineskip limit | |
| 5031 | +% specifies how close the top of the object can come to the bottom of the | |
| 5032 | +% previous line before \baselineskip is ignored and \lineskip is inserted | |
| 5033 | +% between the object and the line above it. Lineskip does not come into | |
| 5034 | +% play unless the first line of the object is high enough to "get too close" | |
| 5035 | +% (as specified by lineskiplimit) to the line before it. The the prevdepth, | |
| 5036 | +% lineskip limit, and lineskip optional parameters are not needed for the | |
| 5037 | +% first object/line on a page (i.e., prevdepth <= -1000pt) where the simplier | |
| 5038 | +% \topskip spacing rules are in effect. | |
| 5039 | +% | |
| 5040 | +% Offset is a manual adjustment that is added to the height calculations of | |
| 5041 | +% object irrespective of the value of \prevdepth. It is useful when the top | |
| 5042 | +% baselineskip will result in a noninteger unit height object placement even | |
| 5043 | +% if the object itself has integral height. e.g., a footnotesize baselineskip | |
| 5044 | +% is used before the object, thus an offset of, say -3pt, can be given as a | |
| 5045 | +% correction. | |
| 5046 | + | |
| 5047 | +% Common combinations of these parameters include: | |
| 5048 | +% | |
| 5049 | +% top baselineskip: (and default values for offset, prevdepth, etc.) | |
| 5050 | +% \topskip % for objects that appear at the top of a page | |
| 5051 | +% \maxdimen % always ignore the height of the top line | |
| 5052 | +% 0pt % always consider any positive height of the top line | |
| 5053 | +% | |
| 5054 | +% for objects to appear inline in normal text: | |
| 5055 | +% top baselineskip = \baselineskip | |
| 5056 | +% | |
| 5057 | +% set prevdepth = -1000pt and top baselineskip = 0pt to consider the | |
| 5058 | +% overall height of the object without any other external skip | |
| 5059 | +% consideration | |
| 5060 | + | |
| 5061 | +\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspacestarform % flag to indicate star form | |
| 5062 | +\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg % flag to indicate output dimen register is to be used | |
| 5063 | +% Use our own private registers because the object could contain a | |
| 5064 | +% structure that uses the existing tmp scratch pad registers | |
| 5065 | +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightA | |
| 5066 | +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightB | |
| 5067 | +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightC | |
| 5068 | +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth % need to save this early as can change | |
| 5069 | +\newcount\@IEEEquantizemultiple | |
| 5070 | +\newbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA | |
| 5071 | + | |
| 5072 | + | |
| 5073 | +\def\@IEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregtrue\@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregfalse\@@IEEEquantizevspace[]}} | |
| 5074 | + | |
| 5075 | + | |
| 5076 | +\long\def\@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax | |
| 5077 | +% acquire and store | |
| 5078 | +% #1 optional output dimen register | |
| 5079 | +% #2 object | |
| 5080 | +\edef\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg{#1}\relax | |
| 5081 | +% allow for object specifications that contain parameters | |
| 5082 | +\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#2}\relax | |
| 5083 | +\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobject{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax | |
| 5084 | +\@ifnextchar [{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[\relax]}} | |
| 5085 | + | |
| 5086 | +\long\def\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax | |
| 5087 | +% acquire and store | |
| 5088 | +% [#1] optional object decl, is \relax if not given by user | |
| 5089 | +% #2 top baselineskip | |
| 5090 | +% allow for object decl specifications that have parameters | |
| 5091 | +\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#1}\relax | |
| 5092 | +\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax | |
| 5093 | +\edef\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip{#2}\ivIEEEquantizevspace} | |
| 5094 | + | |
| 5095 | +% acquire optional argument set and store | |
| 5096 | +% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip] | |
| 5097 | +\def\ivIEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@vIEEEquantizevspace}{\@vIEEEquantizevspace[0pt]}} | |
| 5098 | +\def\@vIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizeoffset{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viIEEEquantizevspace[\prevdepth]}} | |
| 5099 | +\def\@viIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth=#1\relax\@ifnextchar [{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskiplimit]}} | |
| 5100 | +\def\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskip]}} | |
| 5101 | +\def\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskip{#1}\@ixIEEEquantizevspace} | |
| 5102 | + | |
| 5103 | +% main routine | |
| 5104 | +\def\@ixIEEEquantizevspace#1#2#3{\relax | |
| 5105 | +\edef\@IEEEquantizeunitheight{#1}\relax | |
| 5106 | +\edef\@IEEEquantizenomvspace{#2}\relax | |
| 5107 | +\edef\@IEEEquantizeminvspace{#3}\relax | |
| 5108 | +% \@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg | |
| 5109 | +% \@IEEEquantizeobject | |
| 5110 | +% \@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl | |
| 5111 | +% \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip | |
| 5112 | +% \@IEEEquantizeoffset | |
| 5113 | +% \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth | |
| 5114 | +% \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit | |
| 5115 | +% \@IEEEquantizelineskip | |
| 5116 | +% \@IEEEquantizeunitheight | |
| 5117 | +% \@IEEEquantizenomvspace | |
| 5118 | +% \@IEEEquantizeminvspace | |
| 5119 | +% get overall height of object | |
| 5120 | +\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vbox{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 5121 | +\@IEEEquantizeheightA\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax | |
| 5122 | +% get height of first line of object | |
| 5123 | +\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vtop{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax | |
| 5124 | +\@IEEEquantizeheightB\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax | |
| 5125 | +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth>-1000pt\relax % prevdepth > -1000pf means full baselineskip\lineskip rules in effect | |
| 5126 | +% lineskip spacing rule takes effect if height of top line > baselineskip - prevdepth - lineskiplimit, | |
| 5127 | +% otherwise the baselineskip rule is in effect and the height of the first line does not matter at all. | |
| 5128 | +\@IEEEquantizeheightC=\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax | |
| 5129 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax | |
| 5130 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit\relax % this works even though \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit is a macro because TeX allows --10pt notation | |
| 5131 | +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax | |
| 5132 | +% lineskip spacing rule is in effect i.e., the object is going to be shifted down relative to the | |
| 5133 | +% baselineskip set position by its top line height (already a part of the total height) + prevdepth + lineskip - baselineskip | |
| 5134 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax | |
| 5135 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizelineskip\relax | |
| 5136 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax | |
| 5137 | +\else | |
| 5138 | +% height of first line <= \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip - \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth - \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit | |
| 5139 | +% standard baselineskip rules are in effect, so don't consider height of first line | |
| 5140 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax | |
| 5141 | +\fi | |
| 5142 | +% | |
| 5143 | +\else % prevdepth <= -1000pt, simplier \topskip type rules in effect | |
| 5144 | +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip | |
| 5145 | +% height of top line (already included in the total height) in excess of | |
| 5146 | +% baselineskip is the amount it will be downshifted | |
| 5147 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax | |
| 5148 | +\else | |
| 5149 | +% height of first line is irrelevant, remove it | |
| 5150 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax | |
| 5151 | +\fi | |
| 5152 | +\fi % prevdepth <= -1000pt | |
| 5153 | +% | |
| 5154 | +% adjust height for any manual offset | |
| 5155 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeoffset\relax | |
| 5156 | +% add in nominal spacer | |
| 5157 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax | |
| 5158 | +% check for nonzero unitheight | |
| 5159 | +\@IEEEquantizeheightB=\@IEEEquantizeunitheight\relax | |
| 5160 | +\ifnum\@IEEEquantizeheightB=0\relax | |
| 5161 | +\@IEEEclspkgerror{IEEEquantizevspace unit height cannot be zero. Assuming 10pt.}% | |
| 5162 | +{Division by zero is not allowed.} | |
| 5163 | +\@IEEEquantizeheightB=10pt\relax | |
| 5164 | +\fi | |
| 5165 | +% get integer number of lines | |
| 5166 | +\@IEEEquantizemultiple=\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax | |
| 5167 | +\divide\@IEEEquantizemultiple\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax | |
| 5168 | +% set A to contain the excess height over the \@IEEEquantizemultiple of lines | |
| 5169 | +% A = height - multiple*unitheight | |
| 5170 | +\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax | |
| 5171 | +\multiply\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizemultiple\relax | |
| 5172 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax | |
| 5173 | +% set B to contain the height short of \@IEEEquantizemultiple+1 of lines | |
| 5174 | +% B = unitheight - A | |
| 5175 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightB-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax | |
| 5176 | +% choose A or B based on which is closer | |
| 5177 | +\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax | |
| 5178 | +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightA<\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax | |
| 5179 | +% C = nomvspace - A, go with lower | |
| 5180 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax | |
| 5181 | +\else | |
| 5182 | +% C = nomvspace + B, go with upper | |
| 5183 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax | |
| 5184 | +\fi | |
| 5185 | +% if violate lower bound, use next integer bound | |
| 5186 | +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightC<\@IEEEquantizeminvspace\relax | |
| 5187 | +% A + B = unitheight | |
| 5188 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax | |
| 5189 | +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax | |
| 5190 | +\fi | |
| 5191 | +% export object and spacer outside of group | |
| 5192 | +\global\let\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax | |
| 5193 | +\global\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax | |
| 5194 | +\endgroup | |
| 5195 | +\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg | |
| 5196 | +\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg=\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax | |
| 5197 | +\else | |
| 5198 | +\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\relax | |
| 5199 | +\vskip\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax | |
| 5200 | +\fi} | |
| 5201 | + | |
| 5202 | + | |
| 5203 | +% user command to disable all global assignments, possible use within object decl | |
| 5204 | +\def\IEEEquantizedisableglobal{\let\global\relax | |
| 5205 | +\let\gdef\def | |
| 5206 | +\let\xdef\edef} | |
| 5207 | +% user command to allow for the disabling of \thanks and other commands, possible use within object decl | |
| 5208 | +\def\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds{\long\def\thanks##1{\relax}\relax | |
| 5209 | +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}\def\newpage{\relax}} | |
| 5210 | + | |
| 5211 | + | |
| 5212 | + | |
| 5213 | + | |
| 5214 | + | |
| 5215 | +% V1.6 | |
| 5216 | +% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area | |
| 5217 | +% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed | |
| 5218 | +% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer. | |
| 5219 | +\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax | |
| 5220 | +\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}} | |
| 5221 | + | |
| 5222 | + | |
| 5223 | +% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords | |
| 5224 | +% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for | |
| 5225 | +% in the dynamic sizer. | |
| 5226 | +\let\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext=\relax | |
| 5227 | +\long\def\IEEEtitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext{#1}} | |
| 5228 | + | |
| 5229 | +% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext if | |
| 5230 | +% not in compsoc or transmag journal mode - this way abstract and keywords | |
| 5231 | +% can still be placed in their conventional position if not in those modes. | |
| 5232 | +\def\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext{% | |
| 5233 | +% display for all conference formats | |
| 5234 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax | |
| 5235 | +\else% non-conferences | |
| 5236 | + % V1.8a display for all technotes | |
| 5237 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax | |
| 5238 | + % V1.8a add diamond line after abstract and index terms for compsoc technotes | |
| 5239 | + \@IEEEcompsoconly{\noindent\hfill\IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}\relax | |
| 5240 | + \else % non-conferences and non-technotes | |
| 5241 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if not compsoc and not transmag | |
| 5242 | + \else | |
| 5243 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag | |
| 5244 | + \else% not compsoc journal nor transmag journal | |
| 5245 | + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax | |
| 5246 | + \fi | |
| 5247 | + \fi | |
| 5248 | + \fi | |
| 5249 | +\fi} | |
| 5250 | + | |
| 5251 | + | |
| 5252 | +% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current | |
| 5253 | +% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing. | |
| 5254 | +\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont | |
| 5255 | +\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip% | |
| 5256 | +\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax} | |
| 5257 | + | |
| 5258 | + | |
| 5259 | +% abstract and keywords are in \small, except | |
| 5260 | +% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize | |
| 5261 | +% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small | |
| 5262 | +% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt | |
| 5263 | +\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small} | |
| 5264 | +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine | |
| 5265 | + \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize} | |
| 5266 | +\fi | |
| 5267 | + | |
| 5268 | +% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize | |
| 5269 | +\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}} | |
| 5270 | +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}} | |
| 5271 | + | |
| 5272 | + | |
| 5273 | +% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines | |
| 5274 | +% so that spacing is more tightly controlled. | |
| 5275 | +\def\abstract{\normalfont | |
| 5276 | + \if@twocolumn | |
| 5277 | + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax | |
| 5278 | + \else | |
| 5279 | + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize | |
| 5280 | + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} | |
| 5281 | +% V1.6 The IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in | |
| 5282 | +% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it) | |
| 5283 | +\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi | |
| 5284 | + \normalfont\normalsize} | |
| 5285 | + | |
| 5286 | +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont | |
| 5287 | + \if@twocolumn | |
| 5288 | + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax | |
| 5289 | + \else | |
| 5290 | + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize | |
| 5291 | + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} | |
| 5292 | +\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi | |
| 5293 | + \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi% | |
| 5294 | + \normalfont\normalsize} | |
| 5295 | + | |
| 5296 | +% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms | |
| 5297 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 5298 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference | |
| 5299 | +\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries | |
| 5300 | + \if@twocolumn | |
| 5301 | + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textit{\abstractname}---\relax | |
| 5302 | + \else | |
| 5303 | + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% | |
| 5304 | + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} | |
| 5305 | +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries | |
| 5306 | + \if@twocolumn | |
| 5307 | + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent | |
| 5308 | + \textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax | |
| 5309 | + \else | |
| 5310 | + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% | |
| 5311 | + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} | |
| 5312 | + \else% compsoc not conference | |
| 5313 | +\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily | |
| 5314 | + \if@twocolumn | |
| 5315 | + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax | |
| 5316 | + \else | |
| 5317 | + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% | |
| 5318 | + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} | |
| 5319 | +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily | |
| 5320 | + \if@twocolumn | |
| 5321 | + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent | |
| 5322 | + \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax | |
| 5323 | + \else | |
| 5324 | + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% | |
| 5325 | + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} | |
| 5326 | + \fi | |
| 5327 | +\fi | |
| 5328 | + | |
| 5329 | +% V1.8 transmag keywords index terms | |
| 5330 | +% no abstract name, use indentation | |
| 5331 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag | |
| 5332 | +\def\abstract{\normalfont\parindent 1em\relax | |
| 5333 | + \if@twocolumn | |
| 5334 | + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\indent | |
| 5335 | + \else | |
| 5336 | + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize | |
| 5337 | + \textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize | |
| 5338 | + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} | |
| 5339 | + | |
| 5340 | +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\parindent 1em\relax | |
| 5341 | + \if@twocolumn | |
| 5342 | + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vspace{1\baselineskip}\bfseries\indent\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax | |
| 5343 | + \else | |
| 5344 | + \bgroup\par\vspace{1\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize | |
| 5345 | + \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize | |
| 5346 | + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} | |
| 5347 | +\fi | |
| 5348 | + | |
| 5349 | + | |
| 5350 | + | |
| 5351 | +% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that | |
| 5352 | +% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token | |
| 5353 | +% | |
| 5354 | +% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input | |
| 5355 | +% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not | |
| 5356 | +% affect the formatting of the text | |
| 5357 | +\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0% | |
| 5358 | +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1% | |
| 5359 | +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par% | |
| 5360 | +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\% | |
| 5361 | +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ % | |
| 5362 | +\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }% | |
| 5363 | +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken% | |
| 5364 | +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% | |
| 5365 | +\fi% | |
| 5366 | +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken% | |
| 5367 | +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% | |
| 5368 | +\fi% | |
| 5369 | +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken% | |
| 5370 | +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% | |
| 5371 | +\fi% | |
| 5372 | +% a control space will come in as a macro | |
| 5373 | +% when it is the last one on a line | |
| 5374 | +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO% | |
| 5375 | +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% | |
| 5376 | +\fi% | |
| 5377 | +% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one | |
| 5378 | +% else spit it out and stop gobbling | |
| 5379 | +\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else% | |
| 5380 | +\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi% | |
| 5381 | +\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}% | |
| 5382 | + | |
| 5383 | + | |
| 5384 | + | |
| 5385 | + | |
| 5386 | +% TITLING OF SECTIONS | |
| 5387 | +\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are | |
| 5388 | + % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space | |
| 5389 | + % spacing from section number to title | |
| 5390 | +% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation | |
| 5391 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 5392 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference | |
| 5393 | +\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ } | |
| 5394 | +\fi\fi | |
| 5395 | + | |
| 5396 | + | |
| 5397 | +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax} | |
| 5398 | + | |
| 5399 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 5400 | +% compsoc journals need extra spacing | |
| 5401 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else | |
| 5402 | +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax} | |
| 5403 | +\fi\fi | |
| 5404 | + | |
| 5405 | +%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control | |
| 5406 | +%and use \@@par rather than \par | |
| 5407 | +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% | |
| 5408 | + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth | |
| 5409 | + \let\@svsec\@empty | |
| 5410 | + \else | |
| 5411 | + \refstepcounter{#1}% | |
| 5412 | + % load section label and spacer into \@svsec | |
| 5413 | + \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% | |
| 5414 | + \fi% | |
| 5415 | + \@tempskipa #5\relax | |
| 5416 | + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high | |
| 5417 | + \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading | |
| 5418 | + \noindent % subsections are NOT indented | |
| 5419 | + % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title | |
| 5420 | + % The IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal | |
| 5421 | + {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}% | |
| 5422 | + \endgroup | |
| 5423 | + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else | |
| 5424 | + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}% | |
| 5425 | + \else % printout low level headings | |
| 5426 | + % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} | |
| 5427 | + % got rid of sectionmark stuff | |
| 5428 | + \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}% | |
| 5429 | + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else | |
| 5430 | + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}% | |
| 5431 | + \fi%skip down | |
| 5432 | + \@xsect{#5}} | |
| 5433 | + | |
| 5434 | + | |
| 5435 | +% section* handler | |
| 5436 | +%v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control | |
| 5437 | +%and use \@@par rather than \par | |
| 5438 | +\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax | |
| 5439 | + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ | |
| 5440 | + %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup | |
| 5441 | + % The IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal | |
| 5442 | + \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup | |
| 5443 | + % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} | |
| 5444 | + \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi | |
| 5445 | + \@xsect{#3}} | |
| 5446 | + | |
| 5447 | + | |
| 5448 | +%% SECTION heading spacing and font | |
| 5449 | +%% | |
| 5450 | +% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name | |
| 5451 | +% (for \@sect) #2 - section level | |
| 5452 | +% #3 - section heading indent | |
| 5453 | +% #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text) | |
| 5454 | +% If negative, make stretch parts negative too! | |
| 5455 | +% #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading, | |
| 5456 | +% negative: amount to indent main text after heading | |
| 5457 | +% Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation | |
| 5458 | +% #6 - font control | |
| 5459 | +% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent | |
| 5460 | +% trouble when you do something like: | |
| 5461 | +% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... | |
| 5462 | +% The IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section | |
| 5463 | +% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good | |
| 5464 | +% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber. | |
| 5465 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% | |
| 5466 | +% The IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode | |
| 5467 | +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% | |
| 5468 | +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% | |
| 5469 | +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% | |
| 5470 | +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% | |
| 5471 | +\else % for journals | |
| 5472 | +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex | |
| 5473 | +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% | |
| 5474 | +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% | |
| 5475 | +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% | |
| 5476 | +\fi | |
| 5477 | + | |
| 5478 | +% for both journals and conferences | |
| 5479 | +% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody | |
| 5480 | +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% | |
| 5481 | +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% | |
| 5482 | +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% | |
| 5483 | +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% | |
| 5484 | + | |
| 5485 | + | |
| 5486 | +% compsoc | |
| 5487 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 5488 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference | |
| 5489 | +% compsoc conference | |
| 5490 | +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% | |
| 5491 | +{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}% | |
| 5492 | +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% | |
| 5493 | +{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}% | |
| 5494 | +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% | |
| 5495 | +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}% | |
| 5496 | +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% | |
| 5497 | +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% | |
| 5498 | +\else% compsoc journals | |
| 5499 | +% use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles | |
| 5500 | +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}% | |
| 5501 | +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\sublargesize\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}% | |
| 5502 | +% Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society, | |
| 5503 | +% I have to look up an example. | |
| 5504 | +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}% | |
| 5505 | +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}% | |
| 5506 | +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}% | |
| 5507 | +{0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}% | |
| 5508 | +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}% | |
| 5509 | +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% | |
| 5510 | +\fi\fi | |
| 5511 | + | |
| 5512 | +% transmag | |
| 5513 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag | |
| 5514 | +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{0.75\parindent}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% | |
| 5515 | +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% | |
| 5516 | +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{1.25\parindent}{0.1ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% | |
| 5517 | +{0.1ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% | |
| 5518 | +\fi | |
| 5519 | + | |
| 5520 | + | |
| 5521 | +% V1.8a provide for a raised line Introduction section for use with Computer | |
| 5522 | +% Society papers. We have to remove any spacing glue after the section | |
| 5523 | +% heading and then remove the blank line for the new paragraph after it. | |
| 5524 | +% LaTeX's section handler alters \everypar and we need to propogate those | |
| 5525 | +% changes outside of the \parbox lest there be spacing problems at the top | |
| 5526 | +% of the next section. | |
| 5527 | +\def\IEEEraisesectionheading#1{\noindent\raisebox{1.5\baselineskip}[0pt][0pt]{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{#1\unskip\global\everypar=\everypar}}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\vspace{-\parskip}\par} | |
| 5528 | + | |
| 5529 | + | |
| 5530 | + | |
| 5531 | +%% ENVIRONMENTS | |
| 5532 | +% "box" symbols at end of proofs | |
| 5533 | +\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box | |
| 5534 | +% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one | |
| 5535 | +\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}} | |
| 5536 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 5537 | +\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc | |
| 5538 | +\else | |
| 5539 | +\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed | |
| 5540 | +\fi | |
| 5541 | + | |
| 5542 | +%V1.8 flag to indicate if QED symbol is to be shown | |
| 5543 | +\newif\if@IEEEQEDshow \@IEEEQEDshowtrue | |
| 5544 | +\def\IEEEproofindentspace{2\parindent}% V1.8 allow user to change indentation amount if desired | |
| 5545 | +% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support | |
| 5546 | +% for an optional argument. | |
| 5547 | +\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}} | |
| 5548 | +\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\@IEEEQEDshowtrue\par\noindent\hspace{\IEEEproofindentspace}{\itshape #1: }} | |
| 5549 | +\def\endIEEEproof{\if@IEEEQEDshow\hspace*{\fill}\nobreakspace\IEEEQED\fi\par} | |
| 5550 | +% qedhere for equation environments, similar to AMS \qedhere | |
| 5551 | +\def\IEEEQEDhereeqn{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse\eqno\let\eqno\relax\let\leqno\relax | |
| 5552 | + \let\veqno\relax\hbox{\IEEEQED}} | |
| 5553 | +% IEEE style qedhere for IEEEeqnarray and other environments | |
| 5554 | +\def\IEEEQEDhere{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse\IEEEQED} | |
| 5555 | +% command to disable QED at end of IEEEproof | |
| 5556 | +\def\IEEEQEDoff{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse} | |
| 5557 | + | |
| 5558 | + | |
| 5559 | +%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable | |
| 5560 | +\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent | |
| 5561 | + | |
| 5562 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 5563 | +% V1.8a compsoc uses bold theorem titles, a period instead of a colon, vertical spacing, and hanging indentation | |
| 5564 | +% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines. | |
| 5565 | +% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this. | |
| 5566 | +\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax | |
| 5567 | + \topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip | |
| 5568 | + \rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent% | |
| 5569 | + \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2.} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax} | |
| 5570 | +\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax | |
| 5571 | +\topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip | |
| 5572 | +\rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent% | |
| 5573 | +% V1.6 The IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics | |
| 5574 | +% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. | |
| 5575 | + \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2\ (#3).} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax} | |
| 5576 | +% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with | |
| 5577 | +% lines below. | |
| 5578 | +\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist\vskip 0.25\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} | |
| 5579 | +\else | |
| 5580 | +% | |
| 5581 | +% noncompsoc | |
| 5582 | +% | |
| 5583 | +% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines. | |
| 5584 | +% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this. | |
| 5585 | +\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist% | |
| 5586 | + \item[]\textit{\indent #1\ #2:} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax} | |
| 5587 | +\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist% | |
| 5588 | +% V1.6 The IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics | |
| 5589 | +% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. | |
| 5590 | + \item[]\textit{\indent #1\ #2\ (#3):} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax} | |
| 5591 | +% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with | |
| 5592 | +% lines below. | |
| 5593 | +\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist} | |
| 5594 | +\fi | |
| 5595 | + | |
| 5596 | + | |
| 5597 | + | |
| 5598 | +% V1.6 | |
| 5599 | +% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection | |
| 5600 | +% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic. | |
| 5601 | +% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number | |
| 5602 | +% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator. | |
| 5603 | +% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection | |
| 5604 | +% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed. | |
| 5605 | +% | |
| 5606 | +% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override | |
| 5607 | +\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}} | |
| 5608 | +% string macro | |
| 5609 | +\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section} | |
| 5610 | + | |
| 5611 | +% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection | |
| 5612 | +% if section in_counter is used | |
| 5613 | +\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% | |
| 5614 | + \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname | |
| 5615 | + {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]% | |
| 5616 | + \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3} | |
| 5617 | + \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection | |
| 5618 | + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% | |
| 5619 | + \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep | |
| 5620 | + \@thmcounter{#1}}% | |
| 5621 | + \else | |
| 5622 | + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% | |
| 5623 | + \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep | |
| 5624 | + \@thmcounter{#1}}% | |
| 5625 | + \fi | |
| 5626 | + \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% | |
| 5627 | + \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} | |
| 5628 | + | |
| 5629 | + | |
| 5630 | + | |
| 5631 | +%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE | |
| 5632 | +\pagestyle{headings} | |
| 5633 | +\pagenumbering{arabic} | |
| 5634 | + | |
| 5635 | +% normally the page counter starts at 1 | |
| 5636 | +\setcounter{page}{1} | |
| 5637 | +% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1 | |
| 5638 | +% (for duplex printing) | |
| 5639 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview | |
| 5640 | + \if@twoside | |
| 5641 | + \setcounter{page}{-1} | |
| 5642 | + \else | |
| 5643 | + \setcounter{page}{0} | |
| 5644 | + \fi | |
| 5645 | +\fi | |
| 5646 | + | |
| 5647 | +% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as | |
| 5648 | +% needed when single sided | |
| 5649 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi | |
| 5650 | +% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and | |
| 5651 | +% enforce a rigid position for the last lines | |
| 5652 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn | |
| 5653 | +% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn | |
| 5654 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else | |
| 5655 | + \twocolumn | |
| 5656 | + \fi | |
| 5657 | +\sloppy | |
| 5658 | +\flushbottom | |
| 5659 | +\fi | |
| 5660 | + | |
| 5661 | + | |
| 5662 | + | |
| 5663 | + | |
| 5664 | +% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions | |
| 5665 | + | |
| 5666 | +% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package | |
| 5667 | +% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau | |
| 5668 | +% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command | |
| 5669 | +% is present or not. | |
| 5670 | +% For instance: | |
| 5671 | +% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}} | |
| 5672 | +% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if | |
| 5673 | +% \appendices is invoked. | |
| 5674 | +% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending | |
| 5675 | +% on whether the user specifies a title: | |
| 5676 | +% \section{My appendix title} | |
| 5677 | +% or not: | |
| 5678 | +% \section{} | |
| 5679 | +% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title | |
| 5680 | +% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of | |
| 5681 | +% contents | |
| 5682 | +\begingroup | |
| 5683 | +\catcode`\Q=3 | |
| 5684 | +\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} | |
| 5685 | +\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} | |
| 5686 | +\endgroup | |
| 5687 | +% end of \@ifmtarg defs | |
| 5688 | + | |
| 5689 | + | |
| 5690 | +% V1.7 | |
| 5691 | +% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition | |
| 5692 | +% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices | |
| 5693 | +% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other | |
| 5694 | +% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.) | |
| 5695 | +\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section | |
| 5696 | +\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax} | |
| 5697 | + | |
| 5698 | +% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument} | |
| 5699 | +% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no | |
| 5700 | +% argument (title) | |
| 5701 | +% note we reroute the call to the old \section* | |
| 5702 | +\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{% | |
| 5703 | +\@ifmtarg{#1}{% | |
| 5704 | +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesectiondis}% | |
| 5705 | +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesection}}{% | |
| 5706 | +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesectiondis\\* #1}% | |
| 5707 | +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesection: #1}}} | |
| 5708 | + | |
| 5709 | +% we use this if the user calls \section{} after | |
| 5710 | +% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the | |
| 5711 | +% command and its argument. Then, warn the user. | |
| 5712 | +\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless | |
| 5713 | +\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}} | |
| 5714 | + | |
| 5715 | + | |
| 5716 | +% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls | |
| 5717 | +% and in the Table of Contents. | |
| 5718 | +% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself | |
| 5719 | + | |
| 5720 | +% appendix command for one single appendix | |
| 5721 | +% normally has no heading. However, if you want a | |
| 5722 | +% heading, you can do so via the optional argument: | |
| 5723 | +% \appendix[Optional Heading] | |
| 5724 | +\def\appendix{\relax} | |
| 5725 | +\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par | |
| 5726 | + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique | |
| 5727 | + \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}% | |
| 5728 | + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section | |
| 5729 | + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% | |
| 5730 | + \setcounter{section}{0}% | |
| 5731 | + \setcounter{subsection}{0}% | |
| 5732 | + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% | |
| 5733 | + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% | |
| 5734 | + \gdef\thesection{A}% | |
| 5735 | + \gdef\thesectiondis{}% | |
| 5736 | + \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}% | |
| 5737 | + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A} | |
| 5738 | + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter | |
| 5739 | + \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}% | |
| 5740 | + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{% | |
| 5741 | + \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\\* #1}% | |
| 5742 | + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}% | |
| 5743 | + % redefine \section command for appendix | |
| 5744 | + % leave \section* as is | |
| 5745 | + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% | |
| 5746 | + \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument | |
| 5747 | + % of the normal form | |
| 5748 | +} | |
| 5749 | + | |
| 5750 | + | |
| 5751 | + | |
| 5752 | +% appendices command for multiple appendices | |
| 5753 | +% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to | |
| 5754 | +% declare the individual appendices | |
| 5755 | +\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par | |
| 5756 | + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique | |
| 5757 | + \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}% | |
| 5758 | + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section | |
| 5759 | + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% | |
| 5760 | + \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0 | |
| 5761 | + \setcounter{subsection}{0}% | |
| 5762 | + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% | |
| 5763 | + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% | |
| 5764 | + \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices% | |
| 5765 | + \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}% | |
| 5766 | + \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}% | |
| 5767 | + \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}% | |
| 5768 | + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}} | |
| 5769 | + \else% | |
| 5770 | + \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}% | |
| 5771 | + \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}% | |
| 5772 | + \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}% | |
| 5773 | + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}} | |
| 5774 | + \fi% | |
| 5775 | + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter | |
| 5776 | + \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix | |
| 5777 | + % redefine \section command for appendices | |
| 5778 | + % leave \section* as is | |
| 5779 | + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form | |
| 5780 | + \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so, | |
| 5781 | + \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument | |
| 5782 | + % of the normal form | |
| 5783 | +} | |
| 5784 | + | |
| 5785 | + | |
| 5786 | + | |
| 5787 | +% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style | |
| 5788 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 5789 | + \def\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries} | |
| 5790 | + \def\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape} | |
| 5791 | + \def\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax} | |
| 5792 | +\fi | |
| 5793 | +% | |
| 5794 | +% | |
| 5795 | +% \IEEEPARstart | |
| 5796 | +% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the | |
| 5797 | +% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter | |
| 5798 | +% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the | |
| 5799 | +% first word which will be rendered in upper case. | |
| 5800 | +% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to: | |
| 5801 | +% | |
| 5802 | +% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment | |
| 5803 | +% within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart. | |
| 5804 | +% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family | |
| 5805 | +% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that | |
| 5806 | +% interword glue will now work as normal. | |
| 5807 | +% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. | |
| 5808 | +% | |
| 5809 | +% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too. | |
| 5810 | +% | |
| 5811 | +% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users | |
| 5812 | +% to change the font style. | |
| 5813 | +% | |
| 5814 | +% the number of lines that are indented to clear it | |
| 5815 | +% may need to increase if using decenders | |
| 5816 | +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES}{2} | |
| 5817 | +% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart | |
| 5818 | +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to | |
| 5819 | +% be overly cautious | |
| 5820 | +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES}{2} | |
| 5821 | +% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text | |
| 5822 | +% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called). | |
| 5823 | +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}{T} | |
| 5824 | +% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline | |
| 5825 | +% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum | |
| 5826 | +% of this value and the height of the \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current | |
| 5827 | +% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip | |
| 5828 | +% so that it can respond to changes therein. | |
| 5829 | +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}{1.1\baselineskip} | |
| 5830 | +% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in, | |
| 5831 | +% can take zero or one argument. | |
| 5832 | +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE}{\bfseries} | |
| 5833 | +% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify | |
| 5834 | +% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument. | |
| 5835 | +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE}{\MakeUppercase} | |
| 5836 | +% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word, | |
| 5837 | +% can take zero or one argument. | |
| 5838 | +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE}{\relax} | |
| 5839 | +% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify | |
| 5840 | +% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument. | |
| 5841 | +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE}{\MakeUppercase} | |
| 5842 | +% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text. | |
| 5843 | +% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced | |
| 5844 | +% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. | |
| 5845 | +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartSEP}{0.15em} | |
| 5846 | +% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap. | |
| 5847 | +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}{0em} | |
| 5848 | +% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap. | |
| 5849 | +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}{\/} | |
| 5850 | + | |
| 5851 | +% width of the letter output, set globally. Can be used in \IEEEPARstartSEP | |
| 5852 | +% or \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET, but not the height lengths. | |
| 5853 | +\newdimen\IEEEPARstartletwidth | |
| 5854 | +\IEEEPARstartletwidth 0pt\relax | |
| 5855 | + | |
| 5856 | +% definition of \IEEEPARstart | |
| 5857 | +% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES | |
| 5858 | +% | |
| 5859 | +% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use | |
| 5860 | +% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter | |
| 5861 | +% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second | |
| 5862 | +% argument is the rest of the first word(s). | |
| 5863 | +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{% | |
| 5864 | +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start | |
| 5865 | +% on a new one | |
| 5866 | +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}% | |
| 5867 | +% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE | |
| 5868 | +% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued | |
| 5869 | +\noindent | |
| 5870 | +% calculate the desired height of the big letter | |
| 5871 | +% it extends from the top of \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font | |
| 5872 | +% down to \IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline | |
| 5873 | +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}% | |
| 5874 | +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}% | |
| 5875 | +% extract the name of the current font in bold | |
| 5876 | +% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME | |
| 5877 | +\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}% | |
| 5878 | +{\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}% | |
| 5879 | +\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}% | |
| 5880 | +% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired | |
| 5881 | +% height of the drop letter | |
| 5882 | +\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% | |
| 5883 | +% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points) | |
| 5884 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% | |
| 5885 | +% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size | |
| 5886 | +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}% | |
| 5887 | +% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the | |
| 5888 | +% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height. | |
| 5889 | +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax% | |
| 5890 | +\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}% | |
| 5891 | +\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}% | |
| 5892 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt% | |
| 5893 | +\fi% | |
| 5894 | +% and store it as a counter | |
| 5895 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% | |
| 5896 | +% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital | |
| 5897 | +% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB, | |
| 5898 | +% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA | |
| 5899 | +% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 5900 | +% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB | |
| 5901 | +% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer | |
| 5902 | +% division. Hence the use of the counters. | |
| 5903 | +% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will | |
| 5904 | +% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result | |
| 5905 | +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200% | |
| 5906 | +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB% | |
| 5907 | +% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by | |
| 5908 | +% floating point values | |
| 5909 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% | |
| 5910 | +\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% | |
| 5911 | +% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter | |
| 5912 | +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the | |
| 5913 | +% big letter. | |
| 5914 | +\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% | |
| 5915 | +% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter | |
| 5916 | +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the | |
| 5917 | +% hanging indent | |
| 5918 | +\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont | |
| 5919 | +\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}% | |
| 5920 | +% end of the isolated calculation environment | |
| 5921 | +\global\IEEEPARstartletwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% | |
| 5922 | +% add in the extra clearance we want | |
| 5923 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEPARstartSEP\relax% | |
| 5924 | +% add in the optional offset | |
| 5925 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax% | |
| 5926 | +% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents | |
| 5927 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA | |
| 5928 | +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi | |
| 5929 | +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the | |
| 5930 | +% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use | |
| 5931 | +% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command | |
| 5932 | +% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other | |
| 5933 | +% text won't be displaced by it. | |
| 5934 | +\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES% | |
| 5935 | +\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% | |
| 5936 | +\raisebox{-\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}% | |
| 5937 | +\@IEEEPARstartfont\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}% | |
| 5938 | +\hspace{\IEEEPARstartSEP}}}% | |
| 5939 | +{\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}} | |
| 5940 | + | |
| 5941 | + | |
| 5942 | + | |
| 5943 | + | |
| 5944 | +% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater | |
| 5945 | +% than the specified space of argument one | |
| 5946 | +% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero) | |
| 5947 | +% and issue a \newpage | |
| 5948 | +% | |
| 5949 | +% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill} | |
| 5950 | +% | |
| 5951 | +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to | |
| 5952 | +% be overly cautious | |
| 5953 | +% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau | |
| 5954 | +% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations, | |
| 5955 | +% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine | |
| 5956 | +% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead | |
| 5957 | +\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable | |
| 5958 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left | |
| 5959 | +\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left | |
| 5960 | +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi% | |
| 5961 | +\newpage% | |
| 5962 | +\fi\endgroup} | |
| 5963 | + | |
| 5964 | + | |
| 5965 | + | |
| 5966 | +% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT | |
| 5967 | +% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size) | |
| 5968 | +% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic! | |
| 5969 | +% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a | |
| 5970 | +% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo. | |
| 5971 | +% MDS 7/2001 | |
| 5972 | +% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries | |
| 5973 | +\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade | |
| 5974 | +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue | |
| 5975 | + | |
| 5976 | +% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies | |
| 5977 | +% and not just the previous section | |
| 5978 | +\newcounter{IEEEbiography} | |
| 5979 | +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0} | |
| 5980 | + | |
| 5981 | +% photo area size | |
| 5982 | +\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area | |
| 5983 | +\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area | |
| 5984 | +% area cleared for photo | |
| 5985 | +\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area | |
| 5986 | +\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area | |
| 5987 | + % actual depth will be a multiple of | |
| 5988 | + % \baselineskip, rounded up | |
| 5989 | +\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography | |
| 5990 | + | |
| 5991 | +\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize% | |
| 5992 | +\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500% | |
| 5993 | +% we need enough space to support the hanging indent | |
| 5994 | +% the nominal value of the spacer | |
| 5995 | +% and one extra line for good measure | |
| 5996 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% | |
| 5997 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN% | |
| 5998 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip% | |
| 5999 | +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start | |
| 6000 | +% with a new one | |
| 6001 | +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}% | |
| 6002 | +% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill | |
| 6003 | +\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% | |
| 6004 | +% the default box for where the photo goes | |
| 6005 | +\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{% | |
| 6006 | +\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}% | |
| 6007 | +% | |
| 6008 | +% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the | |
| 6009 | +% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above | |
| 6010 | +% and if so, override the default box with what they want | |
| 6011 | +\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}% | |
| 6012 | +\centering% | |
| 6013 | +#1% | |
| 6014 | +\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied | |
| 6015 | +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before | |
| 6016 | +\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% | |
| 6017 | +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump | |
| 6018 | +% to the biography, not the previous section | |
| 6019 | +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% | |
| 6020 | +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% | |
| 6021 | +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% | |
| 6022 | +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% | |
| 6023 | +\fi% | |
| 6024 | +% one more biography | |
| 6025 | +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% | |
| 6026 | +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents | |
| 6027 | +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}% | |
| 6028 | +% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the | |
| 6029 | +% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so | |
| 6030 | +% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the | |
| 6031 | +% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces. | |
| 6032 | +\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command | |
| 6033 | +\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par | |
| 6034 | +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box | |
| 6035 | +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% | |
| 6036 | +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth | |
| 6037 | +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth | |
| 6038 | +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate | |
| 6039 | +% set the hanging indent | |
| 6040 | +\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth% | |
| 6041 | +\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% | |
| 6042 | +% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T | |
| 6043 | +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}% | |
| 6044 | +% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything | |
| 6045 | +\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{% | |
| 6046 | +\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}% | |
| 6047 | +% now place the author name and begin the bio text | |
| 6048 | +\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par% | |
| 6049 | +% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area | |
| 6050 | +% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry | |
| 6051 | +% MDS | |
| 6052 | +\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo | |
| 6053 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad | |
| 6054 | + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line | |
| 6055 | + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding | |
| 6056 | + \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% | |
| 6057 | + \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut | |
| 6058 | +\fi% | |
| 6059 | +\par\normalfont} | |
| 6060 | + | |
| 6061 | + | |
| 6062 | + | |
| 6063 | +% V1.6 | |
| 6064 | +% added biography without a photo environment | |
| 6065 | +\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{% | |
| 6066 | +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before | |
| 6067 | +\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% | |
| 6068 | +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump | |
| 6069 | +% to the biography, not the previous section | |
| 6070 | +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% | |
| 6071 | +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% | |
| 6072 | +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% | |
| 6073 | +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% | |
| 6074 | +\fi% | |
| 6075 | +% one more biography | |
| 6076 | +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% | |
| 6077 | +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents | |
| 6078 | +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}% | |
| 6079 | +\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500% | |
| 6080 | +\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% | |
| 6081 | +\parskip=0pt\par% | |
| 6082 | +\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont} | |
| 6083 | + | |
| 6084 | + | |
| 6085 | +% provide the user with some old font commands | |
| 6086 | +% got this from article.cls | |
| 6087 | +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} | |
| 6088 | +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} | |
| 6089 | +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} | |
| 6090 | +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} | |
| 6091 | +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} | |
| 6092 | +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} | |
| 6093 | +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} | |
| 6094 | +\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} | |
| 6095 | +\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} | |
| 6096 | + | |
| 6097 | + | |
| 6098 | +% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS | |
| 6099 | +% | |
| 6100 | +% holds the special notice text | |
| 6101 | +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax} | |
| 6102 | + | |
| 6103 | +% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do: | |
| 6104 | +% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle | |
| 6105 | +\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% | |
| 6106 | +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}% | |
| 6107 | +\else% | |
| 6108 | +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}% | |
| 6109 | +\fi} | |
| 6110 | + | |
| 6111 | + | |
| 6112 | + | |
| 6113 | + | |
| 6114 | +% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS | |
| 6115 | +% to insert a publisher's ID footer | |
| 6116 | +% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style | |
| 6117 | +% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle | |
| 6118 | +% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page | |
| 6119 | +% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into | |
| 6120 | +% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author | |
| 6121 | +% names and the maintext. | |
| 6122 | +% | |
| 6123 | +% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the | |
| 6124 | +% publisher's ID footer | |
| 6125 | +% The IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, | |
| 6126 | +% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction | |
| 6127 | +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip} | |
| 6128 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote | |
| 6129 | +% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no | |
| 6130 | +% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the | |
| 6131 | +% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the | |
| 6132 | +% second column | |
| 6133 | +% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on | |
| 6134 | +% Information Theory") in which the IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for | |
| 6135 | +% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip | |
| 6136 | +% and call it even. | |
| 6137 | +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip} | |
| 6138 | +\fi | |
| 6139 | + | |
| 6140 | +% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup | |
| 6141 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 6142 | +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt} | |
| 6143 | +\fi | |
| 6144 | + | |
| 6145 | +% holds the ID text | |
| 6146 | +\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax} | |
| 6147 | + | |
| 6148 | +% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called | |
| 6149 | +\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid | |
| 6150 | +\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse | |
| 6151 | +% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom | |
| 6152 | +% V1.6 use before \maketitle | |
| 6153 | +\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue} | |
| 6154 | + | |
| 6155 | + | |
| 6156 | +% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in | |
| 6157 | +% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of | |
| 6158 | +% the title page when using \IEEEpubid | |
| 6159 | +% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or | |
| 6160 | +% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid | |
| 6161 | +% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the | |
| 6162 | +% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this | |
| 6163 | +% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility | |
| 6164 | +% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been | |
| 6165 | +% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page. | |
| 6166 | +% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc | |
| 6167 | +\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else | |
| 6168 | +\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi} | |
| 6169 | + | |
| 6170 | +% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other | |
| 6171 | +% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to | |
| 6172 | +% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX. | |
| 6173 | + | |
| 6174 | + | |
| 6175 | + | |
| 6176 | +%% Lockout some commands under various conditions | |
| 6177 | + | |
| 6178 | +% general purpose bit bucket | |
| 6179 | +\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin} | |
| 6180 | + | |
| 6181 | +% flags to prevent multiple warning messages | |
| 6182 | +\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks | |
| 6183 | +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart | |
| 6184 | +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography | |
| 6185 | +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto | |
| 6186 | +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid | |
| 6187 | +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol | |
| 6188 | +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership | |
| 6189 | +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext | |
| 6190 | +\@IEEEWARNthankstrue | |
| 6191 | +\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue | |
| 6192 | +\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue | |
| 6193 | +\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue | |
| 6194 | +\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue | |
| 6195 | +\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue | |
| 6196 | +\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue | |
| 6197 | +\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue | |
| 6198 | + | |
| 6199 | + | |
| 6200 | +%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed | |
| 6201 | +%% | |
| 6202 | +% save commands which might be locked out | |
| 6203 | +% so that the user can later restore them if needed | |
| 6204 | +\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks | |
| 6205 | +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart | |
| 6206 | +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography | |
| 6207 | +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography | |
| 6208 | +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto | |
| 6209 | +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto | |
| 6210 | +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid | |
| 6211 | +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol | |
| 6212 | +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership | |
| 6213 | +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext | |
| 6214 | + | |
| 6215 | + | |
| 6216 | +% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode | |
| 6217 | +% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter | |
| 6218 | +% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch | |
| 6219 | +% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft | |
| 6220 | +% paper. | |
| 6221 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls | |
| 6222 | +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart | |
| 6223 | + is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} | |
| 6224 | +\fi | |
| 6225 | +% and for technotes | |
| 6226 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote | |
| 6227 | +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart | |
| 6228 | + is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} | |
| 6229 | +\fi | |
| 6230 | + | |
| 6231 | + | |
| 6232 | +% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode | |
| 6233 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference | |
| 6234 | +% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid, | |
| 6235 | +% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. | |
| 6236 | +% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead | |
| 6237 | +% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen | |
| 6238 | +% from filling up with redundant messages | |
| 6239 | +\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks | |
| 6240 | + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse} | |
| 6241 | +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart | |
| 6242 | + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} | |
| 6243 | + | |
| 6244 | + | |
| 6245 | +% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently. | |
| 6246 | +% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname | |
| 6247 | +% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname ) | |
| 6248 | +% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine | |
| 6249 | +% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the | |
| 6250 | +% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command | |
| 6251 | +% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX | |
| 6252 | +% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break. | |
| 6253 | +% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal | |
| 6254 | +% name can be left undisturbed. | |
| 6255 | +\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography | |
| 6256 | + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse% | |
| 6257 | +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} | |
| 6258 | +% and make biography point to our bogus biography | |
| 6259 | +\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography | |
| 6260 | +\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography | |
| 6261 | + | |
| 6262 | +\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto | |
| 6263 | + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse% | |
| 6264 | +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} | |
| 6265 | + | |
| 6266 | +\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid | |
| 6267 | + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse} | |
| 6268 | +\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol | |
| 6269 | + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse} | |
| 6270 | +\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership | |
| 6271 | + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse} | |
| 6272 | +\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext | |
| 6273 | + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse} | |
| 6274 | +\fi | |
| 6275 | + | |
| 6276 | + | |
| 6277 | +% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out | |
| 6278 | +\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{% | |
| 6279 | +\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}% | |
| 6280 | +\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks% | |
| 6281 | +\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart% | |
| 6282 | +\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography% | |
| 6283 | +\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography% | |
| 6284 | +\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto% | |
| 6285 | +\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto% | |
| 6286 | +\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid% | |
| 6287 | +\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol% | |
| 6288 | +\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership% | |
| 6289 | +\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext} | |
| 6290 | + | |
| 6291 | + | |
| 6292 | + | |
| 6293 | +% need a backslash character for typeout output | |
| 6294 | +{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12 | |
| 6295 | +|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}} | |
| 6296 | + | |
| 6297 | + | |
| 6298 | +% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings | |
| 6299 | +\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno). | |
| 6300 | +Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}} | |
| 6301 | + | |
| 6302 | + | |
| 6303 | +% provide some legacy IEEEtran commands | |
| 6304 | +\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\IEEEtitleabstractindextext} | |
| 6305 | +\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext}\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext} | |
| 6306 | +% provide some legacy IEEEtran environments | |
| 6307 | + | |
| 6308 | + | |
| 6309 | +% V1.8a no more support for these legacy commands | |
| 6310 | +%\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA} | |
| 6311 | +%\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN} | |
| 6312 | +%\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark} | |
| 6313 | +%\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} | |
| 6314 | +%\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid} | |
| 6315 | +%\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol} | |
| 6316 | +%\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice} | |
| 6317 | +% and environments | |
| 6318 | +%\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords} | |
| 6319 | +%\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords} | |
| 6320 | +% V1.8 no more support for legacy IED list commands | |
| 6321 | +%\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent | |
| 6322 | +%\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin} | |
| 6323 | +%\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth} | |
| 6324 | +%\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep} | |
| 6325 | +%\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc} | |
| 6326 | +%\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl} | |
| 6327 | +%\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr} | |
| 6328 | +% V1.8 no more support for QED and proof stuff | |
| 6329 | +%\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED} | |
| 6330 | +%\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed} | |
| 6331 | +%\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen} | |
| 6332 | +%\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}} | |
| 6333 | +% V1.8 no longer support biography or biographynophoto | |
| 6334 | +%\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography} | |
| 6335 | +%\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto} | |
| 6336 | +%\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography} | |
| 6337 | +%\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto} | |
| 6338 | +% V1.7 and later no longer supports \overrideIEEEmargins | |
| 6339 | +%\def\overrideIEEEmargins{% | |
| 6340 | +%\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}% | |
| 6341 | +%\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}} | |
| 6342 | + | |
| 6343 | +\endinput | |
| 6344 | + | |
| 6345 | +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% | |
| 6346 | +% That's all folks! | |
| 6347 | + | ... | ... |
IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf
0 → 100644
No preview for this file type
README
0 → 100644
| 1 | +++ a/README | |
| 1 | + | |
| 2 | +August 26, 2015 | |
| 3 | + | |
| 4 | + | |
| 5 | +IEEEtran is a LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of Electrical and | |
| 6 | +Electronics Engineers (IEEE) transactions journals and conferences. | |
| 7 | +The latest version of the IEEEtran package can be found at CTAN: | |
| 8 | + | |
| 9 | +http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran | |
| 10 | + | |
| 11 | +as well as within IEEE's site: | |
| 12 | + | |
| 13 | +http://www.ieee.org/ | |
| 14 | + | |
| 15 | + | |
| 16 | +This package contains the IEEE Computer Society subset of the full IEEEtran | |
| 17 | +package and is intended for use with IEEE Computer Society publications. | |
| 18 | +The included version of the IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf has been specially formatted | |
| 19 | +in IEEE Computer Society (compsoc) journal mode. | |
| 20 | + | |
| 21 | + | |
| 22 | +For latest news, helpful tips, answers to frequently asked questions, | |
| 23 | +beta releases and other support, visit the IEEEtran home page at my | |
| 24 | +website: | |
| 25 | + | |
| 26 | +http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ | |
| 27 | + | |
| 28 | +Version 1.8b has a number of significant changes over the v1.8a release. | |
| 29 | +For a full history of changes, please read the file changelog.txt. | |
| 30 | +The most notable changes in this release include: | |
| 31 | + | |
| 32 | + 1) Added new comsoc mode for the IEEE Communications Society. | |
| 33 | + This mode (at present) only invokes the use of the newtxmath math fonts. | |
| 34 | + | |
| 35 | + 2) Revised IEEEeqnarray column specifications to work with active " | |
| 36 | + (or other punctuation catcode changes) as with babel under the | |
| 37 | + german or ngerman language modes. | |
| 38 | + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem. | |
| 39 | + | |
| 40 | + 3) Added \indexspace and other index related macros as newer versions of | |
| 41 | + article.cls now do. These macros are needed to avoid an error when | |
| 42 | + using the glossaries package. | |
| 43 | + Thanks to Sebastian Nyberg for suggesting this change. | |
| 44 | + | |
| 45 | + 4) Fixed odd/even page header font bug under compsoc mode and | |
| 46 | + other page style code improvements. | |
| 47 | + Thanks to Marco Paolieri for reporting this problem. | |
| 48 | + | |
| 49 | + 5) Added hooks to allow for easy control of spacing above title. | |
| 50 | + | |
| 51 | + 6) Added the \IEEEnoauxwrite command. | |
| 52 | + Thanks to Sudarshan Mukherjee for suggesting this feature. | |
| 53 | + | |
| 54 | + | |
| 55 | +NOTE: Take care not to confuse the "comsoc" and "compsoc" class | |
| 56 | +options/modes as they are very different: | |
| 57 | + | |
| 58 | +comsoc ==> IEEE Communications Society | |
| 59 | +compsoc ==> IEEE Computer Society | |
| 60 | + | |
| 61 | +The comsoc mode requires that an acceptable Times math font be available on | |
| 62 | +the LaTeX system. This requirement will be enforced by IEEEtran in comsoc | |
| 63 | +mode. Either the freely available newtxmath font by Michael Sharpe | |
| 64 | +http://www.ctan.org/pkg/newtx | |
| 65 | +(version 1.451, July 28, 2015 or later is recommended) | |
| 66 | +or the commercial MathTime font (e.g., mtpro2.sty) is acceptable. | |
| 67 | +See Section II-D (2.4) "Class Options - comsoc, compsoc, transmag" of | |
| 68 | +the IEEEtran HOWTO for more details. | |
| 69 | + | |
| 70 | + | |
| 71 | +Best wishes for all your publication endeavors, | |
| 72 | + | |
| 73 | +Michael Shell | |
| 74 | +http://www.michaelshell.org/ | |
| 75 | + | |
| 76 | + | |
| 77 | +********************************** Files ********************************** | |
| 78 | + | |
| 79 | +README - This file. | |
| 80 | + | |
| 81 | +IEEEtran.cls - The IEEEtran LaTeX class file. | |
| 82 | + | |
| 83 | +changelog.txt - The revision history. | |
| 84 | + | |
| 85 | +IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf - The IEEEtran LaTeX class user manual. | |
| 86 | + | |
| 87 | +bare_conf_compsoc.tex - A bare bones starter file for IEEE Computer Society | |
| 88 | + conference papers. | |
| 89 | + | |
| 90 | +bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex - A bare bones starter file for IEEE Computer Society | |
| 91 | + journal papers. | |
| 92 | + | |
| 93 | +bare_adv.tex - A bare bones starter file showing advanced | |
| 94 | + techniques such as conditional compilation, | |
| 95 | + hyperlinks, PDF thumbnails, etc. The illustrated | |
| 96 | + format is for a IEEE Computer Society journal paper. | |
| 97 | + | |
| 98 | +*************************************************************************** | |
| 99 | +Legal Notice: | |
| 100 | +This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or | |
| 101 | +implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or | |
| 102 | +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! | |
| 103 | +User assumes all risk. | |
| 104 | +In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for | |
| 105 | +any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, | |
| 106 | +consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse | |
| 107 | +of any information contained here. | |
| 108 | + | |
| 109 | +All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not | |
| 110 | +necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. | |
| 111 | + | |
| 112 | +This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) | |
| 113 | +( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, | |
| 114 | +distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included | |
| 115 | +in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released | |
| 116 | +2003/12/01 or later. | |
| 117 | +Retain all contribution notices and credits. | |
| 118 | +** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** | |
| 119 | +** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** | |
| 120 | + | |
| 121 | +File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, | |
| 122 | + bare_conf_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex. | |
| 123 | +*************************************************************************** | ... | ... |
bare_adv.tex
0 → 100644
| 1 | +++ a/bare_adv.tex | |
| 1 | + | |
| 2 | +%% bare_adv.tex | |
| 3 | +%% V1.4b | |
| 4 | +%% 2015/08/26 | |
| 5 | +%% by Michael Shell | |
| 6 | +%% See: | |
| 7 | +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ | |
| 8 | +%% for current contact information. | |
| 9 | +%% | |
| 10 | +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the advanced use of IEEEtran.cls | |
| 11 | +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE Computer | |
| 12 | +%% Society journal paper. | |
| 13 | +%% | |
| 14 | +%% Support sites: | |
| 15 | +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ | |
| 16 | +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran | |
| 17 | +%% and | |
| 18 | +%% http://www.ieee.org/ | |
| 19 | + | |
| 20 | +%%************************************************************************* | |
| 21 | +%% Legal Notice: | |
| 22 | +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or | |
| 23 | +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or | |
| 24 | +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! | |
| 25 | +%% User assumes all risk. | |
| 26 | +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for | |
| 27 | +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, | |
| 28 | +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse | |
| 29 | +%% of any information contained here. | |
| 30 | +%% | |
| 31 | +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not | |
| 32 | +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. | |
| 33 | +%% | |
| 34 | +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) | |
| 35 | +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, | |
| 36 | +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included | |
| 37 | +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released | |
| 38 | +%% 2003/12/01 or later. | |
| 39 | +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. | |
| 40 | +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** | |
| 41 | +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** | |
| 42 | +%%************************************************************************* | |
| 43 | + | |
| 44 | + | |
| 45 | +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** | |
| 46 | +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** | |
| 47 | +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** | |
| 48 | +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** | |
| 49 | +% The testflow support page is at: | |
| 50 | +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ | |
| 51 | + | |
| 52 | + | |
| 53 | +% IEEEtran V1.7 and later provides for these CLASSINPUT macros to allow the | |
| 54 | +% user to reprogram some IEEEtran.cls defaults if needed. These settings | |
| 55 | +% override the internal defaults of IEEEtran.cls regardless of which class | |
| 56 | +% options are used. Do not use these unless you have good reason to do so as | |
| 57 | +% they can result in nonIEEE compliant documents. User beware. ;) | |
| 58 | +% | |
| 59 | +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch}{1.0} % baselinestretch | |
| 60 | +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{1in} % inner side margin | |
| 61 | +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}{1in} % outer side margin | |
| 62 | +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}{1in} % top text margin | |
| 63 | +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}{1in}% bottom text margin | |
| 64 | + | |
| 65 | + | |
| 66 | + | |
| 67 | + | |
| 68 | +% | |
| 69 | +\documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran} | |
| 70 | +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, | |
| 71 | +% manually specify the path to it like: | |
| 72 | +% \documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran} | |
| 73 | + | |
| 74 | + | |
| 75 | +% For Computer Society journals, IEEEtran defaults to the use of | |
| 76 | +% Palatino/Palladio as is done in IEEE Computer Society journals. | |
| 77 | +% To go back to Times Roman, you can use this code: | |
| 78 | +%\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}\selectfont | |
| 79 | + | |
| 80 | + | |
| 81 | + | |
| 82 | + | |
| 83 | + | |
| 84 | +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include: | |
| 85 | +% (uncomment the ones you want to load) | |
| 86 | + | |
| 87 | + | |
| 88 | + | |
| 89 | +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES *** | |
| 90 | +% | |
| 91 | +%\usepackage{ifpdf} | |
| 92 | +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional | |
| 93 | +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi. | |
| 94 | +% usage: | |
| 95 | +% \ifpdf | |
| 96 | +% % pdf code | |
| 97 | +% \else | |
| 98 | +% % dvi code | |
| 99 | +% \fi | |
| 100 | +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from: | |
| 101 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf | |
| 102 | +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin | |
| 103 | +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way. | |
| 104 | +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may | |
| 105 | +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages. | |
| 106 | + | |
| 107 | + | |
| 108 | + | |
| 109 | + | |
| 110 | + | |
| 111 | + | |
| 112 | +% *** CITATION PACKAGES *** | |
| 113 | +% | |
| 114 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 115 | + % The IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option | |
| 116 | + % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003) | |
| 117 | + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite} | |
| 118 | +\else | |
| 119 | + % normal IEEE | |
| 120 | + \usepackage{cite} | |
| 121 | +\fi | |
| 122 | +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau | |
| 123 | +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package | |
| 124 | +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will | |
| 125 | +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly | |
| 126 | +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using | |
| 127 | +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's | |
| 128 | +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's | |
| 129 | +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off | |
| 130 | +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. | |
| 131 | +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use | |
| 132 | +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. | |
| 133 | +% The latest version can be obtained at: | |
| 134 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite | |
| 135 | +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. | |
| 136 | +% | |
| 137 | +% Note that some packages require special options to format as the Computer | |
| 138 | +% Society requires. In particular, Computer Society papers do not use | |
| 139 | +% compressed citation ranges as is done in typical IEEE papers | |
| 140 | +% (e.g., [1]-[4]). Instead, they list every citation separately in order | |
| 141 | +% (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite | |
| 142 | +% package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0 | |
| 143 | +% and later. | |
| 144 | + | |
| 145 | + | |
| 146 | + | |
| 147 | + | |
| 148 | + | |
| 149 | +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES *** | |
| 150 | +% | |
| 151 | +\ifCLASSINFOpdf | |
| 152 | + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} | |
| 153 | + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are | |
| 154 | + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}} | |
| 155 | + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with | |
| 156 | + % every instance of \includegraphics | |
| 157 | + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png} | |
| 158 | +\else | |
| 159 | + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx | |
| 160 | + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no | |
| 161 | + % driver is specified. | |
| 162 | + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx} | |
| 163 | + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are | |
| 164 | + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}} | |
| 165 | + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with | |
| 166 | + % every instance of \includegraphics | |
| 167 | + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps} | |
| 168 | +\fi | |
| 169 | +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is | |
| 170 | +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already | |
| 171 | +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation | |
| 172 | +% can be obtained at: | |
| 173 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx | |
| 174 | +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in | |
| 175 | +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at: | |
| 176 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex | |
| 177 | +% | |
| 178 | +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated | |
| 179 | +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics | |
| 180 | +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure | |
| 181 | +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and | |
| 182 | +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats | |
| 183 | +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as | |
| 184 | +% well as large increases in file sizes. | |
| 185 | +% | |
| 186 | +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at: | |
| 187 | +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex | |
| 188 | + | |
| 189 | + | |
| 190 | + | |
| 191 | + | |
| 192 | + | |
| 193 | +% *** MATH PACKAGES *** | |
| 194 | +% | |
| 195 | +%\usepackage{amsmath} | |
| 196 | +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides | |
| 197 | +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. | |
| 198 | +% | |
| 199 | +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000 | |
| 200 | +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use: | |
| 201 | +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 | |
| 202 | +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally | |
| 203 | +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest | |
| 204 | +% version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 205 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath | |
| 206 | + | |
| 207 | + | |
| 208 | + | |
| 209 | + | |
| 210 | + | |
| 211 | +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES *** | |
| 212 | +%\usepackage{acronym} | |
| 213 | +% acronym.sty was written by Tobias Oetiker. This package provides tools for | |
| 214 | +% managing documents with large numbers of acronyms. (You don't *have* to | |
| 215 | +% use this package - unless you have a lot of acronyms, you may feel that | |
| 216 | +% such package management of them is bit of an overkill.) | |
| 217 | +% Do note that the acronym environment (which lists acronyms) will have a | |
| 218 | +% problem when used under IEEEtran.cls because acronym.sty relies on the | |
| 219 | +% description list environment - which IEEEtran.cls has customized for | |
| 220 | +% producing IEEE style lists. A workaround is to declared the longest | |
| 221 | +% label width via the IEEEtran.cls \IEEEiedlistdecl global control: | |
| 222 | +% | |
| 223 | +% \renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\IEEEsetlabelwidth{SONET}} | |
| 224 | +% \begin{acronym} | |
| 225 | +% | |
| 226 | +% \end{acronym} | |
| 227 | +% \renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\relax}% remember to reset \IEEEiedlistdecl | |
| 228 | +% | |
| 229 | +% instead of using the acronym environment's optional argument. | |
| 230 | +% The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 231 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/acronym | |
| 232 | + | |
| 233 | + | |
| 234 | +%\usepackage{algorithmic} | |
| 235 | +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito. | |
| 236 | +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms. | |
| 237 | +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure | |
| 238 | +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm | |
| 239 | +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or | |
| 240 | +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated | |
| 241 | +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide | |
| 242 | +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of | |
| 243 | +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at: | |
| 244 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms | |
| 245 | +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable) | |
| 246 | +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos: | |
| 247 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx | |
| 248 | + | |
| 249 | + | |
| 250 | + | |
| 251 | + | |
| 252 | +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES *** | |
| 253 | +% | |
| 254 | +%\usepackage{array} | |
| 255 | +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves | |
| 256 | +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better | |
| 257 | +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table | |
| 258 | +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with | |
| 259 | +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly | |
| 260 | +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty) | |
| 261 | +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The | |
| 262 | +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 263 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array | |
| 264 | + | |
| 265 | + | |
| 266 | +%\usepackage{mdwmath} | |
| 267 | +%\usepackage{mdwtab} | |
| 268 | +% Also highly recommended is Mark Wooding's extremely powerful MDW tools, | |
| 269 | +% especially mdwmath.sty and mdwtab.sty which are used to format equations | |
| 270 | +% and tables, respectively. The MDWtools set is already installed on most | |
| 271 | +% LaTeX systems. The lastest version and documentation is available at: | |
| 272 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/mdwtools | |
| 273 | + | |
| 274 | + | |
| 275 | +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to | |
| 276 | +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high | |
| 277 | +% quality. | |
| 278 | + | |
| 279 | + | |
| 280 | +%\usepackage{eqparbox} | |
| 281 | +% Also of notable interest is Scott Pakin's eqparbox package for creating | |
| 282 | +% (automatically sized) equal width boxes - aka "natural width parboxes". | |
| 283 | +% Available at: | |
| 284 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/eqparbox | |
| 285 | + | |
| 286 | + | |
| 287 | + | |
| 288 | + | |
| 289 | +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** | |
| 290 | +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 291 | +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} | |
| 292 | +%\else | |
| 293 | +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} | |
| 294 | +%\fi | |
| 295 | +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement | |
| 296 | +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is | |
| 297 | +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However, | |
| 298 | +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty | |
| 299 | +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result | |
| 300 | +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure | |
| 301 | +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since | |
| 302 | +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls | |
| 303 | +% handling of captions. | |
| 304 | +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather | |
| 305 | +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need | |
| 306 | +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether | |
| 307 | +% compsoc mode has been enabled. | |
| 308 | +% | |
| 309 | +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: | |
| 310 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig | |
| 311 | + | |
| 312 | + | |
| 313 | + | |
| 314 | + | |
| 315 | +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES *** | |
| 316 | +% | |
| 317 | +%\usepackage{fixltx2e} | |
| 318 | +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by | |
| 319 | +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems | |
| 320 | +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current | |
| 321 | +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not | |
| 322 | +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a | |
| 323 | +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column | |
| 324 | +% figure. | |
| 325 | +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's | |
| 326 | +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will | |
| 327 | +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer | |
| 328 | +% needed. | |
| 329 | +% The latest version and documentation can be found at: | |
| 330 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e | |
| 331 | + | |
| 332 | + | |
| 333 | +%\usepackage{stfloats} | |
| 334 | +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e | |
| 335 | +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well | |
| 336 | +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in | |
| 337 | +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command: | |
| 338 | +%\fnbelowfloat | |
| 339 | +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard | |
| 340 | +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package | |
| 341 | +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work | |
| 342 | +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest | |
| 343 | +% version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 344 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats | |
| 345 | +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow | |
| 346 | +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note | |
| 347 | +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try | |
| 348 | +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty | |
| 349 | +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in | |
| 350 | +% such ways. | |
| 351 | +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible. | |
| 352 | +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features | |
| 353 | +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats: | |
| 354 | +% | |
| 355 | +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix} | |
| 356 | +% The latest version can be found at: | |
| 357 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix | |
| 358 | + | |
| 359 | + | |
| 360 | +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff | |
| 361 | +% \usepackage[nomarkers]{endfloat} | |
| 362 | +% \let\MYoriglatexcaption\caption | |
| 363 | +% \renewcommand{\caption}[2][\relax]{\MYoriglatexcaption[#2]{#2}} | |
| 364 | +%\fi | |
| 365 | +% endfloat.sty was written by James Darrell McCauley, Jeff Goldberg and | |
| 366 | +% Axel Sommerfeldt. This package may be useful when used in conjunction with | |
| 367 | +% IEEEtran.cls' captionsoff option. Some IEEE journals/societies require that | |
| 368 | +% submissions have lists of figures/tables at the end of the paper and that | |
| 369 | +% figures/tables without any captions are placed on a page by themselves at | |
| 370 | +% the end of the document. If needed, the draftcls IEEEtran class option or | |
| 371 | +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch interface can be used to increase the line | |
| 372 | +% spacing as well. Be sure and use the nomarkers option of endfloat to | |
| 373 | +% prevent endfloat from "marking" where the figures would have been placed | |
| 374 | +% in the text. The two hack lines of code above are a slight modification of | |
| 375 | +% that suggested by in the endfloat docs (section 8.4.1) to ensure that | |
| 376 | +% the full captions always appear in the list of figures/tables - even if | |
| 377 | +% the user used the short optional argument of \caption[]{}. | |
| 378 | +% IEEE papers do not typically make use of \caption[]'s optional argument, | |
| 379 | +% so this should not be an issue. A similar trick can be used to disable | |
| 380 | +% captions of packages such as subfig.sty that lack options to turn off | |
| 381 | +% the subcaptions: | |
| 382 | +% For subfig.sty: | |
| 383 | +% \let\MYorigsubfloat\subfloat | |
| 384 | +% \renewcommand{\subfloat}[2][\relax]{\MYorigsubfloat[]{#2}} | |
| 385 | +% However, the above trick will not work if both optional arguments of | |
| 386 | +% the \subfloat command are used. Furthermore, there needs to be a | |
| 387 | +% description of each subfigure *somewhere* and endfloat does not add | |
| 388 | +% subfigure captions to its list of figures. Thus, the best approach is to | |
| 389 | +% avoid the use of subfigure captions (many IEEE journals avoid them anyway) | |
| 390 | +% and instead reference/explain all the subfigures within the main caption. | |
| 391 | +% The latest version of endfloat.sty and its documentation can obtained at: | |
| 392 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/endfloat | |
| 393 | +% | |
| 394 | +% The IEEEtran \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff conditional can also be used | |
| 395 | +% later in the document, say, to conditionally put the References on a | |
| 396 | +% page by themselves. | |
| 397 | + | |
| 398 | + | |
| 399 | + | |
| 400 | + | |
| 401 | + | |
| 402 | +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES *** | |
| 403 | +% | |
| 404 | +%\usepackage{url} | |
| 405 | +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for | |
| 406 | +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX | |
| 407 | +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 408 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url | |
| 409 | +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}. | |
| 410 | + | |
| 411 | + | |
| 412 | +% NOTE: PDF thumbnail features are not required in IEEE papers | |
| 413 | +% and their use requires extra complexity and work. | |
| 414 | +%\ifCLASSINFOpdf | |
| 415 | +% \usepackage[pdftex]{thumbpdf} | |
| 416 | +%\else | |
| 417 | +% \usepackage[dvips]{thumbpdf} | |
| 418 | +%\fi | |
| 419 | +% thumbpdf.sty and its companion Perl utility were written by Heiko Oberdiek. | |
| 420 | +% It allows the user a way to produce PDF documents that contain fancy | |
| 421 | +% thumbnail images of each of the pages (which tools like acrobat reader can | |
| 422 | +% utilize). This is possible even when using dvi->ps->pdf workflow if the | |
| 423 | +% correct thumbpdf driver options are used. thumbpdf.sty incorporates the | |
| 424 | +% file containing the PDF thumbnail information (filename.tpm is used with | |
| 425 | +% dvips, filename.tpt is used with pdftex, where filename is the base name of | |
| 426 | +% your tex document) into the final ps or pdf output document. An external | |
| 427 | +% utility, the thumbpdf *Perl script* is needed to make these .tpm or .tpt | |
| 428 | +% thumbnail files from a .ps or .pdf version of the document (which obviously | |
| 429 | +% does not yet contain pdf thumbnails). Thus, one does a: | |
| 430 | +% | |
| 431 | +% thumbpdf filename.pdf | |
| 432 | +% | |
| 433 | +% to make a filename.tpt, and: | |
| 434 | +% | |
| 435 | +% thumbpdf --mode dvips filename.ps | |
| 436 | +% | |
| 437 | +% to make a filename.tpm which will then be loaded into the document by | |
| 438 | +% thumbpdf.sty the NEXT time the document is compiled (by pdflatex or | |
| 439 | +% latex->dvips->ps2pdf). Users must be careful to regenerate the .tpt and/or | |
| 440 | +% .tpm files if the main document changes and then to recompile the | |
| 441 | +% document to incorporate the revised thumbnails to ensure that thumbnails | |
| 442 | +% match the actual pages. It is easy to forget to do this! | |
| 443 | +% | |
| 444 | +% Unix systems come with a Perl interpreter. However, MS Windows users | |
| 445 | +% will usually have to install a Perl interpreter so that the thumbpdf | |
| 446 | +% script can be run. The Ghostscript PS/PDF interpreter is also required. | |
| 447 | +% See the thumbpdf docs for details. The latest version and documentation | |
| 448 | +% can be obtained at. | |
| 449 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/thumbpdf | |
| 450 | + | |
| 451 | + | |
| 452 | +% NOTE: PDF hyperlink and bookmark features are not required in IEEE | |
| 453 | +% papers and their use requires extra complexity and work. | |
| 454 | +% *** IF USING HYPERREF BE SURE AND CHANGE THE EXAMPLE PDF *** | |
| 455 | +% *** TITLE/SUBJECT/AUTHOR/KEYWORDS INFO BELOW!! *** | |
| 456 | +\newcommand\MYhyperrefoptions{bookmarks=true,bookmarksnumbered=true, | |
| 457 | +pdfpagemode={UseOutlines},plainpages=false,pdfpagelabels=true, | |
| 458 | +colorlinks=true,linkcolor={black},citecolor={black},urlcolor={black}, | |
| 459 | +pdftitle={Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Computer Society Journals},%<!CHANGE! | |
| 460 | +pdfsubject={Typesetting},%<!CHANGE! | |
| 461 | +pdfauthor={Michael D. Shell},%<!CHANGE! | |
| 462 | +pdfkeywords={Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, LaTeX, paper, | |
| 463 | + template}}%<^!CHANGE! | |
| 464 | +%\ifCLASSINFOpdf | |
| 465 | +%\usepackage[\MYhyperrefoptions,pdftex]{hyperref} | |
| 466 | +%\else | |
| 467 | +%\usepackage[\MYhyperrefoptions,breaklinks=true,dvips]{hyperref} | |
| 468 | +%\usepackage{breakurl} | |
| 469 | +%\fi | |
| 470 | +% One significant drawback of using hyperref under DVI output is that the | |
| 471 | +% LaTeX compiler cannot break URLs across lines or pages as can be done | |
| 472 | +% under pdfLaTeX's PDF output via the hyperref pdftex driver. This is | |
| 473 | +% probably the single most important capability distinction between the | |
| 474 | +% DVI and PDF output. Perhaps surprisingly, all the other PDF features | |
| 475 | +% (PDF bookmarks, thumbnails, etc.) can be preserved in | |
| 476 | +% .tex->.dvi->.ps->.pdf workflow if the respective packages/scripts are | |
| 477 | +% loaded/invoked with the correct driver options (dvips, etc.). | |
| 478 | +% As most IEEE papers use URLs sparingly (mainly in the references), this | |
| 479 | +% may not be as big an issue as with other publications. | |
| 480 | +% | |
| 481 | +% That said, Vilar Camara Neto created his breakurl.sty package which | |
| 482 | +% permits hyperref to easily break URLs even in dvi mode. | |
| 483 | +% Note that breakurl, unlike most other packages, must be loaded | |
| 484 | +% AFTER hyperref. The latest version of breakurl and its documentation can | |
| 485 | +% be obtained at: | |
| 486 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/breakurl | |
| 487 | +% breakurl.sty is not for use under pdflatex pdf mode. | |
| 488 | +% | |
| 489 | +% The advanced features offer by hyperref.sty are not required for IEEE | |
| 490 | +% submission, so users should weigh these features against the added | |
| 491 | +% complexity of use. | |
| 492 | +% The package options above demonstrate how to enable PDF bookmarks | |
| 493 | +% (a type of table of contents viewable in Acrobat Reader) as well as | |
| 494 | +% PDF document information (title, subject, author and keywords) that is | |
| 495 | +% viewable in Acrobat reader's Document_Properties menu. PDF document | |
| 496 | +% information is also used extensively to automate the cataloging of PDF | |
| 497 | +% documents. The above set of options ensures that hyperlinks will not be | |
| 498 | +% colored in the text and thus will not be visible in the printed page, | |
| 499 | +% but will be active on "mouse over". USING COLORS OR OTHER HIGHLIGHTING | |
| 500 | +% OF HYPERLINKS CAN RESULT IN DOCUMENT REJECTION BY THE IEEE, especially if | |
| 501 | +% these appear on the "printed" page. IF IN DOUBT, ASK THE RELEVANT | |
| 502 | +% SUBMISSION EDITOR. You may need to add the option hypertexnames=false if | |
| 503 | +% you used duplicate equation numbers, etc., but this should not be needed | |
| 504 | +% in normal IEEE work. | |
| 505 | +% The latest version of hyperref and its documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 506 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref | |
| 507 | + | |
| 508 | + | |
| 509 | + | |
| 510 | + | |
| 511 | + | |
| 512 | +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. *** | |
| 513 | +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). *** | |
| 514 | +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later. | |
| 515 | +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan | |
| 516 | +% to submit to, of course. ) | |
| 517 | + | |
| 518 | + | |
| 519 | +% correct bad hyphenation here | |
| 520 | +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor} | |
| 521 | + | |
| 522 | + | |
| 523 | +\begin{document} | |
| 524 | +% | |
| 525 | +% paper title | |
| 526 | +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, | |
| 527 | +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually | |
| 528 | +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. | |
| 529 | +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. | |
| 530 | +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title. | |
| 531 | +\title{Bare Advanced Demo of IEEEtran.cls for\\ IEEE Computer Society Journals} | |
| 532 | +% | |
| 533 | +% | |
| 534 | +% author names and IEEE memberships | |
| 535 | +% note positions of commas and nonbreaking spaces ( ~ ) LaTeX will not break | |
| 536 | +% a structure at a ~ so this keeps an author's name from being broken across | |
| 537 | +% two lines. | |
| 538 | +% use \thanks{} to gain access to the first footnote area | |
| 539 | +% a separate \thanks must be used for each paragraph as LaTeX2e's \thanks | |
| 540 | +% was not built to handle multiple paragraphs | |
| 541 | +% | |
| 542 | +% | |
| 543 | +%\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks is a special \thanks that produces the bulleted | |
| 544 | +% lists the Computer Society journals use for "first footnote" author | |
| 545 | +% affiliations. Use \IEEEcompsocthanksitem which works much like \item | |
| 546 | +% for each affiliation group. When not in compsoc mode, | |
| 547 | +% \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks becomes like \thanks and | |
| 548 | +% \IEEEcompsocthanksitem becomes a line break with idention. This | |
| 549 | +% facilitates dual compilation, although admittedly the differences in the | |
| 550 | +% desired content of \author between the different types of papers makes a | |
| 551 | +% one-size-fits-all approach a daunting prospect. For instance, compsoc | |
| 552 | +% journal papers have the author affiliations above the "Manuscript | |
| 553 | +% received ..." text while in non-compsoc journals this is reversed. Sigh. | |
| 554 | + | |
| 555 | +\author{Michael~Shell,~\IEEEmembership{Member,~IEEE,} | |
| 556 | + John~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Fellow,~OSA,} | |
| 557 | + and~Jane~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Life~Fellow,~IEEE}% <-this % stops a space | |
| 558 | +\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem M. Shell was with the Department | |
| 559 | +of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, | |
| 560 | +GA, 30332.\protect\\ | |
| 561 | +% note need leading \protect in front of \\ to get a newline within \thanks as | |
| 562 | +% \\ is fragile and will error, could use \hfil\break instead. | |
| 563 | +E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html | |
| 564 | +\IEEEcompsocthanksitem J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops a space | |
| 565 | +\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised August 26, 2015.}} | |
| 566 | + | |
| 567 | +% note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - | |
| 568 | +% these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name | |
| 569 | +% and the end of the author line. i.e., if you had this: | |
| 570 | +% | |
| 571 | +% \author{....lastname \thanks{...} \thanks{...} } | |
| 572 | +% ^------------^------------^----Do not want these spaces! | |
| 573 | +% | |
| 574 | +% a space would be appended to the last name and could cause every name on that | |
| 575 | +% line to be shifted left slightly. This is one of those "LaTeX things". For | |
| 576 | +% instance, "\textbf{A} \textbf{B}" will typeset as "A B" not "AB". To get | |
| 577 | +% "AB" then you have to do: "\textbf{A}\textbf{B}" | |
| 578 | +% \thanks is no different in this regard, so shield the last } of each \thanks | |
| 579 | +% that ends a line with a % and do not let a space in before the next \thanks. | |
| 580 | +% Spaces after \IEEEmembership other than the last one are OK (and needed) as | |
| 581 | +% you are supposed to have spaces between the names. For what it is worth, | |
| 582 | +% this is a minor point as most people would not even notice if the said evil | |
| 583 | +% space somehow managed to creep in. | |
| 584 | + | |
| 585 | + | |
| 586 | + | |
| 587 | +% The paper headers | |
| 588 | +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~14, No.~8, August~2015}% | |
| 589 | +{Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Advanced Demo of IEEEtran.cls for IEEE Computer Society Journals} | |
| 590 | +% The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages | |
| 591 | +% after the title page when using the twoside option. | |
| 592 | +% | |
| 593 | +% *** Note that you probably will NOT want to include the author's *** | |
| 594 | +% *** name in the headers of peer review papers. *** | |
| 595 | +% You can use \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview for conditional compilation here if | |
| 596 | +% you desire. | |
| 597 | + | |
| 598 | + | |
| 599 | + | |
| 600 | +% The publisher's ID mark at the bottom of the page is less important with | |
| 601 | +% Computer Society journal papers as those publications place the marks | |
| 602 | +% outside of the main text columns and, therefore, unlike regular IEEE | |
| 603 | +% journals, the available text space is not reduced by their presence. | |
| 604 | +% If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like | |
| 605 | +% this: | |
| 606 | +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE} | |
| 607 | +% or like this to get the Computer Society new two part style. | |
| 608 | +%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE}% | |
| 609 | +%\hspace{\columnsep}\makebox[\columnwidth]{Published by the IEEE Computer Society\hfill}} | |
| 610 | +% Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second | |
| 611 | +% column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark (Computer Society journal | |
| 612 | +% papers don't need this extra clearance.) | |
| 613 | + | |
| 614 | + | |
| 615 | + | |
| 616 | +% use for special paper notices | |
| 617 | +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} | |
| 618 | + | |
| 619 | + | |
| 620 | + | |
| 621 | +% for Computer Society papers, we must declare the abstract and index terms | |
| 622 | +% PRIOR to the title within the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext IEEEtran | |
| 623 | +% command as these need to go into the title area created by \maketitle. | |
| 624 | +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations | |
| 625 | +% in the abstract or keywords. | |
| 626 | +\IEEEtitleabstractindextext{% | |
| 627 | +\begin{abstract} | |
| 628 | +The abstract goes here. | |
| 629 | +\end{abstract} | |
| 630 | + | |
| 631 | +% Note that keywords are not normally used for peerreview papers. | |
| 632 | +\begin{IEEEkeywords} | |
| 633 | +Computer Society, IEEE, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template. | |
| 634 | +\end{IEEEkeywords}} | |
| 635 | + | |
| 636 | + | |
| 637 | +% make the title area | |
| 638 | +\maketitle | |
| 639 | + | |
| 640 | + | |
| 641 | +% To allow for easy dual compilation without having to reenter the | |
| 642 | +% abstract/keywords data, the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext text will | |
| 643 | +% not be used in maketitle, but will appear (i.e., to be "transported") | |
| 644 | +% here as \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext when compsoc mode | |
| 645 | +% is not selected <OR> if conference mode is selected - because compsoc | |
| 646 | +% conference papers position the abstract like regular (non-compsoc) | |
| 647 | +% papers do! | |
| 648 | +\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext | |
| 649 | +% \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext has no effect when using | |
| 650 | +% compsoc under a non-conference mode. | |
| 651 | + | |
| 652 | + | |
| 653 | +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover | |
| 654 | +% page as needed: | |
| 655 | +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview | |
| 656 | +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center} | |
| 657 | +% \fi | |
| 658 | +% | |
| 659 | +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and | |
| 660 | +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes. | |
| 661 | +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle | |
| 662 | + | |
| 663 | + | |
| 664 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 665 | +\IEEEraisesectionheading{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}} | |
| 666 | +\else | |
| 667 | +\section{Introduction} | |
| 668 | +\label{sec:introduction} | |
| 669 | +\fi | |
| 670 | +% Computer Society journal (but not conference!) papers do something unusual | |
| 671 | +% with the very first section heading (almost always called "Introduction"). | |
| 672 | +% They place it ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls does not automatically do | |
| 673 | +% this for you, but you can achieve this effect with the provided | |
| 674 | +% \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command. Note the need to keep any \label that | |
| 675 | +% is to refer to the section immediately after \section in the above as | |
| 676 | +% \IEEEraisesectionheading puts \section within a raised box. | |
| 677 | + | |
| 678 | + | |
| 679 | + | |
| 680 | + | |
| 681 | +% The very first letter is a 2 line initial drop letter followed | |
| 682 | +% by the rest of the first word in caps (small caps for compsoc). | |
| 683 | +% | |
| 684 | +% form to use if the first word consists of a single letter: | |
| 685 | +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{demo} file is .... | |
| 686 | +% | |
| 687 | +% form to use if you need the single drop letter followed by | |
| 688 | +% normal text (unknown if ever used by the IEEE): | |
| 689 | +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{}demo file is .... | |
| 690 | +% | |
| 691 | +% Some journals put the first two words in caps: | |
| 692 | +% \IEEEPARstart{T}{his demo} file is .... | |
| 693 | +% | |
| 694 | +% Here we have the typical use of a "T" for an initial drop letter | |
| 695 | +% and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word. | |
| 696 | +\IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' | |
| 697 | +for IEEE Computer Society journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using | |
| 698 | +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later. | |
| 699 | +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter | |
| 700 | +% (should never be an issue) | |
| 701 | +I wish you the best of success. | |
| 702 | + | |
| 703 | +\hfill mds | |
| 704 | + | |
| 705 | +\hfill August 26, 2015 | |
| 706 | + | |
| 707 | +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here} | |
| 708 | +Subsection text here. | |
| 709 | + | |
| 710 | +% needed in second column of first page if using \IEEEpubid | |
| 711 | +%\IEEEpubidadjcol | |
| 712 | + | |
| 713 | +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here} | |
| 714 | +Subsubsection text here. | |
| 715 | + | |
| 716 | + | |
| 717 | +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package. | |
| 718 | +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption. | |
| 719 | +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics. | |
| 720 | +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that | |
| 721 | +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption | |
| 722 | +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because | |
| 723 | +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your | |
| 724 | +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}. | |
| 725 | +% | |
| 726 | +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class | |
| 727 | +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be | |
| 728 | +% displayed while in draft mode. | |
| 729 | +% | |
| 730 | +%\begin{figure}[!t] | |
| 731 | +%\centering | |
| 732 | +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure} | |
| 733 | +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, | |
| 734 | +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared | |
| 735 | +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. | |
| 736 | +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} | |
| 737 | +%\label{fig_sim} | |
| 738 | +%\end{figure} | |
| 739 | + | |
| 740 | +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this | |
| 741 | +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats. | |
| 742 | +% However, the Computer Society has been known to put floats at the bottom. | |
| 743 | + | |
| 744 | + | |
| 745 | +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures. | |
| 746 | +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.) | |
| 747 | +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command, | |
| 748 | +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption. | |
| 749 | +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing. | |
| 750 | +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a | |
| 751 | +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur. | |
| 752 | +% | |
| 753 | +%\begin{figure*}[!t] | |
| 754 | +%\centering | |
| 755 | +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% | |
| 756 | +%\label{fig_first_case}} | |
| 757 | +%\hfil | |
| 758 | +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% | |
| 759 | +%\label{fig_second_case}} | |
| 760 | +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} | |
| 761 | +%\label{fig_sim} | |
| 762 | +%\end{figure*} | |
| 763 | +% | |
| 764 | +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure | |
| 765 | +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will | |
| 766 | +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. | |
| 767 | +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure | |
| 768 | +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a | |
| 769 | +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, | |
| 770 | +% e.g., \subfloat[]. | |
| 771 | + | |
| 772 | + | |
| 773 | +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the | |
| 774 | +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table | |
| 775 | +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words | |
| 776 | +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to | |
| 777 | +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or | |
| 778 | +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as | |
| 779 | +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. | |
| 780 | +% The \label must come after \caption as always. | |
| 781 | +% | |
| 782 | +%\begin{table}[!t] | |
| 783 | +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste | |
| 784 | +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3} | |
| 785 | +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of | |
| 786 | +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells | |
| 787 | +%\caption{An Example of a Table} | |
| 788 | +%\label{table_example} | |
| 789 | +%\centering | |
| 790 | +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables | |
| 791 | +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here. | |
| 792 | +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|} | |
| 793 | +%\hline | |
| 794 | +%One & Two\\ | |
| 795 | +%\hline | |
| 796 | +%Three & Four\\ | |
| 797 | +%\hline | |
| 798 | +%\end{tabular} | |
| 799 | +%\end{table} | |
| 800 | + | |
| 801 | + | |
| 802 | +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column | |
| 803 | +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, | |
| 804 | +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it | |
| 805 | +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but | |
| 806 | +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use | |
| 807 | +% top floats exclusively. | |
| 808 | +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places | |
| 809 | +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the | |
| 810 | +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. | |
| 811 | + | |
| 812 | + | |
| 813 | + | |
| 814 | + | |
| 815 | +\section{Conclusion} | |
| 816 | +The conclusion goes here. | |
| 817 | + | |
| 818 | + | |
| 819 | + | |
| 820 | + | |
| 821 | + | |
| 822 | +% if have a single appendix: | |
| 823 | +%\appendix[Proof of the Zonklar Equations] | |
| 824 | +% or | |
| 825 | +%\appendix % for no appendix heading | |
| 826 | +% do not use \section anymore after \appendix, only \section* | |
| 827 | +% is possibly needed | |
| 828 | + | |
| 829 | +% use appendices with more than one appendix | |
| 830 | +% then use \section to start each appendix | |
| 831 | +% you must declare a \section before using any | |
| 832 | +% \subsection or using \label (\appendices by itself | |
| 833 | +% starts a section numbered zero.) | |
| 834 | +% | |
| 835 | + | |
| 836 | + | |
| 837 | +\appendices | |
| 838 | +\section{Proof of the First Zonklar Equation} | |
| 839 | +Appendix one text goes here. | |
| 840 | + | |
| 841 | +% you can choose not to have a title for an appendix | |
| 842 | +% if you want by leaving the argument blank | |
| 843 | +\section{} | |
| 844 | +Appendix two text goes here. | |
| 845 | + | |
| 846 | + | |
| 847 | +% use section* for acknowledgment | |
| 848 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 849 | + % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form | |
| 850 | + \section*{Acknowledgments} | |
| 851 | +\else | |
| 852 | + % regular IEEE prefers the singular form | |
| 853 | + \section*{Acknowledgment} | |
| 854 | +\fi | |
| 855 | + | |
| 856 | + | |
| 857 | +The authors would like to thank... | |
| 858 | + | |
| 859 | + | |
| 860 | +% Can use something like this to put references on a page | |
| 861 | +% by themselves when using endfloat and the captionsoff option. | |
| 862 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff | |
| 863 | + \newpage | |
| 864 | +\fi | |
| 865 | + | |
| 866 | + | |
| 867 | + | |
| 868 | +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference | |
| 869 | +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page | |
| 870 | +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if | |
| 871 | +% the document is modified later | |
| 872 | +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8} | |
| 873 | +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired: | |
| 874 | +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}} | |
| 875 | + | |
| 876 | +% references section | |
| 877 | + | |
| 878 | +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file | |
| 879 | +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at: | |
| 880 | +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/ | |
| 881 | +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at: | |
| 882 | +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/ | |
| 883 | +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran} | |
| 884 | +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s) | |
| 885 | +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper} | |
| 886 | +% | |
| 887 | +% <OR> manually copy in the resultant .bbl file | |
| 888 | +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references | |
| 889 | +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box) | |
| 890 | +\begin{thebibliography}{1} | |
| 891 | + | |
| 892 | +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka} | |
| 893 | +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to {\LaTeX}}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus | |
| 894 | + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999. | |
| 895 | + | |
| 896 | +\end{thebibliography} | |
| 897 | + | |
| 898 | +% biography section | |
| 899 | +% | |
| 900 | +% If you have an EPS/PDF photo (graphicx package needed) extra braces are | |
| 901 | +% needed around the contents of the optional argument to biography to prevent | |
| 902 | +% the LaTeX parser from getting confused when it sees the complicated | |
| 903 | +% \includegraphics command within an optional argument. (You could create | |
| 904 | +% your own custom macro containing the \includegraphics command to make things | |
| 905 | +% simpler here.) | |
| 906 | +%\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{mshell}}]{Michael Shell} | |
| 907 | +% or if you just want to reserve a space for a photo: | |
| 908 | + | |
| 909 | +\begin{IEEEbiography}{Michael Shell} | |
| 910 | +Biography text here. | |
| 911 | +\end{IEEEbiography} | |
| 912 | + | |
| 913 | +% if you will not have a photo at all: | |
| 914 | +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{John Doe} | |
| 915 | +Biography text here. | |
| 916 | +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} | |
| 917 | + | |
| 918 | +% insert where needed to balance the two columns on the last page with | |
| 919 | +% biographies | |
| 920 | +%\newpage | |
| 921 | + | |
| 922 | +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{Jane Doe} | |
| 923 | +Biography text here. | |
| 924 | +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} | |
| 925 | + | |
| 926 | +% You can push biographies down or up by placing | |
| 927 | +% a \vfill before or after them. The appropriate | |
| 928 | +% use of \vfill depends on what kind of text is | |
| 929 | +% on the last page and whether or not the columns | |
| 930 | +% are being equalized. | |
| 931 | + | |
| 932 | +%\vfill | |
| 933 | + | |
| 934 | +% Can be used to pull up biographies so that the bottom of the last one | |
| 935 | +% is flush with the other column. | |
| 936 | +%\enlargethispage{-5in} | |
| 937 | + | |
| 938 | + | |
| 939 | + | |
| 940 | +% that's all folks | |
| 941 | +\end{document} | |
| 942 | + | |
| 943 | + | ... | ... |
bare_conf_compsoc.tex
0 → 100644
| 1 | +++ a/bare_conf_compsoc.tex | |
| 1 | + | |
| 2 | +%% bare_conf_compsoc.tex | |
| 3 | +%% V1.4b | |
| 4 | +%% 2015/08/26 | |
| 5 | +%% by Michael Shell | |
| 6 | +%% See: | |
| 7 | +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ | |
| 8 | +%% for current contact information. | |
| 9 | +%% | |
| 10 | +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls | |
| 11 | +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE Computer | |
| 12 | +%% Society conference paper. | |
| 13 | +%% | |
| 14 | +%% Support sites: | |
| 15 | +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ | |
| 16 | +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran | |
| 17 | +%% and | |
| 18 | +%% http://www.ieee.org/ | |
| 19 | + | |
| 20 | +%%************************************************************************* | |
| 21 | +%% Legal Notice: | |
| 22 | +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or | |
| 23 | +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or | |
| 24 | +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! | |
| 25 | +%% User assumes all risk. | |
| 26 | +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for | |
| 27 | +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, | |
| 28 | +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse | |
| 29 | +%% of any information contained here. | |
| 30 | +%% | |
| 31 | +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not | |
| 32 | +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. | |
| 33 | +%% | |
| 34 | +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) | |
| 35 | +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, | |
| 36 | +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included | |
| 37 | +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released | |
| 38 | +%% 2003/12/01 or later. | |
| 39 | +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. | |
| 40 | +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** | |
| 41 | +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** | |
| 42 | +%%************************************************************************* | |
| 43 | + | |
| 44 | + | |
| 45 | +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** | |
| 46 | +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** | |
| 47 | +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** | |
| 48 | +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** | |
| 49 | +% The testflow support page is at: | |
| 50 | +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ | |
| 51 | + | |
| 52 | + | |
| 53 | + | |
| 54 | +\documentclass[conference,compsoc]{IEEEtran} | |
| 55 | +% Some/most Computer Society conferences require the compsoc mode option, | |
| 56 | +% but others may want the standard conference format. | |
| 57 | +% | |
| 58 | +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, | |
| 59 | +% manually specify the path to it like: | |
| 60 | +% \documentclass[conference,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran} | |
| 61 | + | |
| 62 | + | |
| 63 | + | |
| 64 | + | |
| 65 | + | |
| 66 | +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include: | |
| 67 | +% (uncomment the ones you want to load) | |
| 68 | + | |
| 69 | + | |
| 70 | +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES *** | |
| 71 | +% | |
| 72 | +%\usepackage{ifpdf} | |
| 73 | +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional | |
| 74 | +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi. | |
| 75 | +% usage: | |
| 76 | +% \ifpdf | |
| 77 | +% % pdf code | |
| 78 | +% \else | |
| 79 | +% % dvi code | |
| 80 | +% \fi | |
| 81 | +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from: | |
| 82 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf | |
| 83 | +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin | |
| 84 | +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way. | |
| 85 | +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may | |
| 86 | +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages. | |
| 87 | + | |
| 88 | + | |
| 89 | + | |
| 90 | + | |
| 91 | + | |
| 92 | + | |
| 93 | +% *** CITATION PACKAGES *** | |
| 94 | +% | |
| 95 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 96 | + % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option | |
| 97 | + % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003) | |
| 98 | + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite} | |
| 99 | +\else | |
| 100 | + % normal IEEE | |
| 101 | + \usepackage{cite} | |
| 102 | +\fi | |
| 103 | +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau | |
| 104 | +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package | |
| 105 | +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will | |
| 106 | +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly | |
| 107 | +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using | |
| 108 | +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's | |
| 109 | +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's | |
| 110 | +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off | |
| 111 | +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. | |
| 112 | +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use | |
| 113 | +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. | |
| 114 | +% The latest version can be obtained at: | |
| 115 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite | |
| 116 | +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. | |
| 117 | +% | |
| 118 | +% Note that some packages require special options to format as the Computer | |
| 119 | +% Society requires. In particular, Computer Society papers do not use | |
| 120 | +% compressed citation ranges as is done in typical IEEE papers | |
| 121 | +% (e.g., [1]-[4]). Instead, they list every citation separately in order | |
| 122 | +% (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite | |
| 123 | +% package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0 | |
| 124 | +% and later. | |
| 125 | + | |
| 126 | + | |
| 127 | + | |
| 128 | + | |
| 129 | + | |
| 130 | +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES *** | |
| 131 | +% | |
| 132 | +\ifCLASSINFOpdf | |
| 133 | + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} | |
| 134 | + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are | |
| 135 | + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}} | |
| 136 | + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with | |
| 137 | + % every instance of \includegraphics | |
| 138 | + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png} | |
| 139 | +\else | |
| 140 | + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx | |
| 141 | + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no | |
| 142 | + % driver is specified. | |
| 143 | + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx} | |
| 144 | + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are | |
| 145 | + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}} | |
| 146 | + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with | |
| 147 | + % every instance of \includegraphics | |
| 148 | + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps} | |
| 149 | +\fi | |
| 150 | +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is | |
| 151 | +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already | |
| 152 | +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation | |
| 153 | +% can be obtained at: | |
| 154 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx | |
| 155 | +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in | |
| 156 | +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at: | |
| 157 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex | |
| 158 | +% | |
| 159 | +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated | |
| 160 | +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics | |
| 161 | +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure | |
| 162 | +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and | |
| 163 | +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats | |
| 164 | +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as | |
| 165 | +% well as large increases in file sizes. | |
| 166 | +% | |
| 167 | +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at: | |
| 168 | +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex | |
| 169 | + | |
| 170 | + | |
| 171 | + | |
| 172 | + | |
| 173 | + | |
| 174 | +% *** MATH PACKAGES *** | |
| 175 | +% | |
| 176 | +%\usepackage{amsmath} | |
| 177 | +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides | |
| 178 | +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. | |
| 179 | +% | |
| 180 | +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000 | |
| 181 | +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use: | |
| 182 | +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 | |
| 183 | +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally | |
| 184 | +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest | |
| 185 | +% version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 186 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath | |
| 187 | + | |
| 188 | + | |
| 189 | + | |
| 190 | + | |
| 191 | + | |
| 192 | +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES *** | |
| 193 | +% | |
| 194 | +%\usepackage{algorithmic} | |
| 195 | +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito. | |
| 196 | +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms. | |
| 197 | +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure | |
| 198 | +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm | |
| 199 | +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or | |
| 200 | +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated | |
| 201 | +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide | |
| 202 | +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of | |
| 203 | +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at: | |
| 204 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms | |
| 205 | +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable) | |
| 206 | +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos: | |
| 207 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx | |
| 208 | + | |
| 209 | + | |
| 210 | + | |
| 211 | + | |
| 212 | +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES *** | |
| 213 | +% | |
| 214 | +%\usepackage{array} | |
| 215 | +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves | |
| 216 | +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better | |
| 217 | +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table | |
| 218 | +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with | |
| 219 | +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly | |
| 220 | +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty) | |
| 221 | +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The | |
| 222 | +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 223 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array | |
| 224 | + | |
| 225 | + | |
| 226 | +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to | |
| 227 | +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high | |
| 228 | +% quality. | |
| 229 | + | |
| 230 | + | |
| 231 | + | |
| 232 | + | |
| 233 | +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** | |
| 234 | +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 235 | +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} | |
| 236 | +%\else | |
| 237 | +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} | |
| 238 | +%\fi | |
| 239 | +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement | |
| 240 | +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is | |
| 241 | +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However, | |
| 242 | +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty | |
| 243 | +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result | |
| 244 | +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure | |
| 245 | +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since | |
| 246 | +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls | |
| 247 | +% handling of captions. | |
| 248 | +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather | |
| 249 | +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need | |
| 250 | +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether | |
| 251 | +% compsoc mode has been enabled. | |
| 252 | +% | |
| 253 | +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: | |
| 254 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig | |
| 255 | + | |
| 256 | + | |
| 257 | + | |
| 258 | + | |
| 259 | +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES *** | |
| 260 | +% | |
| 261 | +%\usepackage{fixltx2e} | |
| 262 | +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by | |
| 263 | +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems | |
| 264 | +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current | |
| 265 | +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not | |
| 266 | +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a | |
| 267 | +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column | |
| 268 | +% figure. | |
| 269 | +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's | |
| 270 | +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will | |
| 271 | +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer | |
| 272 | +% needed. | |
| 273 | +% The latest version and documentation can be found at: | |
| 274 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e | |
| 275 | + | |
| 276 | + | |
| 277 | +%\usepackage{stfloats} | |
| 278 | +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e | |
| 279 | +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well | |
| 280 | +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in | |
| 281 | +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command: | |
| 282 | +%\fnbelowfloat | |
| 283 | +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard | |
| 284 | +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package | |
| 285 | +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work | |
| 286 | +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest | |
| 287 | +% version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 288 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats | |
| 289 | +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow | |
| 290 | +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note | |
| 291 | +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try | |
| 292 | +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty | |
| 293 | +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in | |
| 294 | +% such ways. | |
| 295 | +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible. | |
| 296 | +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features | |
| 297 | +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats: | |
| 298 | +% | |
| 299 | +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix} | |
| 300 | +% The latest version can be found at: | |
| 301 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix | |
| 302 | + | |
| 303 | + | |
| 304 | + | |
| 305 | + | |
| 306 | +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES *** | |
| 307 | +% | |
| 308 | +%\usepackage{url} | |
| 309 | +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for | |
| 310 | +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX | |
| 311 | +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 312 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url | |
| 313 | +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}. | |
| 314 | + | |
| 315 | + | |
| 316 | + | |
| 317 | + | |
| 318 | +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. *** | |
| 319 | +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). *** | |
| 320 | +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later. | |
| 321 | +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan | |
| 322 | +% to submit to, of course. ) | |
| 323 | + | |
| 324 | + | |
| 325 | +% correct bad hyphenation here | |
| 326 | +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor} | |
| 327 | + | |
| 328 | + | |
| 329 | +\begin{document} | |
| 330 | +% | |
| 331 | +% paper title | |
| 332 | +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, | |
| 333 | +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually | |
| 334 | +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. | |
| 335 | +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. | |
| 336 | +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title. | |
| 337 | +\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for\\ IEEE Computer Society Conferences} | |
| 338 | + | |
| 339 | + | |
| 340 | +% author names and affiliations | |
| 341 | +% use a multiple column layout for up to three different | |
| 342 | +% affiliations | |
| 343 | +\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell} | |
| 344 | +\IEEEauthorblockA{School of Electrical and\\Computer Engineering\\ | |
| 345 | +Georgia Institute of Technology\\ | |
| 346 | +Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\ | |
| 347 | +Email: http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html} | |
| 348 | +\and | |
| 349 | +\IEEEauthorblockN{Homer Simpson} | |
| 350 | +\IEEEauthorblockA{Twentieth Century Fox\\ | |
| 351 | +Springfield, USA\\ | |
| 352 | +Email: homer@thesimpsons.com} | |
| 353 | +\and | |
| 354 | +\IEEEauthorblockN{James Kirk\\ and Montgomery Scott} | |
| 355 | +\IEEEauthorblockA{Starfleet Academy\\ | |
| 356 | +San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\ | |
| 357 | +Telephone: (800) 555--1212\\ | |
| 358 | +Fax: (888) 555--1212}} | |
| 359 | + | |
| 360 | +% conference papers do not typically use \thanks and this command | |
| 361 | +% is locked out in conference mode. If really needed, such as for | |
| 362 | +% the acknowledgment of grants, issue a \IEEEoverridecommandlockouts | |
| 363 | +% after \documentclass | |
| 364 | + | |
| 365 | +% for over three affiliations, or if they all won't fit within the width | |
| 366 | +% of the page (and note that there is less available width in this regard for | |
| 367 | +% compsoc conferences compared to traditional conferences), use this | |
| 368 | +% alternative format: | |
| 369 | +% | |
| 370 | +%\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}, | |
| 371 | +%Homer Simpson\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}, | |
| 372 | +%James Kirk\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}, | |
| 373 | +%Montgomery Scott\IEEEauthorrefmark{3} and | |
| 374 | +%Eldon Tyrell\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}} | |
| 375 | +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}School of Electrical and Computer Engineering\\ | |
| 376 | +%Georgia Institute of Technology, | |
| 377 | +%Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\ Email: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html} | |
| 378 | +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}Twentieth Century Fox, Springfield, USA\\ | |
| 379 | +%Email: homer@thesimpsons.com} | |
| 380 | +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}Starfleet Academy, San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\ | |
| 381 | +%Telephone: (800) 555--1212, Fax: (888) 555--1212} | |
| 382 | +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}Tyrell Inc., 123 Replicant Street, Los Angeles, California 90210--4321}} | |
| 383 | + | |
| 384 | + | |
| 385 | + | |
| 386 | + | |
| 387 | +% use for special paper notices | |
| 388 | +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} | |
| 389 | + | |
| 390 | + | |
| 391 | + | |
| 392 | + | |
| 393 | +% make the title area | |
| 394 | +\maketitle | |
| 395 | + | |
| 396 | +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations | |
| 397 | +% in the abstract | |
| 398 | +\begin{abstract} | |
| 399 | +The abstract goes here. | |
| 400 | +\end{abstract} | |
| 401 | + | |
| 402 | +% no keywords | |
| 403 | + | |
| 404 | + | |
| 405 | + | |
| 406 | + | |
| 407 | +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover | |
| 408 | +% page as needed: | |
| 409 | +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview | |
| 410 | +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center} | |
| 411 | +% \fi | |
| 412 | +% | |
| 413 | +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and | |
| 414 | +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes. | |
| 415 | +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle | |
| 416 | + | |
| 417 | + | |
| 418 | + | |
| 419 | +\section{Introduction} | |
| 420 | +% no \IEEEPARstart | |
| 421 | +This demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' | |
| 422 | +for IEEE Computer Society conference papers produced under \LaTeX\ using | |
| 423 | +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later. | |
| 424 | +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter | |
| 425 | +% (should never be an issue) | |
| 426 | +I wish you the best of success. | |
| 427 | + | |
| 428 | +\hfill mds | |
| 429 | + | |
| 430 | +\hfill August 26, 2015 | |
| 431 | + | |
| 432 | +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here} | |
| 433 | +Subsection text here. | |
| 434 | + | |
| 435 | + | |
| 436 | +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here} | |
| 437 | +Subsubsection text here. | |
| 438 | + | |
| 439 | + | |
| 440 | +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package. | |
| 441 | +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption. | |
| 442 | +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics. | |
| 443 | +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that | |
| 444 | +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption | |
| 445 | +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because | |
| 446 | +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your | |
| 447 | +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}. | |
| 448 | +% | |
| 449 | +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class | |
| 450 | +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be | |
| 451 | +% displayed while in draft mode. | |
| 452 | +% | |
| 453 | +%\begin{figure}[!t] | |
| 454 | +%\centering | |
| 455 | +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure} | |
| 456 | +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, | |
| 457 | +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared | |
| 458 | +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. | |
| 459 | +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} | |
| 460 | +%\label{fig_sim} | |
| 461 | +%\end{figure} | |
| 462 | + | |
| 463 | +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this | |
| 464 | +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats. | |
| 465 | + | |
| 466 | + | |
| 467 | +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures. | |
| 468 | +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.) | |
| 469 | +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command, | |
| 470 | +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption. | |
| 471 | +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing. | |
| 472 | +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a | |
| 473 | +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur. | |
| 474 | +% | |
| 475 | +%\begin{figure*}[!t] | |
| 476 | +%\centering | |
| 477 | +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% | |
| 478 | +%\label{fig_first_case}} | |
| 479 | +%\hfil | |
| 480 | +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% | |
| 481 | +%\label{fig_second_case}} | |
| 482 | +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} | |
| 483 | +%\label{fig_sim} | |
| 484 | +%\end{figure*} | |
| 485 | +% | |
| 486 | +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure | |
| 487 | +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will | |
| 488 | +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. | |
| 489 | +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure | |
| 490 | +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a | |
| 491 | +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, | |
| 492 | +% e.g., \subfloat[]. | |
| 493 | + | |
| 494 | + | |
| 495 | +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the | |
| 496 | +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table | |
| 497 | +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words | |
| 498 | +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to | |
| 499 | +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or | |
| 500 | +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as | |
| 501 | +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. | |
| 502 | +% The \label must come after \caption as always. | |
| 503 | +% | |
| 504 | +%\begin{table}[!t] | |
| 505 | +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste | |
| 506 | +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3} | |
| 507 | +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of | |
| 508 | +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells | |
| 509 | +%\caption{An Example of a Table} | |
| 510 | +%\label{table_example} | |
| 511 | +%\centering | |
| 512 | +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables | |
| 513 | +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here. | |
| 514 | +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|} | |
| 515 | +%\hline | |
| 516 | +%One & Two\\ | |
| 517 | +%\hline | |
| 518 | +%Three & Four\\ | |
| 519 | +%\hline | |
| 520 | +%\end{tabular} | |
| 521 | +%\end{table} | |
| 522 | + | |
| 523 | + | |
| 524 | +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column | |
| 525 | +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, | |
| 526 | +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it | |
| 527 | +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but | |
| 528 | +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use | |
| 529 | +% top floats exclusively. | |
| 530 | +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places | |
| 531 | +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the | |
| 532 | +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. | |
| 533 | + | |
| 534 | + | |
| 535 | + | |
| 536 | + | |
| 537 | +\section{Conclusion} | |
| 538 | +The conclusion goes here. | |
| 539 | + | |
| 540 | + | |
| 541 | + | |
| 542 | + | |
| 543 | +% conference papers do not normally have an appendix | |
| 544 | + | |
| 545 | + | |
| 546 | + | |
| 547 | +% use section* for acknowledgment | |
| 548 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 549 | + % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form | |
| 550 | + \section*{Acknowledgments} | |
| 551 | +\else | |
| 552 | + % regular IEEE prefers the singular form | |
| 553 | + \section*{Acknowledgment} | |
| 554 | +\fi | |
| 555 | + | |
| 556 | + | |
| 557 | +The authors would like to thank... | |
| 558 | + | |
| 559 | + | |
| 560 | + | |
| 561 | + | |
| 562 | + | |
| 563 | +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference | |
| 564 | +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page | |
| 565 | +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if | |
| 566 | +% the document is modified later | |
| 567 | +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8} | |
| 568 | +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired: | |
| 569 | +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}} | |
| 570 | + | |
| 571 | +% references section | |
| 572 | + | |
| 573 | +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file | |
| 574 | +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at: | |
| 575 | +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/ | |
| 576 | +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at: | |
| 577 | +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/ | |
| 578 | +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran} | |
| 579 | +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s) | |
| 580 | +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper} | |
| 581 | +% | |
| 582 | +% <OR> manually copy in the resultant .bbl file | |
| 583 | +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references | |
| 584 | +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box) | |
| 585 | +\begin{thebibliography}{1} | |
| 586 | + | |
| 587 | +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka} | |
| 588 | +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus | |
| 589 | + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999. | |
| 590 | + | |
| 591 | +\end{thebibliography} | |
| 592 | + | |
| 593 | + | |
| 594 | + | |
| 595 | + | |
| 596 | +% that's all folks | |
| 597 | +\end{document} | |
| 598 | + | |
| 599 | + | ... | ... |
bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
0 → 100644
| 1 | +++ a/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex | |
| 1 | + | |
| 2 | +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex | |
| 3 | +%% V1.4b | |
| 4 | +%% 2015/08/26 | |
| 5 | +%% by Michael Shell | |
| 6 | +%% See: | |
| 7 | +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ | |
| 8 | +%% for current contact information. | |
| 9 | +%% | |
| 10 | +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls | |
| 11 | +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE | |
| 12 | +%% Computer Society journal paper. | |
| 13 | +%% | |
| 14 | +%% Support sites: | |
| 15 | +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ | |
| 16 | +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran | |
| 17 | +%% and | |
| 18 | +%% http://www.ieee.org/ | |
| 19 | + | |
| 20 | +%%************************************************************************* | |
| 21 | +%% Legal Notice: | |
| 22 | +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or | |
| 23 | +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or | |
| 24 | +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! | |
| 25 | +%% User assumes all risk. | |
| 26 | +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for | |
| 27 | +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, | |
| 28 | +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse | |
| 29 | +%% of any information contained here. | |
| 30 | +%% | |
| 31 | +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not | |
| 32 | +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. | |
| 33 | +%% | |
| 34 | +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) | |
| 35 | +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, | |
| 36 | +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included | |
| 37 | +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released | |
| 38 | +%% 2003/12/01 or later. | |
| 39 | +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. | |
| 40 | +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** | |
| 41 | +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** | |
| 42 | +%%************************************************************************* | |
| 43 | + | |
| 44 | + | |
| 45 | +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** | |
| 46 | +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** | |
| 47 | +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** | |
| 48 | +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** | |
| 49 | +% The testflow support page is at: | |
| 50 | +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ | |
| 51 | + | |
| 52 | + | |
| 53 | +\documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran} | |
| 54 | +% | |
| 55 | +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, | |
| 56 | +% manually specify the path to it like: | |
| 57 | +% \documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran} | |
| 58 | + | |
| 59 | + | |
| 60 | + | |
| 61 | + | |
| 62 | + | |
| 63 | +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include: | |
| 64 | +% (uncomment the ones you want to load) | |
| 65 | + | |
| 66 | + | |
| 67 | +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES *** | |
| 68 | +% | |
| 69 | +%\usepackage{ifpdf} | |
| 70 | +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional | |
| 71 | +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi. | |
| 72 | +% usage: | |
| 73 | +% \ifpdf | |
| 74 | +% % pdf code | |
| 75 | +% \else | |
| 76 | +% % dvi code | |
| 77 | +% \fi | |
| 78 | +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from: | |
| 79 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf | |
| 80 | +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin | |
| 81 | +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way. | |
| 82 | +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may | |
| 83 | +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages. | |
| 84 | + | |
| 85 | + | |
| 86 | + | |
| 87 | + | |
| 88 | + | |
| 89 | + | |
| 90 | +% *** CITATION PACKAGES *** | |
| 91 | +% | |
| 92 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 93 | + % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option | |
| 94 | + % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003) | |
| 95 | + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite} | |
| 96 | +\else | |
| 97 | + % normal IEEE | |
| 98 | + \usepackage{cite} | |
| 99 | +\fi | |
| 100 | +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau | |
| 101 | +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package | |
| 102 | +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will | |
| 103 | +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly | |
| 104 | +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using | |
| 105 | +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's | |
| 106 | +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's | |
| 107 | +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off | |
| 108 | +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. | |
| 109 | +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use | |
| 110 | +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. | |
| 111 | +% The latest version can be obtained at: | |
| 112 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite | |
| 113 | +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. | |
| 114 | +% | |
| 115 | +% Note that some packages require special options to format as the Computer | |
| 116 | +% Society requires. In particular, Computer Society papers do not use | |
| 117 | +% compressed citation ranges as is done in typical IEEE papers | |
| 118 | +% (e.g., [1]-[4]). Instead, they list every citation separately in order | |
| 119 | +% (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite | |
| 120 | +% package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0 | |
| 121 | +% and later. Note also the use of a CLASSOPTION conditional provided by | |
| 122 | +% IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later. | |
| 123 | + | |
| 124 | + | |
| 125 | + | |
| 126 | + | |
| 127 | + | |
| 128 | +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES *** | |
| 129 | +% | |
| 130 | +\ifCLASSINFOpdf | |
| 131 | + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} | |
| 132 | + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are | |
| 133 | + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}} | |
| 134 | + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with | |
| 135 | + % every instance of \includegraphics | |
| 136 | + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png} | |
| 137 | +\else | |
| 138 | + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx | |
| 139 | + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no | |
| 140 | + % driver is specified. | |
| 141 | + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx} | |
| 142 | + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are | |
| 143 | + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}} | |
| 144 | + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with | |
| 145 | + % every instance of \includegraphics | |
| 146 | + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps} | |
| 147 | +\fi | |
| 148 | +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is | |
| 149 | +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already | |
| 150 | +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation | |
| 151 | +% can be obtained at: | |
| 152 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx | |
| 153 | +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in | |
| 154 | +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at: | |
| 155 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex | |
| 156 | +% | |
| 157 | +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated | |
| 158 | +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics | |
| 159 | +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure | |
| 160 | +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and | |
| 161 | +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats | |
| 162 | +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as | |
| 163 | +% well as large increases in file sizes. | |
| 164 | +% | |
| 165 | +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at: | |
| 166 | +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex | |
| 167 | + | |
| 168 | + | |
| 169 | + | |
| 170 | + | |
| 171 | + | |
| 172 | + | |
| 173 | +% *** MATH PACKAGES *** | |
| 174 | +% | |
| 175 | +%\usepackage{amsmath} | |
| 176 | +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides | |
| 177 | +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. | |
| 178 | +% | |
| 179 | +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000 | |
| 180 | +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use: | |
| 181 | +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 | |
| 182 | +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally | |
| 183 | +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest | |
| 184 | +% version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 185 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath | |
| 186 | + | |
| 187 | + | |
| 188 | + | |
| 189 | + | |
| 190 | + | |
| 191 | +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES *** | |
| 192 | +% | |
| 193 | +%\usepackage{algorithmic} | |
| 194 | +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito. | |
| 195 | +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms. | |
| 196 | +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure | |
| 197 | +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm | |
| 198 | +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or | |
| 199 | +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated | |
| 200 | +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide | |
| 201 | +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of | |
| 202 | +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at: | |
| 203 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms | |
| 204 | +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable) | |
| 205 | +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos: | |
| 206 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx | |
| 207 | + | |
| 208 | + | |
| 209 | + | |
| 210 | + | |
| 211 | +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES *** | |
| 212 | +% | |
| 213 | +%\usepackage{array} | |
| 214 | +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves | |
| 215 | +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better | |
| 216 | +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table | |
| 217 | +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with | |
| 218 | +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly | |
| 219 | +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty) | |
| 220 | +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The | |
| 221 | +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 222 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array | |
| 223 | + | |
| 224 | + | |
| 225 | +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to | |
| 226 | +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high | |
| 227 | +% quality. | |
| 228 | + | |
| 229 | + | |
| 230 | + | |
| 231 | + | |
| 232 | +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** | |
| 233 | +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 234 | +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} | |
| 235 | +%\else | |
| 236 | +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} | |
| 237 | +%\fi | |
| 238 | +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement | |
| 239 | +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is | |
| 240 | +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However, | |
| 241 | +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty | |
| 242 | +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result | |
| 243 | +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure | |
| 244 | +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since | |
| 245 | +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls | |
| 246 | +% handling of captions. | |
| 247 | +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather | |
| 248 | +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need | |
| 249 | +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether | |
| 250 | +% compsoc mode has been enabled. | |
| 251 | +% | |
| 252 | +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: | |
| 253 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig | |
| 254 | + | |
| 255 | + | |
| 256 | + | |
| 257 | + | |
| 258 | +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES *** | |
| 259 | +% | |
| 260 | +%\usepackage{fixltx2e} | |
| 261 | +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by | |
| 262 | +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems | |
| 263 | +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current | |
| 264 | +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not | |
| 265 | +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a | |
| 266 | +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column | |
| 267 | +% figure. | |
| 268 | +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's | |
| 269 | +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will | |
| 270 | +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer | |
| 271 | +% needed. | |
| 272 | +% The latest version and documentation can be found at: | |
| 273 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e | |
| 274 | + | |
| 275 | + | |
| 276 | +%\usepackage{stfloats} | |
| 277 | +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e | |
| 278 | +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well | |
| 279 | +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in | |
| 280 | +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command: | |
| 281 | +%\fnbelowfloat | |
| 282 | +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard | |
| 283 | +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package | |
| 284 | +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work | |
| 285 | +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest | |
| 286 | +% version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 287 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats | |
| 288 | +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow | |
| 289 | +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note | |
| 290 | +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try | |
| 291 | +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty | |
| 292 | +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in | |
| 293 | +% such ways. | |
| 294 | +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible. | |
| 295 | +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features | |
| 296 | +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats: | |
| 297 | +% | |
| 298 | +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix} | |
| 299 | +% The latest version can be found at: | |
| 300 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix | |
| 301 | + | |
| 302 | + | |
| 303 | + | |
| 304 | + | |
| 305 | +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff | |
| 306 | +% \usepackage[nomarkers]{endfloat} | |
| 307 | +% \let\MYoriglatexcaption\caption | |
| 308 | +% \renewcommand{\caption}[2][\relax]{\MYoriglatexcaption[#2]{#2}} | |
| 309 | +%\fi | |
| 310 | +% endfloat.sty was written by James Darrell McCauley, Jeff Goldberg and | |
| 311 | +% Axel Sommerfeldt. This package may be useful when used in conjunction with | |
| 312 | +% IEEEtran.cls' captionsoff option. Some IEEE journals/societies require that | |
| 313 | +% submissions have lists of figures/tables at the end of the paper and that | |
| 314 | +% figures/tables without any captions are placed on a page by themselves at | |
| 315 | +% the end of the document. If needed, the draftcls IEEEtran class option or | |
| 316 | +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch interface can be used to increase the line | |
| 317 | +% spacing as well. Be sure and use the nomarkers option of endfloat to | |
| 318 | +% prevent endfloat from "marking" where the figures would have been placed | |
| 319 | +% in the text. The two hack lines of code above are a slight modification of | |
| 320 | +% that suggested by in the endfloat docs (section 8.4.1) to ensure that | |
| 321 | +% the full captions always appear in the list of figures/tables - even if | |
| 322 | +% the user used the short optional argument of \caption[]{}. | |
| 323 | +% IEEE papers do not typically make use of \caption[]'s optional argument, | |
| 324 | +% so this should not be an issue. A similar trick can be used to disable | |
| 325 | +% captions of packages such as subfig.sty that lack options to turn off | |
| 326 | +% the subcaptions: | |
| 327 | +% For subfig.sty: | |
| 328 | +% \let\MYorigsubfloat\subfloat | |
| 329 | +% \renewcommand{\subfloat}[2][\relax]{\MYorigsubfloat[]{#2}} | |
| 330 | +% However, the above trick will not work if both optional arguments of | |
| 331 | +% the \subfloat command are used. Furthermore, there needs to be a | |
| 332 | +% description of each subfigure *somewhere* and endfloat does not add | |
| 333 | +% subfigure captions to its list of figures. Thus, the best approach is to | |
| 334 | +% avoid the use of subfigure captions (many IEEE journals avoid them anyway) | |
| 335 | +% and instead reference/explain all the subfigures within the main caption. | |
| 336 | +% The latest version of endfloat.sty and its documentation can obtained at: | |
| 337 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/endfloat | |
| 338 | +% | |
| 339 | +% The IEEEtran \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff conditional can also be used | |
| 340 | +% later in the document, say, to conditionally put the References on a | |
| 341 | +% page by themselves. | |
| 342 | + | |
| 343 | + | |
| 344 | + | |
| 345 | + | |
| 346 | +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES *** | |
| 347 | +% | |
| 348 | +%\usepackage{url} | |
| 349 | +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for | |
| 350 | +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX | |
| 351 | +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: | |
| 352 | +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url | |
| 353 | +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}. | |
| 354 | + | |
| 355 | + | |
| 356 | + | |
| 357 | + | |
| 358 | + | |
| 359 | +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. *** | |
| 360 | +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). *** | |
| 361 | +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later. | |
| 362 | +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan | |
| 363 | +% to submit to, of course. ) | |
| 364 | + | |
| 365 | + | |
| 366 | +% correct bad hyphenation here | |
| 367 | +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor} | |
| 368 | + | |
| 369 | + | |
| 370 | +\begin{document} | |
| 371 | +% | |
| 372 | +% paper title | |
| 373 | +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, | |
| 374 | +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually | |
| 375 | +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. | |
| 376 | +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. | |
| 377 | +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title. | |
| 378 | +\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for\\ IEEE Computer Society Journals} | |
| 379 | +% | |
| 380 | +% | |
| 381 | +% author names and IEEE memberships | |
| 382 | +% note positions of commas and nonbreaking spaces ( ~ ) LaTeX will not break | |
| 383 | +% a structure at a ~ so this keeps an author's name from being broken across | |
| 384 | +% two lines. | |
| 385 | +% use \thanks{} to gain access to the first footnote area | |
| 386 | +% a separate \thanks must be used for each paragraph as LaTeX2e's \thanks | |
| 387 | +% was not built to handle multiple paragraphs | |
| 388 | +% | |
| 389 | +% | |
| 390 | +%\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks is a special \thanks that produces the bulleted | |
| 391 | +% lists the Computer Society journals use for "first footnote" author | |
| 392 | +% affiliations. Use \IEEEcompsocthanksitem which works much like \item | |
| 393 | +% for each affiliation group. When not in compsoc mode, | |
| 394 | +% \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks becomes like \thanks and | |
| 395 | +% \IEEEcompsocthanksitem becomes a line break with idention. This | |
| 396 | +% facilitates dual compilation, although admittedly the differences in the | |
| 397 | +% desired content of \author between the different types of papers makes a | |
| 398 | +% one-size-fits-all approach a daunting prospect. For instance, compsoc | |
| 399 | +% journal papers have the author affiliations above the "Manuscript | |
| 400 | +% received ..." text while in non-compsoc journals this is reversed. Sigh. | |
| 401 | + | |
| 402 | +\author{Michael~Shell,~\IEEEmembership{Member,~IEEE,} | |
| 403 | + John~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Fellow,~OSA,} | |
| 404 | + and~Jane~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Life~Fellow,~IEEE}% <-this % stops a space | |
| 405 | +\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem M. Shell was with the Department | |
| 406 | +of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, | |
| 407 | +GA, 30332.\protect\\ | |
| 408 | +% note need leading \protect in front of \\ to get a newline within \thanks as | |
| 409 | +% \\ is fragile and will error, could use \hfil\break instead. | |
| 410 | +E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html | |
| 411 | +\IEEEcompsocthanksitem J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops an unwanted space | |
| 412 | +\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised August 26, 2015.}} | |
| 413 | + | |
| 414 | +% note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - | |
| 415 | +% these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name | |
| 416 | +% and the end of the author line. i.e., if you had this: | |
| 417 | +% | |
| 418 | +% \author{....lastname \thanks{...} \thanks{...} } | |
| 419 | +% ^------------^------------^----Do not want these spaces! | |
| 420 | +% | |
| 421 | +% a space would be appended to the last name and could cause every name on that | |
| 422 | +% line to be shifted left slightly. This is one of those "LaTeX things". For | |
| 423 | +% instance, "\textbf{A} \textbf{B}" will typeset as "A B" not "AB". To get | |
| 424 | +% "AB" then you have to do: "\textbf{A}\textbf{B}" | |
| 425 | +% \thanks is no different in this regard, so shield the last } of each \thanks | |
| 426 | +% that ends a line with a % and do not let a space in before the next \thanks. | |
| 427 | +% Spaces after \IEEEmembership other than the last one are OK (and needed) as | |
| 428 | +% you are supposed to have spaces between the names. For what it is worth, | |
| 429 | +% this is a minor point as most people would not even notice if the said evil | |
| 430 | +% space somehow managed to creep in. | |
| 431 | + | |
| 432 | + | |
| 433 | + | |
| 434 | +% The paper headers | |
| 435 | +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~14, No.~8, August~2015}% | |
| 436 | +{Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Computer Society Journals} | |
| 437 | +% The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages | |
| 438 | +% after the title page when using the twoside option. | |
| 439 | +% | |
| 440 | +% *** Note that you probably will NOT want to include the author's *** | |
| 441 | +% *** name in the headers of peer review papers. *** | |
| 442 | +% You can use \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview for conditional compilation here if | |
| 443 | +% you desire. | |
| 444 | + | |
| 445 | + | |
| 446 | + | |
| 447 | +% The publisher's ID mark at the bottom of the page is less important with | |
| 448 | +% Computer Society journal papers as those publications place the marks | |
| 449 | +% outside of the main text columns and, therefore, unlike regular IEEE | |
| 450 | +% journals, the available text space is not reduced by their presence. | |
| 451 | +% If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like | |
| 452 | +% this: | |
| 453 | +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE} | |
| 454 | +% or like this to get the Computer Society new two part style. | |
| 455 | +%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE}% | |
| 456 | +%\hspace{\columnsep}\makebox[\columnwidth]{Published by the IEEE Computer Society\hfill}} | |
| 457 | +% Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second | |
| 458 | +% column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark (Computer Society jorunal | |
| 459 | +% papers don't need this extra clearance.) | |
| 460 | + | |
| 461 | + | |
| 462 | + | |
| 463 | +% use for special paper notices | |
| 464 | +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} | |
| 465 | + | |
| 466 | + | |
| 467 | + | |
| 468 | +% for Computer Society papers, we must declare the abstract and index terms | |
| 469 | +% PRIOR to the title within the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext IEEEtran | |
| 470 | +% command as these need to go into the title area created by \maketitle. | |
| 471 | +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations | |
| 472 | +% in the abstract or keywords. | |
| 473 | +\IEEEtitleabstractindextext{% | |
| 474 | +\begin{abstract} | |
| 475 | +The abstract goes here. | |
| 476 | +\end{abstract} | |
| 477 | + | |
| 478 | +% Note that keywords are not normally used for peerreview papers. | |
| 479 | +\begin{IEEEkeywords} | |
| 480 | +Computer Society, IEEE, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template. | |
| 481 | +\end{IEEEkeywords}} | |
| 482 | + | |
| 483 | + | |
| 484 | +% make the title area | |
| 485 | +\maketitle | |
| 486 | + | |
| 487 | + | |
| 488 | +% To allow for easy dual compilation without having to reenter the | |
| 489 | +% abstract/keywords data, the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext text will | |
| 490 | +% not be used in maketitle, but will appear (i.e., to be "transported") | |
| 491 | +% here as \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext when the compsoc | |
| 492 | +% or transmag modes are not selected <OR> if conference mode is selected | |
| 493 | +% - because all conference papers position the abstract like regular | |
| 494 | +% papers do. | |
| 495 | +\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext | |
| 496 | +% \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext has no effect when using | |
| 497 | +% compsoc or transmag under a non-conference mode. | |
| 498 | + | |
| 499 | + | |
| 500 | + | |
| 501 | +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover | |
| 502 | +% page as needed: | |
| 503 | +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview | |
| 504 | +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center} | |
| 505 | +% \fi | |
| 506 | +% | |
| 507 | +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and | |
| 508 | +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes. | |
| 509 | +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle | |
| 510 | + | |
| 511 | + | |
| 512 | + | |
| 513 | +\IEEEraisesectionheading{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}} | |
| 514 | +% Computer Society journal (but not conference!) papers do something unusual | |
| 515 | +% with the very first section heading (almost always called "Introduction"). | |
| 516 | +% They place it ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls does not automatically do | |
| 517 | +% this for you, but you can achieve this effect with the provided | |
| 518 | +% \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command. Note the need to keep any \label that | |
| 519 | +% is to refer to the section immediately after \section in the above as | |
| 520 | +% \IEEEraisesectionheading puts \section within a raised box. | |
| 521 | + | |
| 522 | + | |
| 523 | + | |
| 524 | + | |
| 525 | +% The very first letter is a 2 line initial drop letter followed | |
| 526 | +% by the rest of the first word in caps (small caps for compsoc). | |
| 527 | +% | |
| 528 | +% form to use if the first word consists of a single letter: | |
| 529 | +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{demo} file is .... | |
| 530 | +% | |
| 531 | +% form to use if you need the single drop letter followed by | |
| 532 | +% normal text (unknown if ever used by the IEEE): | |
| 533 | +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{}demo file is .... | |
| 534 | +% | |
| 535 | +% Some journals put the first two words in caps: | |
| 536 | +% \IEEEPARstart{T}{his demo} file is .... | |
| 537 | +% | |
| 538 | +% Here we have the typical use of a "T" for an initial drop letter | |
| 539 | +% and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word. | |
| 540 | +\IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' | |
| 541 | +for IEEE Computer Society journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using | |
| 542 | +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later. | |
| 543 | +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter | |
| 544 | +% (should never be an issue) | |
| 545 | +I wish you the best of success. | |
| 546 | + | |
| 547 | +\hfill mds | |
| 548 | + | |
| 549 | +\hfill August 26, 2015 | |
| 550 | + | |
| 551 | +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here} | |
| 552 | +Subsection text here. | |
| 553 | + | |
| 554 | +% needed in second column of first page if using \IEEEpubid | |
| 555 | +%\IEEEpubidadjcol | |
| 556 | + | |
| 557 | +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here} | |
| 558 | +Subsubsection text here. | |
| 559 | + | |
| 560 | + | |
| 561 | +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package. | |
| 562 | +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption. | |
| 563 | +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics. | |
| 564 | +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that | |
| 565 | +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption | |
| 566 | +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because | |
| 567 | +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your | |
| 568 | +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}. | |
| 569 | +% | |
| 570 | +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class | |
| 571 | +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be | |
| 572 | +% displayed while in draft mode. | |
| 573 | +% | |
| 574 | +%\begin{figure}[!t] | |
| 575 | +%\centering | |
| 576 | +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure} | |
| 577 | +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, | |
| 578 | +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared | |
| 579 | +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. | |
| 580 | +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} | |
| 581 | +%\label{fig_sim} | |
| 582 | +%\end{figure} | |
| 583 | + | |
| 584 | +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this | |
| 585 | +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats. | |
| 586 | +% However, the Computer Society has been known to put floats at the bottom. | |
| 587 | + | |
| 588 | + | |
| 589 | +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures. | |
| 590 | +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.) | |
| 591 | +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command, | |
| 592 | +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption. | |
| 593 | +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing. | |
| 594 | +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a | |
| 595 | +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur. | |
| 596 | +% | |
| 597 | +%\begin{figure*}[!t] | |
| 598 | +%\centering | |
| 599 | +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% | |
| 600 | +%\label{fig_first_case}} | |
| 601 | +%\hfil | |
| 602 | +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% | |
| 603 | +%\label{fig_second_case}} | |
| 604 | +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} | |
| 605 | +%\label{fig_sim} | |
| 606 | +%\end{figure*} | |
| 607 | +% | |
| 608 | +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure | |
| 609 | +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will | |
| 610 | +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. | |
| 611 | +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure | |
| 612 | +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a | |
| 613 | +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, | |
| 614 | +% e.g., \subfloat[]. | |
| 615 | + | |
| 616 | + | |
| 617 | +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the | |
| 618 | +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table | |
| 619 | +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words | |
| 620 | +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to | |
| 621 | +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or | |
| 622 | +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as | |
| 623 | +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. | |
| 624 | +% The \label must come after \caption as always. | |
| 625 | +% | |
| 626 | +%\begin{table}[!t] | |
| 627 | +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste | |
| 628 | +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3} | |
| 629 | +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of | |
| 630 | +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells | |
| 631 | +%\caption{An Example of a Table} | |
| 632 | +%\label{table_example} | |
| 633 | +%\centering | |
| 634 | +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables | |
| 635 | +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here. | |
| 636 | +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|} | |
| 637 | +%\hline | |
| 638 | +%One & Two\\ | |
| 639 | +%\hline | |
| 640 | +%Three & Four\\ | |
| 641 | +%\hline | |
| 642 | +%\end{tabular} | |
| 643 | +%\end{table} | |
| 644 | + | |
| 645 | + | |
| 646 | +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column | |
| 647 | +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, | |
| 648 | +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it | |
| 649 | +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but | |
| 650 | +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use | |
| 651 | +% top floats exclusively. | |
| 652 | +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places | |
| 653 | +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the | |
| 654 | +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. | |
| 655 | + | |
| 656 | + | |
| 657 | + | |
| 658 | + | |
| 659 | +\section{Conclusion} | |
| 660 | +The conclusion goes here. | |
| 661 | + | |
| 662 | + | |
| 663 | + | |
| 664 | + | |
| 665 | + | |
| 666 | +% if have a single appendix: | |
| 667 | +%\appendix[Proof of the Zonklar Equations] | |
| 668 | +% or | |
| 669 | +%\appendix % for no appendix heading | |
| 670 | +% do not use \section anymore after \appendix, only \section* | |
| 671 | +% is possibly needed | |
| 672 | + | |
| 673 | +% use appendices with more than one appendix | |
| 674 | +% then use \section to start each appendix | |
| 675 | +% you must declare a \section before using any | |
| 676 | +% \subsection or using \label (\appendices by itself | |
| 677 | +% starts a section numbered zero.) | |
| 678 | +% | |
| 679 | + | |
| 680 | + | |
| 681 | +\appendices | |
| 682 | +\section{Proof of the First Zonklar Equation} | |
| 683 | +Appendix one text goes here. | |
| 684 | + | |
| 685 | +% you can choose not to have a title for an appendix | |
| 686 | +% if you want by leaving the argument blank | |
| 687 | +\section{} | |
| 688 | +Appendix two text goes here. | |
| 689 | + | |
| 690 | + | |
| 691 | +% use section* for acknowledgment | |
| 692 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc | |
| 693 | + % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form | |
| 694 | + \section*{Acknowledgments} | |
| 695 | +\else | |
| 696 | + % regular IEEE prefers the singular form | |
| 697 | + \section*{Acknowledgment} | |
| 698 | +\fi | |
| 699 | + | |
| 700 | + | |
| 701 | +The authors would like to thank... | |
| 702 | + | |
| 703 | + | |
| 704 | +% Can use something like this to put references on a page | |
| 705 | +% by themselves when using endfloat and the captionsoff option. | |
| 706 | +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff | |
| 707 | + \newpage | |
| 708 | +\fi | |
| 709 | + | |
| 710 | + | |
| 711 | + | |
| 712 | +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference | |
| 713 | +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page | |
| 714 | +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if | |
| 715 | +% the document is modified later | |
| 716 | +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8} | |
| 717 | +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired: | |
| 718 | +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}} | |
| 719 | + | |
| 720 | +% references section | |
| 721 | + | |
| 722 | +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file | |
| 723 | +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at: | |
| 724 | +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/ | |
| 725 | +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at: | |
| 726 | +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/ | |
| 727 | +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran} | |
| 728 | +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s) | |
| 729 | +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper} | |
| 730 | +% | |
| 731 | +% <OR> manually copy in the resultant .bbl file | |
| 732 | +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references | |
| 733 | +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box) | |
| 734 | +\begin{thebibliography}{1} | |
| 735 | + | |
| 736 | +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka} | |
| 737 | +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus | |
| 738 | + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999. | |
| 739 | + | |
| 740 | +\end{thebibliography} | |
| 741 | + | |
| 742 | +% biography section | |
| 743 | +% | |
| 744 | +% If you have an EPS/PDF photo (graphicx package needed) extra braces are | |
| 745 | +% needed around the contents of the optional argument to biography to prevent | |
| 746 | +% the LaTeX parser from getting confused when it sees the complicated | |
| 747 | +% \includegraphics command within an optional argument. (You could create | |
| 748 | +% your own custom macro containing the \includegraphics command to make things | |
| 749 | +% simpler here.) | |
| 750 | +%\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{mshell}}]{Michael Shell} | |
| 751 | +% or if you just want to reserve a space for a photo: | |
| 752 | + | |
| 753 | +\begin{IEEEbiography}{Michael Shell} | |
| 754 | +Biography text here. | |
| 755 | +\end{IEEEbiography} | |
| 756 | + | |
| 757 | +% if you will not have a photo at all: | |
| 758 | +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{John Doe} | |
| 759 | +Biography text here. | |
| 760 | +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} | |
| 761 | + | |
| 762 | +% insert where needed to balance the two columns on the last page with | |
| 763 | +% biographies | |
| 764 | +%\newpage | |
| 765 | + | |
| 766 | +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{Jane Doe} | |
| 767 | +Biography text here. | |
| 768 | +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} | |
| 769 | + | |
| 770 | +% You can push biographies down or up by placing | |
| 771 | +% a \vfill before or after them. The appropriate | |
| 772 | +% use of \vfill depends on what kind of text is | |
| 773 | +% on the last page and whether or not the columns | |
| 774 | +% are being equalized. | |
| 775 | + | |
| 776 | +%\vfill | |
| 777 | + | |
| 778 | +% Can be used to pull up biographies so that the bottom of the last one | |
| 779 | +% is flush with the other column. | |
| 780 | +%\enlargethispage{-5in} | |
| 781 | + | |
| 782 | + | |
| 783 | + | |
| 784 | +% that's all folks | |
| 785 | +\end{document} | |
| 786 | + | |
| 787 | + | ... | ... |
changelog.txt
0 → 100644
| 1 | +++ a/changelog.txt | |
| 1 | + | |
| 2 | + | |
| 3 | + Changelog history of the IEEEtran LaTeX class. | |
| 4 | + 2015/08/26 | |
| 5 | + by Michael Shell (MDS) | |
| 6 | + http://www.michaelshell.org/ | |
| 7 | + | |
| 8 | + | |
| 9 | + 2015/08/26 V1.8b (MDS) changes: | |
| 10 | + | |
| 11 | + 1) Added new comsoc mode for the IEEE Communications Society. | |
| 12 | + This mode (at present) only invokes the use of the newtxmath math fonts. | |
| 13 | + | |
| 14 | + 2) Revised IEEEeqnarray column specifications to work with active " | |
| 15 | + (or other punctuation catcode changes) as with babel under the | |
| 16 | + german or ngerman language modes. | |
| 17 | + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem. | |
| 18 | + | |
| 19 | + 3) Added \indexspace and other index related macros as newer versions of | |
| 20 | + article.cls now do. These macros are needed to avoid an error when | |
| 21 | + using the glossaries package. | |
| 22 | + Thanks to Sebastian Nyberg for suggesting this change. | |
| 23 | + | |
| 24 | + 4) Fixed odd/even page header font bug under compsoc mode and | |
| 25 | + other page style code improvements. | |
| 26 | + Thanks to Marco Paolieri for reporting this problem. | |
| 27 | + | |
| 28 | + 5) Added hooks to allow for easy control of spacing above title. | |
| 29 | + | |
| 30 | + 6) Added the \IEEEnoauxwrite command. | |
| 31 | + Thanks to Sudarshan Mukherjee for suggesting this feature. | |
| 32 | + | |
| 33 | + | |
| 34 | + 2014/09/17 V1.8a (MDS) changes: | |
| 35 | + | |
| 36 | + 1) Extensive rework of the compsoc mode to comply with the latest standards | |
| 37 | + of the IEEE Computer Society. | |
| 38 | + | |
| 39 | + 2) Internal code improvements for page setup and command argument | |
| 40 | + processing. | |
| 41 | + | |
| 42 | + 3) Fixed abstract, index terms and diamond line for compsoc technotes. | |
| 43 | + Thanks to Dimitris Schinianakis for reporting this problem. | |
| 44 | + | |
| 45 | + 4) New cspaper option to support the special trim paper size | |
| 46 | + (7.875in x 10.75in) used in actual Computer Society journals. For | |
| 47 | + compsoc journal mode, typesetting will not be altered by the use of this | |
| 48 | + option. | |
| 49 | + | |
| 50 | + 5) New \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command to provide for the special raised | |
| 51 | + first section heading of Computer Society journal papers. | |
| 52 | + | |
| 53 | + 6) Increased \clubpenalty, \widowpenalty, \displaywidowpenalty to | |
| 54 | + discourage paragraph breaks at the first and last lines. | |
| 55 | + Thanks to Dirk Beyer for suggesting this change. | |
| 56 | + | |
| 57 | + 7) Added lines per column console message. | |
| 58 | + | |
| 59 | + | |
| 60 | +******* | |
| 61 | + 2012/12/27 V1.8 (MDS) changes:: | |
| 62 | + | |
| 63 | + 1) New transmag class option to support the IEEE Transactions on Magnetics | |
| 64 | + format. Thanks to Wei Yingkang, Sangmin Suh and Benjamin Gaussens | |
| 65 | + for suggestions and beta testing. | |
| 66 | + | |
| 67 | + 2) The \IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext and | |
| 68 | + \IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext | |
| 69 | + commands have been deprecated in favor of their | |
| 70 | + \IEEEtitleabstractindextext and \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext | |
| 71 | + (observe that the "not" has changed to "non") equivalents. This change | |
| 72 | + generalizes and decouples them from compsoc mode because the new | |
| 73 | + transmag mode also uses them now. | |
| 74 | + | |
| 75 | + 3) Added new *-forms of \IEEEyesnumber*, \IEEEnonumber*, \IEEEyessubnumber*, | |
| 76 | + and \IEEEnosubnumber* (the non-star form of the latter is also new) which | |
| 77 | + persist across IEEEeqnarray lines until countermanded. To provide for | |
| 78 | + continued subequations across instances of IEEEeqnarrays as well as for | |
| 79 | + subequations that follow a main equation (e.g., 14, 14a, 14b ...) | |
| 80 | + \IEEEyessubnumber no longer automatically increments the equation number | |
| 81 | + on it's first invocation of a subequation group. Invoke both | |
| 82 | + \IEEEyesnumber\IEEEyessubnumber together to start a new | |
| 83 | + equation/subequation group. | |
| 84 | + | |
| 85 | + 4) Hyperref links now work with IEEEeqnarray equations. | |
| 86 | + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem. | |
| 87 | + | |
| 88 | + 5) Fixed \markboth so that it does not cause an error with babel.sty. | |
| 89 | + Thanks to Frank Meier for suggesting this change. | |
| 90 | + | |
| 91 | + 6) Change all instances of ~ to \nobreakspace to avoid | |
| 92 | + | |
| 93 | + ! Argument of \language@active@arg~ has an extra } | |
| 94 | + | |
| 95 | + figure caption error with bable.sty under spanish. Thanks to | |
| 96 | + Manuel Olivares and Javier Bezos for suggesting this change. | |
| 97 | + | |
| 98 | + 7) Allow line breaks within long theorem names. | |
| 99 | + Thanks to Miquel Payaro for suggesting this change. | |
| 100 | + | |
| 101 | + 8) Revised \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{} to allow inner alignments without | |
| 102 | + requiring extra containing braces to prevent an incomplete \ifx error. | |
| 103 | + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser and Auke van der Valk for reporting this | |
| 104 | + problem. | |
| 105 | + | |
| 106 | + 9) Revised spacing at top of top figures and tables to better | |
| 107 | + align with the top main text lines as IEEE does in its journals. | |
| 108 | + Thanks to Dirk Beyer for reporting this issue and beta testing. | |
| 109 | + | |
| 110 | +10) Removed support for legacy IED list commands, legacy QED and proof | |
| 111 | + commands and the legacy biography and biographynophoto environments. | |
| 112 | + IEEEtran no longer defines or references \labelindent so as to | |
| 113 | + avoid namespace problems with list packages that define it. | |
| 114 | + Thanks to Sven Köhler for reporting the problem with enumitem.sty. | |
| 115 | + | |
| 116 | + | |
| 117 | +******* | |
| 118 | + 2007/03/05 V1.7a (MDS) changes: | |
| 119 | + | |
| 120 | + 1) Corrected problem of unwanted two column peer review title page format. | |
| 121 | + Thanks to Virgilio Rodriguez for reporting this bug. | |
| 122 | + | |
| 123 | + 2) "depreciated" -> "deprecated". Thanks to Virgilio Rodriguez for | |
| 124 | + suggesting this change. | |
| 125 | + | |
| 126 | + | |
| 127 | + | |
| 128 | +******* | |
| 129 | + 2007/01/11 V1.7 (MDS) changes: | |
| 130 | + | |
| 131 | + 1) New class option compsoc to support the IEEE Computer Society format. | |
| 132 | + | |
| 133 | + 2) New class option captionsoff disables the display of figure/table | |
| 134 | + captions. endfloat.sty is now mentioned in the docs. Thanks to Geoff | |
| 135 | + Walker for suggesting these changes. | |
| 136 | + | |
| 137 | + 3) Fixed compatibility issues with subfig.sty and caption.sty. Thanks to | |
| 138 | + Steven Douglas Cochran and Axel Sommerfeldt for suggesting this change. | |
| 139 | + | |
| 140 | + 4) New \CLASSINPUT, \CLASSOPTION and \CLASSINFO interface allows for more | |
| 141 | + user control and conditional compilation. | |
| 142 | + | |
| 143 | + 5) \ifcenterfigcaptions (\centerfigcaptionstrue, \centerfigcaptionsfalse), | |
| 144 | + \CMPARstart and \overrideIEEEmargins have been removed and no are | |
| 145 | + longer supported. The effect of \overrideIEEEmargins can be mimicked | |
| 146 | + via the more general \CLASSINPUT interface: | |
| 147 | + % US letter paper: | |
| 148 | + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{0.775in} | |
| 149 | + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}{0.585in} | |
| 150 | + % A4 paper: | |
| 151 | + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{17mm} | |
| 152 | + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}{11.647mm} | |
| 153 | + | |
| 154 | + 6) Several commands and environments have been deprecated in favor of | |
| 155 | + replacements with IEEE prefixes to better avoid potential future name | |
| 156 | + clashes with other packages. Legacy code retained to allow the use of | |
| 157 | + the obsolete forms (for now), but with a warning message to the console | |
| 158 | + during compilation: | |
| 159 | + \IEEEauthorblockA, \IEEEauthorblockN, \IEEEauthorrefmark, | |
| 160 | + \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEkeywords, \IEEEPARstart, | |
| 161 | + \IEEEproof, \IEEEpubid, \IEEEpubidadjcol, \IEEEQED, \IEEEQEDclosed, | |
| 162 | + \IEEEQEDopen, \IEEEspecialpapernotice. IEEEtran.cls now redefines | |
| 163 | + \proof in way to avoid problems with the amsthm.sty package. | |
| 164 | + For IED lists: | |
| 165 | + \IEEEiedlabeljustifyc, \IEEEiedlabeljustifyl, \IEEEiedlabeljustifyr, | |
| 166 | + \IEEEnocalcleftmargin, \IEEElabelindent, \IEEEsetlabelwidth, | |
| 167 | + \IEEEusemathlabelsep | |
| 168 | + | |
| 169 | + 7) These commands/lengths now require the IEEE prefix and do not have | |
| 170 | + legacy support: \IEEEnormaljot. | |
| 171 | + For IED lists: \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin, \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor, | |
| 172 | + \IEEEiedlistdecl, \IEEElabelindentfactor | |
| 173 | + | |
| 174 | + 8) \normalsizebaselineskip skip replaced by | |
| 175 | + \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (nonrubber dimen) length. | |
| 176 | + Also, new \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (nonrubber dimen) | |
| 177 | + provided. | |
| 178 | + | |
| 179 | + 9) Now defaults to using Alpha numbering rather than Roman for appendices | |
| 180 | + numbering. This is because Alpha numbering is more common and avoids | |
| 181 | + problems with theorem numbering. \ifuseRomanappendices | |
| 182 | + (\useRomanappendicestrue, \useRomanappendicesfalse) is no longer | |
| 183 | + supported. Instead, use the new class option romanappendices if Roman | |
| 184 | + appendices numbering is desired. Thanks to Leonid Mirkin for reporting | |
| 185 | + the problem with theorems in appendices and suggesting changes. | |
| 186 | + | |
| 187 | +10) Improved paper size setting code for pdflatex. | |
| 188 | + | |
| 189 | +11) Better handling of theorem numbering when using the section counter | |
| 190 | + within the appendix(cies). Thanks to Leonid Mirkin for suggesting | |
| 191 | + this change. | |
| 192 | + | |
| 193 | +12) Fixed bug that caused equations at the end of theorems to be too | |
| 194 | + close to the line below them. | |
| 195 | + | |
| 196 | +13) Provided hook to conference mode console notice and changed notice to | |
| 197 | + better support conferences that use A4 paper. Thanks to Volker Kuhlmann | |
| 198 | + for suggesting this change. | |
| 199 | + | |
| 200 | +14) \IEEEauthorrefmark made robust to allow it to be used in \thanks | |
| 201 | + without a leading \protect | |
| 202 | + | |
| 203 | +15) Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with | |
| 204 | + OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use | |
| 205 | + available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts. | |
| 206 | + | |
| 207 | +16) Revised internal \@sect command to be more robust for users who employ | |
| 208 | + modified section heading formats. Thanks to Zarko F. Cucej for | |
| 209 | + suggesting this change. | |
| 210 | + | |
| 211 | +17) Improved \thesubsubsection definition to prevent breaks at the hyphen. | |
| 212 | + Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change. Thanks to | |
| 213 | + Dan Luecking and Heiko Oberdiek for explaining some of the various | |
| 214 | + alternatives and techniques to fix it. | |
| 215 | + | |
| 216 | +18) No longer provide \NAT@parse hack to get cite.sty to play (somewhat) | |
| 217 | + with hyperref.sty as this is already included in cite.sty version | |
| 218 | + 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later. | |
| 219 | + | |
| 220 | +19) At the beginning of document, set the default style of url.sty to be | |
| 221 | + the same as the current text font - as is done in IEEE journals. | |
| 222 | + | |
| 223 | +20) Corrected excessive line spacing in journal table captions. Thanks to | |
| 224 | + Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change. | |
| 225 | + | |
| 226 | +21) Corrected \thesubsubsection to use the "I-A1" format IEEE uses rather | |
| 227 | + than "I-A.1" as was done before. Ditto for \theparagraph. Thanks to | |
| 228 | + Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change. | |
| 229 | + | |
| 230 | +22) Enclose papersize specials within \AtBeginDvi in case someone wants | |
| 231 | + to make a format with IEEEtran. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for | |
| 232 | + suggesting this change. | |
| 233 | + | |
| 234 | +23) Eliminated the small space after abstract and keywords dash as IEEE | |
| 235 | + now does. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change. | |
| 236 | + | |
| 237 | +24) IEEEkeywords is no longer locked out in conference mode | |
| 238 | + | |
| 239 | +25) Increase defaults of \binoppenalty and \relpenalty to discourage | |
| 240 | + breaks within equations. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for suggesting | |
| 241 | + this change. | |
| 242 | + | |
| 243 | +26) Support optional argument for IEEEproof. Thanks to Ingo Steinwart for | |
| 244 | + suggesting this change. Also, start a new \par with \IEEEproof. | |
| 245 | + | |
| 246 | +27) Add support for an optional argument to \bstctlcite. | |
| 247 | + | |
| 248 | +28) Changed \topfraction and \dbltopfraction from 1.0 to 0.9. Thanks to | |
| 249 | + Donald Arseneau for suggesting this change. | |
| 250 | + | |
| 251 | + | |
| 252 | +******* | |
| 253 | + 2005/09/13 V1.6c (MDS) changes: | |
| 254 | + | |
| 255 | + 1) Changed endfigure/endfloat definitions so as not to cause problems with | |
| 256 | + preview-LaTeX and other packages. Thanks to Stephan Heuel and David | |
| 257 | + Kastrup for reporting this problem. | |
| 258 | + | |
| 259 | + | |
| 260 | + | |
| 261 | +******* | |
| 262 | + 2002/11/18 V1.6b (MDS) changes: | |
| 263 | + | |
| 264 | + 1) Fixed problem with figure captions when using hyperref. Thanks to | |
| 265 | + Leandro Barajas and Michael Bassetti for reporting this bug. | |
| 266 | + | |
| 267 | + 2) Provide a fake nabib command \NAT@parse so that hyperref will not | |
| 268 | + interfere with the operation of cite.sty. However, as a result citation | |
| 269 | + numbers will not be hyperlinked. Also, natbib will not be able to work | |
| 270 | + with IEEEtran. However, this is perhaps the best solution until | |
| 271 | + cite.sty and hyperref.sty are able to co-exist with each other. | |
| 272 | + It easy enough to override the fake command via: | |
| 273 | + \makeatletter | |
| 274 | + \let\NAT@parse\undefined | |
| 275 | + \makeatother | |
| 276 | + | |
| 277 | + 3) Revised font selection method so as not to have problems when used | |
| 278 | + with setspace.sty. Thanks to Zhang Yan for reporting this bug. | |
| 279 | + | |
| 280 | + 4) Added \special to feed papersize to dvips. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann | |
| 281 | + for suggesting this feature. | |
| 282 | + | |
| 283 | + 5) In addition to the IEEE IED lists, the original IED style list | |
| 284 | + environments (as is done in article.cls) are now provided as | |
| 285 | + LaTeXitemize, LaTeXenumerate, and LaTeXdescription. Also, users can | |
| 286 | + now redefine \makelabel within IEEE IED list controls. There may be | |
| 287 | + some use for this in specialized applications. Thanks to Eli Barzilay | |
| 288 | + for suggesting this feature. | |
| 289 | + | |
| 290 | + 6) \table* now defaults to \footnotesize text like \table. | |
| 291 | + | |
| 292 | + 7) The draft modes now no longer force a pagebreak after the title. | |
| 293 | + Thanks to Christian Peel for suggesting this change. | |
| 294 | + | |
| 295 | + 8) New draftclsnofoot mode is like draftcls, but does not display the | |
| 296 | + date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot of the page. Thanks to | |
| 297 | + Christian Peel for suggesting this feature. | |
| 298 | + | |
| 299 | + 9) New peerreview and peerreviewca modes with \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle | |
| 300 | + command allows for a "cover" titlepage for anonymous peer review. | |
| 301 | + Except for the cover titlepage, peerreview is much like journal mode. | |
| 302 | + peerreviewca is like peerreview, but allows the author names to be | |
| 303 | + entered and formatted as under conference mode so that author | |
| 304 | + affiliations and contact information can be easily seen on the cover | |
| 305 | + page. Thanks to Eric Benedict for suggesting this feature. | |
| 306 | + | |
| 307 | + | |
| 308 | + | |
| 309 | +******* | |
| 310 | + 2002/08/13 V1.6 (MDS) changes: | |
| 311 | + | |
| 312 | + 1) Added conference mode via conference option. Defaults to the | |
| 313 | + traditional journal mode. e.g., \documentclass[conference]{IEEEtran} | |
| 314 | + | |
| 315 | + 2) Added support for A4 paper via new a4paper option. Pdflatex's paper | |
| 316 | + size lengths are now automatically set to the proper paper size being | |
| 317 | + used. | |
| 318 | + | |
| 319 | + 3) Revised margins again. Page text is now horizontally centered. | |
| 320 | + Conference mode increases the top and bottom margins with the bottom | |
| 321 | + margin being slightly larger. For A4 paper, the top margin and text | |
| 322 | + typesetting will not change from those of US letter paper, but the side | |
| 323 | + margins will be smaller and the bottom margin will be larger than that | |
| 324 | + of US letter. All per IEEE specs. | |
| 325 | + | |
| 326 | + 4) Fixed footnote line spacing anomaly in draft mode. | |
| 327 | + Thanks to Alberto Rodriguez for reporting this bug. | |
| 328 | + | |
| 329 | + Also, slightly revised footnote and \thanks note spacing. | |
| 330 | + Set \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 to prevent LaTeX | |
| 331 | + from breaking footnotes across multiple pages or columns. | |
| 332 | + | |
| 333 | + 5) Fixed bug that caused overwritten photo areas and sometimes anomalous | |
| 334 | + spacing when a new paragraph was started within a biography. Also, | |
| 335 | + the presence of \par's, new lines or spaces at the beginning of | |
| 336 | + abstract, keywords, biography, or biographynophoto will no longer | |
| 337 | + affect the first word spacing. | |
| 338 | + Thanks to Eric Durant for reporting this bug. | |
| 339 | + | |
| 340 | + The biography environment now does a better job in preventing | |
| 341 | + a biography photo area from being broken across pages or columns. | |
| 342 | + | |
| 343 | + 6) Fixed whitespace between \cite entries bug. i.e., | |
| 344 | + both \cite{einstein24, knuth84} and \cite{einstein24,knuth84} | |
| 345 | + are now valid. \cite is now a robust command as it should be. | |
| 346 | + IEEEtran now no longer defines the old non-standard \shortcite or | |
| 347 | + \citename. | |
| 348 | + | |
| 349 | + The base IEEEtran.cls does not sort citation numbers or produce ranges | |
| 350 | + for three or more consecutive numbers. However, V1.6 of IEEEtran.cls | |
| 351 | + now pre-defines the following format control macros to facilitate easy | |
| 352 | + use with Donald Arseneau's cite.sty package (tested with cite.sty V3.9): | |
| 353 | + | |
| 354 | + \def\citepunct{], [} | |
| 355 | + \def\citedash{]--[} | |
| 356 | + | |
| 357 | + cite.sty is standard on most LaTeX sytems and can be obtained from | |
| 358 | + www.ctan.org. Thanks to Donald Arseneau for creating cite.sty, | |
| 359 | + providing the required format arguments to produce the IEEE style | |
| 360 | + and designing a cite interface capable of handling the IEEE citation | |
| 361 | + style. | |
| 362 | + | |
| 363 | + Note: Historically, IEEE has wanted authors to "hardcode" symbolics. | |
| 364 | + (i.e., replace all \cite{} with fixed [x]). However, it now seems that | |
| 365 | + most electronic manuscript submissions to IEEE are in .pdf format, and | |
| 366 | + as such, do not require the LaTeX document reference numbers to be hard | |
| 367 | + coded. If an author is required to submit actual LaTeX files, I do | |
| 368 | + recommend that the bibliography file (.bbl) be copied into the .tex | |
| 369 | + document and the \bibliographystyle{} and \bibliography{} commands be | |
| 370 | + commented out so that the .tex file does not depend on (potentially | |
| 371 | + lengthy and/or confidential) external bibliography database files | |
| 372 | + | |
| 373 | + 7) Adjusted some spacing parameters. The spacing above and below equations | |
| 374 | + has been revised (to a typical IEEE value). \jot now has a decent value. | |
| 375 | + The title text is now exactly 24pt. (On a related note, \fontsubfuzz has | |
| 376 | + been increased to 0.9pt to prevent annoying font substitution warnings | |
| 377 | + when using the Computer Modern fonts that use the 24.88pt size.) | |
| 378 | + In V1.6, \small is now 8.5pt in 9pt docs because \footnotesize is 8pt. | |
| 379 | + For 9pt docs, you should probably go ahead and use \footnotesize when | |
| 380 | + you need text a little smaller than \normalsize. | |
| 381 | + The interword spacing has been adjusted to be extremely close to that | |
| 382 | + which IEEE uses. You can use a new class option, nofonttune, if you need | |
| 383 | + to disable the adjusting of the interword spacing. This adjustment and | |
| 384 | + an increase to \hyphenpenalty have greatly reduced the amount of | |
| 385 | + hyphenation in a typical paper. | |
| 386 | + The baselineskip for the normalsize fonts has been tweaked to reduce | |
| 387 | + underfull vboxes on journal paper columns with only paragraphs. | |
| 388 | + Conference mode does the same thing but by also tweaking the \textheight | |
| 389 | + slightly off 9.25in (IEEE spec) to ensure an integer number of lines per | |
| 390 | + page. Draft (also draftcls) mode has also been revised to reduce | |
| 391 | + underfull vbox warnings. However, draft mode can still produce underfull | |
| 392 | + vboxes (a direct result of the increase in line spacing and margins) if: | |
| 393 | + A non-normalsize font occupies an entire column (abstract and index | |
| 394 | + terms take up a whole column by themselves); or the beginning of a | |
| 395 | + section occurs near the end of a column and cannot be squeezed into the | |
| 396 | + bottom, etc. This is normal as draft mode's liberal spacings cannot | |
| 397 | + guarantee perfect formatting. | |
| 398 | + | |
| 399 | + 8) New biographynophoto environment for biographies without photos. | |
| 400 | + Usage: | |
| 401 | + | |
| 402 | + \begin{biographynophoto}{author name} | |
| 403 | + biography text here | |
| 404 | + \end{biographynophoto} | |
| 405 | + | |
| 406 | + 9) Fixed bug that produced multiple table of contents entries for papers | |
| 407 | + with more than one biography. Also, biography now works better with | |
| 408 | + hyperref. | |
| 409 | + | |
| 410 | +10) New \sublargesize font size command provides for 11pt text in a 10pt | |
| 411 | + document. (Needed for things like author names.) For documents not | |
| 412 | + using 10pt normal size text, \sublargesize is currently identical | |
| 413 | + to \large. | |
| 414 | + | |
| 415 | +11) New \IEEEmembership command to provide correct font to indicate IEEE | |
| 416 | + membership for journal papers. | |
| 417 | + | |
| 418 | +12) Fixed author name line overflow problem when in journal mode. This | |
| 419 | + problem had been introduced in V1.5 in my rush to get \and to work for | |
| 420 | + conferences. \and is unneeded (and invalid) in journal mode. For | |
| 421 | + conference mode, \and will work as expected and features an optional | |
| 422 | + spacing argument. i.e., \and[\hspace{5ex}] | |
| 423 | + \and will default (recommended) to using \hfill which will result in | |
| 424 | + equal spacing between author blocks. | |
| 425 | + | |
| 426 | +13) New \authorblockN, \authorblockA and \authorrefmark commands to | |
| 427 | + facilitate easy formatting of author names, affiliations and cross | |
| 428 | + reference symbols, respectively, when in conference mode. These | |
| 429 | + three commands are to be used only for conference papers. | |
| 430 | + In conference mode, \author text is placed within a modified tabular | |
| 431 | + environment (somewhat like article.cls). So, within \author in | |
| 432 | + conference mode, you should not try to enclose multiple \\ within an | |
| 433 | + environment or command (other than the argument braces of | |
| 434 | + \authorblockX{}). For example: | |
| 435 | + | |
| 436 | + \author{\authorblockN{{John Doe \\ Jane Doe}}} % WRONG! | |
| 437 | + | |
| 438 | + will generate an error. | |
| 439 | + | |
| 440 | + Note that font size/attribute changes will now persists across \\ | |
| 441 | + within \author. (But, not across author blocks nor across \and.) | |
| 442 | + However, with the new commands, there should be no need to alter any | |
| 443 | + font attributes within \author. All text sizing and spacing within | |
| 444 | + \author{} and the author block commands is per IEEE specs for both | |
| 445 | + conference and journal modes. (In conference mode, the author names | |
| 446 | + are only very slightly larger than the affiliations which are in normal | |
| 447 | + size.) For specialized applications you can alter the justification of | |
| 448 | + author lines by placing \hfill at the beginning or at the end of a line. | |
| 449 | + The interline spacing within \author is determined by the font | |
| 450 | + attributes that are in effect at the end of each line within author. | |
| 451 | + | |
| 452 | +14) Because the titles and author name blocks use different font | |
| 453 | + sizes/styles from the main text, it was possible that two column papers | |
| 454 | + with titles that span both columns (standard journal and conference | |
| 455 | + papers, but not technotes) with certain numbers of lines for the title | |
| 456 | + and authors' name/affiliations can cause underfull vbox problems | |
| 457 | + (paragraphs with large spacings between them) in the second column of | |
| 458 | + the main text on the title page - if there were no new sections, | |
| 459 | + equations or figures in this column (they would provide some needed | |
| 460 | + rubber spacing). The use of things like special paper notices and | |
| 461 | + publisher ID marks also affected this issue. The problem could not | |
| 462 | + happen in the first column because the first column has a rubber length | |
| 463 | + around the heading of the first section. Furthermore, problems seldom | |
| 464 | + occurred on pages after the first as the margins had been chosen not to | |
| 465 | + cause it with the popular font sizes. Rubber lengths after the author | |
| 466 | + names would not fix this problem. | |
| 467 | + Auto-calculating a "good" spacing after the title is a tad difficult | |
| 468 | + to do in LaTeX. However, I am pleased to report that V1.6 has this new | |
| 469 | + capability - "dynamically determined title spacing". IEEEtran will now | |
| 470 | + measure the height of all the title and author text in \maketitle | |
| 471 | + and then calculate a rigid (non-rubber) spacer to follow that meets | |
| 472 | + IEEE specs and also produces a \textheight on the title page that | |
| 473 | + ensures an integer number of normalsized lines on the rest of the page. | |
| 474 | + Single column papers, and two column papers with the title entirely in | |
| 475 | + column one (technotes) do not need dynamic rigid spacing and therefore | |
| 476 | + use standard rubber spacers. | |
| 477 | + | |
| 478 | + Note: This problem can still crop up if you use floats that span both | |
| 479 | + columns (i.e., figure*). It has been a decade+ long limitation with | |
| 480 | + LaTeX that the stretchable portion of \dbltextfloatsep is ignored. | |
| 481 | + If you get a problem with underful vbox warnings and paragraphs that | |
| 482 | + "are pulled apart" on page with a float that spans both columns, tweak | |
| 483 | + the space between the figure and the main text a little: | |
| 484 | + | |
| 485 | + \vskip 5pt | |
| 486 | + \end{figure*} | |
| 487 | + | |
| 488 | + If you can't find a value that fixes both columns, you are going to | |
| 489 | + have to put a rubber spacer somewhere in one or both of the columns. | |
| 490 | +15) Because of change #14 above, those of you using \pubid will, as of V1.6, | |
| 491 | + have to place it *before* \maketitle in order for it have the intended | |
| 492 | + affect. The dynamic spacer algorithm must see if you are using \pubid | |
| 493 | + when \maketitle is called. \pubidadjcol works as before except that it | |
| 494 | + now has additional logic to prevent it from doing anything if \pubid | |
| 495 | + was never called. | |
| 496 | + | |
| 497 | +16) In some unusual, non-standard circumstances, an author may desire to | |
| 498 | + alter the spacing after the title area or put some unusual text above | |
| 499 | + the main text. For instance, to stop a bad break when a new section | |
| 500 | + occurs right at the start of the second page. This is difficult to do | |
| 501 | + when the title spans both columns of two column text since LaTeX treats | |
| 502 | + such title text as a type of float. A new command, | |
| 503 | + \IEEEaftertitletext{}, gives access to the end of that produced by | |
| 504 | + \maketitle. The types of things that can go into \IEEEaftertitletext | |
| 505 | + are the same as those into \twocolumn[] - no \par, but \\ are OK. There | |
| 506 | + is no restriction on the range of spacings that can be used. e.g., | |
| 507 | + \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{-100pt}} will push the main text well into | |
| 508 | + the title and \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{100pt}} will push it far down | |
| 509 | + the page. You will have complete control. If used, place | |
| 510 | + \IEEEaftertitletext{} before \maketitle like \title and \author. | |
| 511 | + IEEEtran's dynamic title spacing intentionally does not take into | |
| 512 | + consideration the contents of \IEEEaftertitletext{} when determining | |
| 513 | + the spacer after the title area (otherwise it would try to second | |
| 514 | + guess you), so the user will have manually adjust the height of the | |
| 515 | + contents in \IEEEaftertitletext{} if the problem discussed in #14 above | |
| 516 | + should develop. A safe bet is to keep the height of contents of | |
| 517 | + \IEEEaftertitletext{} to integer multiples of \baselineskip, e.g., | |
| 518 | + \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{-1\baselineskip}} | |
| 519 | + | |
| 520 | + Because it can result in an IEEE nonstandard format, the use of | |
| 521 | + \IEEEaftertitletext{} is discouraged. Possible uses include (1) the use | |
| 522 | + of IEEEtran for non-IEEE work with different title spacing requirements, | |
| 523 | + or (2) as an emergency manual override if a problem should develop in | |
| 524 | + IEEEtran's automatic spacing algorithm. | |
| 525 | + | |
| 526 | +17) completely rewritten \PARstart to: | |
| 527 | + a. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment | |
| 528 | + within the paragraph that uses \PARstart. | |
| 529 | + b. auto-detect and use the current font family | |
| 530 | + c. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that | |
| 531 | + interword glue will now work as normal. | |
| 532 | + d. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. | |
| 533 | + | |
| 534 | + Because the current font family is now auto-detected, there is no | |
| 535 | + longer any need for \CMPARstart - it is now the same as \PARstart. | |
| 536 | + | |
| 537 | +18) There is now a new "open box" Q.E.D. symbol (\QEDopen) as well as the | |
| 538 | + original default (\QED) closed one (\QEDclosed). Some journals use | |
| 539 | + the open form. To make \proof use the open form, just do: | |
| 540 | + \renewcommand{\QED}{\QEDopen} | |
| 541 | + | |
| 542 | +19) Additional \typeout{} notices added to warn the user when unusual | |
| 543 | + settings/commands are detected or as reminders to avoid common errors | |
| 544 | + when in conference mode. | |
| 545 | + | |
| 546 | +20) IEEEtran now provides \abovecaptionskip and \belowcaptionskip skip | |
| 547 | + registers because article class provides them and some packages | |
| 548 | + may error if they are missing. However, IEEEtran only uses | |
| 549 | + \abovecaptionskip for actual caption spacing. | |
| 550 | + | |
| 551 | +21) Fixed bug that prevented users from redefining the section headings | |
| 552 | + to use arabic digits. Thanks to Richardt H. Wilkinson for reporting | |
| 553 | + this bug. | |
| 554 | + | |
| 555 | +22) Code cleaned up to be more efficient with the use of TeX registers; | |
| 556 | + removed some old LaTeX 2.09 code; revised option processing to | |
| 557 | + LaTeX2e standard; eliminated unwanted "phantom" spaces in some | |
| 558 | + environments. | |
| 559 | + | |
| 560 | +23) Added new \IEEEeqnarray, \IEEEeqnarraybox, \IEEEeqnarrayboxm and | |
| 561 | + \IEEEeqnarrayboxt environments to provide superior alternatives to the | |
| 562 | + standard LaTeX \eqnarray, \array and \tabular. Additional new support | |
| 563 | + commands include \IEEEeqnarraydecl, \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl, | |
| 564 | + \IEEEeqnarraymathstyle, \IEEEeqnarraytextstyle, \yesnumber. | |
| 565 | + \IEEEnonumber, \IEEEyesnumber, \IEEEyessubnumber, \IEEEeqnarraynumspace, | |
| 566 | + \IEEEeqnarraymulticol, \IEEEeqnarrayomit, \IEEEeqnarraydefcol, | |
| 567 | + \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep, \IEEEeqnarrayseprow, \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut, | |
| 568 | + \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow, \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut, | |
| 569 | + \IEEEeqnarraystrutmode, \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize, | |
| 570 | + \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd, \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, | |
| 571 | + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse and \IEEEstrut. | |
| 572 | + These are documented in the user's guide. | |
| 573 | + | |
| 574 | +24) V1.6 changed back to using () around theorem names (which are also now | |
| 575 | + in italics) as this is what IEEE is using now. Thanks to Christian Peel | |
| 576 | + for reporting this. Also, when section numbers are used as the first | |
| 577 | + part of theorem numbers, display them in arabic, not Roman. | |
| 578 | + | |
| 579 | +25) New \IEEEtriggeratref{X} command allows a page break to be triggered | |
| 580 | + just before the given reference number "X". This is most useful when | |
| 581 | + balancing the columns on the last page and a \newpage between references | |
| 582 | + is desired. \IEEEtriggercmd{X} allows a different command to be executed | |
| 583 | + at trigger. | |
| 584 | + | |
| 585 | + | |
| 586 | + | |
| 587 | +******* | |
| 588 | + 2001/07/26 V1.5 (MDS) changes: | |
| 589 | + | |
| 590 | + | |
| 591 | + 1) Fixed \and within \author bug: (! Misplaced \crcr. \endtabular ->\crcr) | |
| 592 | + Thanks to Rainer Dorsch for discovering and reporting that \and | |
| 593 | + did not work. | |
| 594 | + | |
| 595 | + 2) Fixed the biography environment so that if a biography's text is shorter | |
| 596 | + than the area allocated for the photo, a collision with the next | |
| 597 | + biography does not occur. You can now put real graphics (using the | |
| 598 | + graphicx package) into the biography photo box with a new optional | |
| 599 | + argument of the biography command! For example: | |
| 600 | + | |
| 601 | + \begin{biography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip, | |
| 602 | + keepaspectratio]{./tux.eps}}]{Linux Penguin} | |
| 603 | + | |
| 604 | + will use the specified graphic as the author's photo. The photo area is | |
| 605 | + exactly 1in wide by 1.25in high - as is done in IEEE Transactions. Try | |
| 606 | + to keep the same 4:5 aspect ratio if scanning/cropping your photos. | |
| 607 | + Note the need for the extra set of enclosing braces around the | |
| 608 | + \includegraphics. Without it, The LaTeX parser may get confused when it | |
| 609 | + sees the \includegraphics's brackets within the biography's optional | |
| 610 | + argument. Due to the length of the \includegraphics command, you may | |
| 611 | + wish to define your own shorthand form of it. I have not done so with | |
| 612 | + IEEEtran to prevent dependence on the graphicx package. If you do not | |
| 613 | + use the optional argument, or leave it empty, a standard frame box | |
| 614 | + with the words "Place Photo Here" will be used. If you want the space | |
| 615 | + to remain completely empty, you can do: | |
| 616 | + | |
| 617 | + \begin{biography}[\mbox{}]{The Invisible Man} | |
| 618 | + | |
| 619 | + The interface to biography's optional argument is into a | |
| 620 | + 1in X 1.25in minipage in which the argument text is centered both | |
| 621 | + horizontally and vertically: | |
| 622 | + | |
| 623 | + \begin{minipage}[b][1.25in][c]{1in}% | |
| 624 | + \centering | |
| 625 | + #1% | |
| 626 | + \end{minipage} | |
| 627 | + | |
| 628 | + Within the biography environment, \unitlength is set to 1in. | |
| 629 | + With this in mind, you can even design your own custom frameboxes. | |
| 630 | + For instance: | |
| 631 | + | |
| 632 | + \begin{biography}[\framebox(1,1.25){\parbox[][\height | |
| 633 | + ][c]{0.9in}{\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ | |
| 634 | + HERE}}]{Author Name} | |
| 635 | + | |
| 636 | + will yield the same type of result as the default photo box. | |
| 637 | + | |
| 638 | + Thanks to Herbert Voss for discovering the collision bug, suggesting | |
| 639 | + the ability to handle graphics and providing some prototype code. | |
| 640 | + | |
| 641 | + | |
| 642 | + | |
| 643 | +******* | |
| 644 | + 2001/03/15 V1.4 (MDS) changes: | |
| 645 | + | |
| 646 | + | |
| 647 | + 1) New "draftcls" and "final" options have been added. | |
| 648 | + Thanks to Dragan Cvetkovic for suggesting an option like draftcls. | |
| 649 | + | |
| 650 | + 2) Documentation changes to reflect the fact that this IEEEtran.cls | |
| 651 | + is no longer beta test. | |
| 652 | + | |
| 653 | + 3) Slightly revised caption sizes. Figure and table captions are now | |
| 654 | + in \footnotesize, not \small as before. | |
| 655 | + | |
| 656 | + 4) Allow user to control figure caption justification. IEEEtran.cls | |
| 657 | + normally defaults to left justified as is done in Transactions. | |
| 658 | + However, for conferences, you may wish to issue the command: | |
| 659 | + \centerfigcaptionstrue | |
| 660 | + in the preamble. Short (less than one line long) figure captions | |
| 661 | + will then be centered. Multi-line figure captions will always be | |
| 662 | + properly left justified. V1.6: This is already done for you when | |
| 663 | + using the conference mode. | |
| 664 | + | |
| 665 | + | |
| 666 | + | |
| 667 | +******* | |
| 668 | + 2001/01/18 V1.3 | |
| 669 | + Michael Shell (MDS) made extensive changes and additions: | |
| 670 | + | |
| 671 | + | |
| 672 | + BUGS FIXED (and many others too numerous to mention!): | |
| 673 | + 1) Fixed improper alignment with itemized, enumerated and | |
| 674 | + description lists. Added new controls to these three | |
| 675 | + environments so that it is easy to get the alignment IEEE | |
| 676 | + uses. Furthermore, the itemize, enumerate and description lists | |
| 677 | + no longer force a new paragraph to begin at the end the list | |
| 678 | + (\par). (Sometimes lists are used within paragraphs.) | |
| 679 | + | |
| 680 | + 2) JVH's fixes now allow things like $\mathbf{N}(0,P(0))$ | |
| 681 | + to work properly without needing the extra braces: | |
| 682 | + ${\mathbf{N}}(0,P(0))$. There is no longer any dependence | |
| 683 | + on the "rawfonts" and "oldlfont" packages. Thanks Juergen! | |
| 684 | + | |
| 685 | + 3) Fixed underfull hbox errors and incorrect reference number | |
| 686 | + alignment when the number of references in the bibliography | |
| 687 | + exceeded 9 entries (which is almost every paper!). | |
| 688 | + | |
| 689 | + 4) Removed dependence on the LaTeX sizexx.clo files. | |
| 690 | + Now, 9pt documents should work correctly even on systems that | |
| 691 | + lack a size9.clo file. This is most often used in conjunction | |
| 692 | + with the option "technote" for "correspondence" papers like those | |
| 693 | + in IEEE Transactions on Information Theory. For virtually all | |
| 694 | + other papers, 10pt is used and so it is the default. | |
| 695 | + Some improper font sizes have been corrected. \footnotesize is | |
| 696 | + now 8pt in 9pt docs, so footnotes in technotes should be the | |
| 697 | + correct size now. | |
| 698 | + | |
| 699 | + 5) Added \interlinepenalty within the bibliography section to discourage | |
| 700 | + LaTeX from breaking within a reference. IEEE almost never breaks within | |
| 701 | + a reference and when they do it is usually in technotes | |
| 702 | + (correspondence papers). You may get an underfull vbox warning in the | |
| 703 | + bibliography indicating that the spacing just before the "REFERENCES" | |
| 704 | + section is larger than normal, but the final result will be more like | |
| 705 | + what IEEE will publish. See the comments in the BIBLIOGRAPHY section | |
| 706 | + around line 2034 below if you want to change this behavior. | |
| 707 | + | |
| 708 | + 6) No longer "blows up" when you use \paragraph and have a table | |
| 709 | + of contents. | |
| 710 | + | |
| 711 | + 7) Theorem environment changed, (but for V1.6, back to the old way, sigh). | |
| 712 | + | |
| 713 | + 8) Figure captions adjusted: IEEE left (not center) justifies | |
| 714 | + figure captions (for journals) and does not indent figure caption text. | |
| 715 | + | |
| 716 | + 9) Adjusted some spacings in the table of contents(TOC))/list-of-figures/ | |
| 717 | + list-of-tables so that section/table numbers will not so easily | |
| 718 | + collide with the titles. Section VIII was usually the worst offender. | |
| 719 | + Still doesn't right justify the section numbers, but neither does | |
| 720 | + article.cls (This must be why LaTeX likes the x.y.z section numbering | |
| 721 | + scheme unlike I, II, III, etc. of IEEE. ) | |
| 722 | + It may be "normal" as it is (left justified). sigh. | |
| 723 | + | |
| 724 | +10) Now uses "index terms" now as a heading instead of "keywords". | |
| 725 | + Furthermore, the "index terms" and "abstract" headings are in bold | |
| 726 | + italic. This is how IEEE does things. | |
| 727 | + | |
| 728 | +11) \thebibliography and \biography now put entries into | |
| 729 | + the table of contents for you. | |
| 730 | + | |
| 731 | + | |
| 732 | +******* | |
| 733 | + | |
| 734 | + | |
| 735 | + | |
| 736 | + | |
| 737 | + ******* | |
| 738 | + 2000/09/06 (JVH) changes: (now designated as V1.2) | |
| 739 | + | |
| 740 | + made some corrections to get closer to LaTeX2e | |
| 741 | + 20000906 Juergen v.Hagen | |
| 742 | + vonhagen@ihefiji.etec.uni-karlsruhe.de | |
| 743 | + | |
| 744 | + Permission to redistribute granted as of December 2000. | |
| 745 | + ******* | |
| 746 | + | |
| 747 | + | |
| 748 | + | |
| 749 | + | |
| 750 | + | |
| 751 | + ******* | |
| 752 | + | |
| 753 | + 1996 (JWD) LaTeX2e version: (now designated as V1.1) | |
| 754 | + | |
| 755 | + In the most recent TeXhax digest, there was a request for a copy of | |
| 756 | + IEEEtrans.sty modified to work with LaTeX2e. I have a version I | |
| 757 | + modified to make it IEEEtrans.cls, which I have sent to the person | |
| 758 | + making the request and am now sending to you to consider posting to | |
| 759 | + the archives. | |
| 760 | + -- | |
| 761 | + Jon Dixon | |
| 762 | + dixonj@colorado.edu | |
| 763 | + http://spot.colorado.edu/~dixonj/ | |
| 764 | + | |
| 765 | +******* | |
| 766 | + | |
| 767 | + | |
| 768 | + | |
| 769 | + | |
| 770 | + | |
| 771 | +******* | |
| 772 | + | |
| 773 | + 30-August-1993 original LaTeX 2.09 version (IEEEtran.sty), | |
| 774 | + (now designated as V1.0): | |
| 775 | + | |
| 776 | + by Gerry Murray and Silvano Balemi | |
| 777 | + Automatic Control Lab, ETH Zurich, Switzerland | |
| 778 | + balemi@aut.ee.ethz.ch | |
| 779 | + | |
| 780 | +******* | |
| 781 | + | |
| 782 | + | |
| 783 | + | ... | ... |